HP (Hewlett-Packard) HP 3000 Laptop User manual

PDF

Dokumentum

Hirdetés

MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual

HP 3000 MPE/iX Computer Systems

Edition 10

32650-90864

E1098

Printed in: U.S.A. October 1998

Notice

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing or use of this material.

Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett-Packard.

This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in

Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.

Rights for non-DOD U.S. Government Departments and Agencies are as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (1,2).

Hewlett-Packard Company

3000 Hanover Street

Palo Alto, CA 94304 U.S.A.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1. Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2. Command Definitions A-B

Commands and Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Native Mode Command Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Remote Sessions and Command Intrinsics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Running the CI as a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

ABORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

ABORTIO/ =ABORTIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

ABORTJOB/ =ABORTJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

ACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

ALLOCATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

ALLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

ALTACCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

ALTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

ALTGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

ALTJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ALTLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

ALTPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ALTSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

ALTSPOOLFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

ALTUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

BASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

BASICGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

BASICOMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

BASICPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

BBASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

BBASICGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

BBASICOMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

BBASICPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

BBXL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

BBXLCOMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

BBXLGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

BBXLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

BREAKJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

BUILD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

BYE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

3. Command Definitions C-E

CALC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

CCXL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

CCXLGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

CCXLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

CHANGELOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

CHDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

CHGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

COB74XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

COB74XLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

COB74XLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

COB85XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

COB85XLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

COB85XLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

COBOLII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

COBOLIIGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

COBOLIIPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

CONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

DEALLOCATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

DELETESPOOLFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

DELETEVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

DISALLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

DISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

DISCRPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

DISCUSE (UDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

DISKUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

DISMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

DO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

DOIONOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

DSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

ECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

ELSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

ELSEIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

ENDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

ENDWHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

EOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

EOJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

ERRCLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

ERRDUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

4. Command Definition F-K

FCOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

FINDDIR (UDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

FINDFILE (UDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

FORMSALIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

FORTGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

FORTPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

FORTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

FREERIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

FTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

FTNGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

FTNPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

FTNXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

FTNXLGO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

FTNXLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

GETLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

GETRIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

HEADOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

HEADON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

HELLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

INPUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

JOBFENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

JOBPRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

JOBSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

LDISMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

LISTACCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

LISTDIR (UDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

LISTEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

LISTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

5. Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

LISTFTEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

LISTGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

LISTJOBQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

LISTLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

LISTREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

LISTSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

LISTUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

LMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

=LOGOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

=LOGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

MOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

NEWACCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

NEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

NEWGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

NEWJOBQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

NEWLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

NEWUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

NSCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

OCTCOMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

OPENQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

OUTFENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

6. Command Definitions P-R

PASCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

PASCALGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

PASCALPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

PASXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

PASXLGO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

PASXLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

PAUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428

PLISTF (UDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

PREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434

PREPRUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447

PURGEACCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450

PURGEDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

PURGEGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

PURGEJOBQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459

PURGELINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

PURGEUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

RECALL/=RECALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463

REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465

REFUSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471

RELEASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

RELLOG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474

RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475

REPLY/=REPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477

REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482

RESETACCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484

RESETDUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486

RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

RESUMEJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

RESUMELOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504

RESUMESPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505

RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507

RPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508

RPGGO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

RPGPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512

RPGXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515

RPGXLGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518

RPGXLLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

7. Command Definitions S-SO

SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536

SECURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538

SEGMENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540

SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

SETCATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

SETCLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

SETCOUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

SETDUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

SETJCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

SETMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

SHOWALLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

SHOWALLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

SHOWCATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

SHOWCLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

SHOWDEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

SHOWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

SHOWJCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

SHOWJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

SHOWLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

SHOWLOGSTATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

SHOWME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

SHOWOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

SHOWPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

SHOWQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

SHOWTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

SHOWVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

=SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

SHUTQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

8. Command Definitions SP-Z

SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

SPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

SPLGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

SPLPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

SPOOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

SPOOLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

STARTSESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

STARTSPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

STOPSPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

STREAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

SUSPENDSPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

SWITCHLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

SYSGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

TELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

TELLOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

TUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

VMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

VSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

VSOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

VSRELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

VSRELEASESYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

VSRESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

VSRESERVESYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700

VSTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701

VSUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710

WARN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711

WELCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713

WHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715

XEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717

A. Predefined Variables in MPE/iX

B. Expression Evaluator Functions

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Expression Evaluator Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739

C. Terminal and Printer Types

D. Subsystem Formal File Designators

E. MPE/iX File Codes

F. Wildcard Characters

Restricted Rights Legend 2

Table 2-1. Parm= values for the CI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Table 2-2. Default Parameters for the ALTACCT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Table 2-3. Default Values for the ALTGROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Table 2-4. Default Values for the ALTUSER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Table 3-1. Logical Operators - The CALC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Table 3-2. Results of CALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Table 3-3. Command Acceptance of Naming Conventions - DISMOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Table 3-4. DO Command - Reexecute Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Table 3-5. Editing Directives for the DO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Table 3-6. Editing Samples for the DO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Table 3-7. Disk Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Table 3-8. Logical Operators - The ELSEIF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Table 3-9. End-of-File Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Table 4-1. Logical Operators - The IF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Table 4-2. INPUT Command Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Table 4-3. Command Acceptance of Naming Conventions - LDISMOUNT Command. . . . . . . . . . 309

Table 4-4. Checklevel Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Table 4-5. Format Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Table 5-1. Format Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Table 5-2. List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Table 5-3. History Stack Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Table 5-4. Command Acceptance of Naming Conventions - LMOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Table 5-5. Command Acceptance of Naming Conventions - MOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Table 5-6. Account Manager Default Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Table 5-7. CI Commands Affected by Symbolic Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Table 5-8. User Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Table 6-1. PRINT Command Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Table 6-2. Re-execute Directives for the REDO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Table 6-3. Editing Directives for the REDO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Table 6-4. REDO Editing Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Table 7-1. Logical Operators - The SETVAR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Table 7-2. Specified Variable-ID/Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Table 8-1. Logical Operators - The WHILE Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Table A-1. Predefined Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

Table B-1. Expression Evaluator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

Table B-2. FINFO Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

Table C-1. MPE/iX Terminal Types and Similar MPE V/E Terminal Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

Table C-2. MPE/iX Printer Types and Similar MPE V/E Terminal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

Table C-3. MPE V/E Terminal and Similar MPE/iX Terminal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

Table C-4. MPE V/E Terminal and Similar MPE/iX Printer Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

Table D-1. Formal File Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

Table E-1. File Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

Table F-1. Table F-1. Wildcard Character Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Preface

The ninth edition of the MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual is one volume with command descriptions alphabetically from A through X. This manual is written for all users of the HP 3000 MPE/iX Computers. MPE/iX, Multiprogramming Executive with

Integrated POSIX, is the latest in a series of forward-compatible operating systems for the

HP 3000 line of computers.

In HP documentation and in talking with HP 3000 users, you will encounter references to

MPE XL, the direct predecessor of MPE/iX. MPE/iX is a superset of MPE XL. All programs written for MPE XL will run without change unde MPE/iX. You can continue to use MPE

XL system documentation, although it may not refer to features added to the operating system to support POSIX (for example, hierarchical directories).

Finally, you may encounter references to MPE V, which is the operating system for HP

3000s, not based on the PA-RISC architecture. MPE V software can be run on the PA-RISC

(Series 900) HP 3000s in what is known as compatibility mode.

The MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual is organized into eight chapters. A description of each chapter follows:

Chapters 2 thru 8 of this manual, explains the purpose, syntax, parameters, and operation

(including examples) for each MPE/iX command. If you know which command to use for the task you wish to perform, turn directly to that command definition in chapter 2. For your convenience, commands are organized alphabetically. If you don't know which command to use, Chapter 1, which contains a listing of commands by task, is a good place to start. After reading the brief description, turn to the appropriate command definition.

For supplemental information on command syntax and use, refer to the MPE/iX General

User's Reference Manual.

Chapter 1 Commands by Task provides an introduction to all MPE/iX commands

and their functions, categorized by the task they perform.

Chapters 2-8 Command Definitions provides documentation on each MPE/iX

command alphabetically for your ease of use.

Conventions

The following conventions are used throughout this manual.

italics

{ }

In a syntax statement or an example, a word in intalics represents a parameter or argument that you must replace with the actual value. In the following example, you must replace filename with the name of the file:

COMMAND

filename

In a syntax statement, braces enclose required elements. When several elements are included within braces, you must select one. In the following example, you must select either

OFF

[ ]

[ ... ]

| ... |

COMMAND {ON | OFF}

In a syntax statement, brackets enclose optional elements. In the following example,

OPTION

can be omitted:

COMMAND filename [OPTION]

When several elements are enclosed within brackets, you canm select one or none of the elements. In following example, you can select OPTION or parameter or neither. The elements cannot be repeated.

COMMAND filename [OPTION | parameter]

In a syntax statement, horizontal ellipses enclosed in brackets indicate that you can repeatedly select the element(s) that appear within the immediately preceding pair of brackets or braces. In the example below, you can select parameter zero or more times. Each instance of parameter must be preceded by a comma:

[,parameter][...]

In the example below, you can only use the commas as a delimiter if papameter is repeated; no comma is used before the first occurrence of papameter:

[parameter][ ,... ]

In a syntax statement, horizontal ellipses enclosed in vertical bars indicate that you can select more that one element within the immediately prededing pair of brackets or braces. However, each particular element can only be selected once. In the followig example you must select A, AB, BA, or B. The elements cannot be repeated.

[A | B] |...|

Commands by Task

Commands are used to communicate with the MPE/iX operating system. They request

MPE/iX to perform a specific task or provide specific information.

Chapter 1 13

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

Task-Related Commands

This chapter is an introduction to MPE/iX commands and their functions, categorized by the task they perform.

The categories of tasks identified for MPE/iX commands are:

• Accessing Subsystems and Utilities.

• Command Interpreter Programming Tools.

• Communicating with Other Users.

• Executing User Programs.

• Managing Accounts, Groups, and Users.

• Managing Devices.

• Managing Files.

• Managing Jobs and Sessions.

• Managing Spooler Operations.

• Managing System Resources.

• Managing User/System Logging.

• Managing Variables and Job Control Words.

• Managing Volumes (Disk Drives).

• Using Command Files and User-Defined Commands.

• Using Computer Language Programs.

To use this chapter, first determine what task you want to perform, for example, create a new account. Check the list above to find an appropriate category, which in this case would be "Managing Accounts, Groups, and Users". Turn to that category and you will find a list of MPE/iX commands that perform tasks related to managing accounts and a description of the particular function for each command.

14 Chapter 1

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

Check that list to find an appropriate functional description, which in this case is "Creates a new account". Then check the lefthand column for the name of the command that performs that function, which in this case is

NEWACCT

When you have located the command that most closely performs the task you want to accomplish, turn to chapter 2 of this manual for complete information about the syntax, parameters, operation, use, and examples for that command. For your convenience, the commands in chapter 2 are listed in alphabetical order.

Command Function

Accessing Subsystems and Utilities

DEBUG

Instructs MPE/iX to enter the system debugger.

EDITOR

FCOPY

HELP

RESETDUMP

SEGMENTER

SETDUMP

SYSGEN

VOLUTIL

Starts the EDIT/3000 subsystem.

Runs the FCOPY subsystem

Accesses the help subsystem.

Disarms the debug facility call that is made during abnormal process termination.

Starts the MPE segmenter.

Arms the system debug facility for a process abort.

UDC that executes SH.HPBIN.SYS, the POSIX shell

Starts configuration dialog and/or installation tape creation.

Managing user volume sets

Command Interpreter Programming

CALC

or # Evaluates an expression

COMMENT

CONTINUE

ECHO

ELSE

ELSEIF

ENDIF

ENDWHILE

ESCAPE

INPUT

Inserts a comment into a job stream or user command.

Overrides a job error so that the job or user command continues executing.

Displays a message on the terminal for a session or the printer for a job.

Provides an alternate execution sequence within an IF statement.

Terminates an IF block.

Terminates a WHILE block.

Allows the CI programmer to simulate all aspects of CI error handling.

Used to control the execution sequence of a job, UDC, or command file.

Allows you to interactively assign a value to any variable that can be set with the

SETVAR

command.

Chapter 1 15

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

RETURN

SETVAR

WHILE

Causes execution to return from the current user command (UDC or command file) to the calling environment

Creates or modifies a CI variable.

Used to control execution in a job, session, UDC, or command file.

Communicating with Other Users

TELL

Sends a message to another active session.

TELLOP

WARN

WELCOME

Sends a message to the system console.

Sends an urgent message to jobs/sessions.

Used to create the system welcome message.

Executing User Programs

LINK

Creates an executable program file.

OCTCOMP

PREP

PREPRUN

Converts a compiled MPE V/E program into native mode code for the HP

3000 Series 900.

Prepares a compatibility mode program from a user subprogram library onto a program file.

Prepares and executes a compiled compatibility mode program.

PROGRAM

FILENAME

RUN

Executes a program. Note the filename may be qualified using the

HPPATH CI variable

Executes a prepared or linked program.

Managing Accounts, Groups, and Users

ALTACCT

Changes the attributes of an existing account.

ALTGROUP

ALTUSER

LISTACCT

LISTGROUP

LISTUSER

NEWACCT

NEWGROUP

NEWUSER

Changes the attributes of an existing group.

Changes the attributes of an existing user.

Displays information about a specified account(s).

Displays information about a specified group(s).

Displays information about a specified user(s).

Creates a new account.

Creates a new group.

Creates a new user.

PURGEACCT

Removes an account from the system.

PURGEGROUP

Removes a group from the system.

16 Chapter 1

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

PURGEUSER

REPORT

Removes a user from an account.

Displays accounting information about the logon account and group.

Managing Devices

ABORTIO

=ABORTIO

ASSOCIATE

Aborts a single pending I/O request for a device.

Gives a user operator control of a device.

DEVCNTRL

Script that ejects a tape an/or sets a tape device online.

DISASSOCIATE

Removes control of a device from a user.

DOWN

DOWNLOAD

HEADOFF

HEADON

Removes a device from normal system use.

Downloads format information to a line printer.

Stops header/trailer output to a device.

Resumes header/trailer output to a device.

SET

SETMSG

SHOWDEV

SHOWIN

SHOWOUT

SPEED

STREAMS

Sets terminal and

$STDLIST

configuration.

Enables/disables receipt of user or operator messages on the terminal.

Reports the status of input/output devices.

Reports the status of input device files.

Displays the status of output device files.

Sets the input/output speed for a terminal.

Enables/disables the STREAMS device allowing users to submit job/data streams to a designated device.

Returns a device (except disk drives) stopped with a

DOWN

command to normal function on the system.

Managing Files

ALTFILE

Changes a file’s owner or group ID

ALTSEC

BUILD

CHDIR

COPY

DATA

FILE

LISTEQ

LISTF

Changes a file's security provisions.

Creates and allocates a new empty file on disk.

Changes the current working directory.

Copies one file to another file.

Enters data into the system from a device file.

Declares file attributes for a file when it is opened.

Displays all active file equations for a job or session.

Displays information about permanent files.

Chapter 1 17

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

LISTFTEMP

NEWDIR

NEWLINK

PURGE

PURGEDIR

PURGELINK

RELEASE

RENAME

RESET

RESTORE

SAVE

SECURE

STORE

VSTORE

LISTFILE

Lists file information using native mode scanning/parsing that can be easily expanded.

Displays information about temporary files.

Creates a directory

Creates a symbolic link

Prints the contents of a file.

Deletes a file from the system.

Deletes a directory.

Deletes a symbolic link, empty directory, or a regular file.

Removes all security provisions for a file.

Changes the name of a file.

Cancels file equations.

Returns files stored on tape to the system.

Saves a file in the permanent system file domain.

Restores security provisions for a file.

Copies disk files onto magnetic tape for storage.

Verifies data on native mode backup media and reports errors incurred by

STORE when writing the tape.

Managing Jobs and Sessions

ABORT

Aborts the current program or operation.

ABORTJOB =ABORTJOB

Aborts a job or session.

Permits a designated device to accept jobs/sessions and/or data.

ALTJOB

BREAKJOB

Alters the attributes of waiting or scheduled jobs.

Suspends an executing job.

BYE

CHDIR

CHGROUP

:EOD

EOJ

EXIT

Ends an interactive session.

Changes the current working directory.

Switches user from current group to another group within the logon account.

Used to reexecute commands in the command line history stack.

Denotes end-of-data on the input stream from a job file or terminates data initialized by the

DATA

command.

Ends a batch job.

Terminates the command interpreter.

18 Chapter 1

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

HELLO

JOB

JOBFENCE

Initiates an interactive session.

Defines a job to be activated in conjunction with the

STREAM

command to run in batch mode.

Defines the minimum input priority a job or session must have in order to execute.

JOBPRI

Sets or changes the default and/or maximum execution priority for batch jobs.

JOBSECURITY

Designates what level of user may request resources and control the execution of jobs.

LIMIT

LISTJOBQ

LISTREDO

=LOGOFF

=LOGON

NEWJOBQ

PAUSE

Limits the number of concurrently running jobs/sessions for the entire system or for individual job queues.

Lists a job queue

Displays the contents of the command line history stack.

Aborts all executing jobs/sessions and prevents any further logons.

Enables job/session processing following a

=LOGOFF

command.

Creates a new job queue

Sleep for a specified number of seconds or until a job(s) terminates.

PURGEJOBQ

REDO

REFUSE

RESUME

RESUMEJOB

SHOWJOB

SHOWME

SHOWTIME

STARTSESS

STREAM

Deletes a job queue

Used to edit/reexecute commands in the command line history stack.

Disables jobs/sessions and/or data on a designated device.

Resumes execution of a suspended operation.

Resumes a suspended job.

Displays status information about jobs/sessions.

Reports job/session status.

Displays the current time and date.

Creates a session on the specified device for a user with programmatic sessions (PS) capability.

Spools batch jobs or data from a session or job.

Managing Spooler Operations

ALTSPOOLFILE

Alters the characteristics of an output spoolfile.

DELETESPOOLFILE

Deletes a spoolfile from disk.

LISTSPF

Produces a listing of spooled files, both input and output.

OPENQ

Opens the spool queue for a specified logical device or device class.

Chapter 1 19

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

OUTFENCE

Defines the minimum priority an output spoolfile needs in order to be printed.

RESUMESPOOL

Resumes suspended spooler output to a spooled device.

STARTSPOOL

Initiates the spooler process for a device.

SHUTQ

SPOOLER

SPOOLF

STOPSPOOL

Closes the spool queue for a specified logical device or device class.

Controls spooler processes.

Allows a qualified user to alter, print, or delete output spoolfiles.

Terminates spooling to a specified device or device class.

SUSPENDSPOOL

Suspends output to a spooled device.

Managing System Resources

ALLOCATE

Loads a compatibility mode program or procedure into main memory.

ALLOW

ALTPROC

Grants a user access to a specific operator command.

Changes the priority for the specified processes.

CONSOLE

Changes the system console from its current device to another job-accepting terminal.

DEALLOCATE

Deallocates a program or procedure previously loaded into memory with the

ALLOCATE

command.

DISALLOW

DISCRPS

ERRDUMP

FREERIN

GETRIN

Prohibits access to a specific operator command.

Enables/disables rotational position sensing on a specified logical device.

Dumps a process or system error stack.

Releases a global resource identification number (RIN).

Acquires and assigns a password to a global resource identification number (RIN).

PAUSE

Suspends current activity for a specified number of seconds.

RECALL =RECALL

Displays all pending console

messages.

RESETACCT

=REPLY

Replies to pending resource request messages that require a response.

Resets the system counters for CPU-time or connect-time, used by an account and its groups, to zero.

SETCLOCK

Sets the system clock.

SETCOUNTER

Sets the next value of a resource counter.

SHOWALLOW

SHOWCLOCK

SHOWPROC

Displays allowed operator commands.

Displays information about the system date and time.

Displays information about one or more processes.

20 Chapter 1

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

SHOWQ

=SHUTDOWN

TUNE

Displays process scheduling data and the contents of each subqueue.

Initiates a shutdown of MPE/iX.

Alters the dispatcher subqueues which determine when processes must relinquish the CPU.

Managing User/System Logging

ALTLOG

Alters the attributes of an existing user logging identifier.

CHANGELOG

GETLOG

LISTLOG

LOG

RELLOG

RESUMELOG

SHOWLOG

Changes the user logging file without stopping or interrupting the logging process.

Establishes a logging identifier on the system.

Lists active logging identifiers and whether automatic log file changing has been enabled.

Starts, restarts, or stops user logging.

Removes a user logging identifier from the system.

Resumes system logging following suspension caused by an error.

Displays the number of the system's current log file and the percentage of disk space used.

SHOWLOG-

STATUS

SWITCHLOG

Displays status information about opened user logging files assigned to a logging identifier.

Closes the current system log file, then creates and opens a new one.

Managing Variables and Job Control Words

DELETEVAR

Deletes one or more MPE/iX variables.

ERRCLEAR

INPUT

SETJCW

SETVAR

SHOWJCW

SHOWVAR

Zeros out all HP predefined error-related variables.

Allows you to interactively assign a value to any variable that can be set with the

SETVAR

command.

Creates or assigns a value to a job control word (JCW) variable.

Assigns values to MPE/iX variables.

Displays the current status of job control word variables.

Displays current values for specific variables.

Managing Volumes (Disk Drives)

DSTAT

Displays current status of system disk drives.

DISMOUNT

Causes a volume set that was explicitly reserved by a user to be released.

Chapter 1 21

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

LDISMOUNT

LMOUNT

MOUNT

VMOUNT

VOLTIL

VSCLOSE

VSOPEN

Causes a volume set that was reserved system-wide by the user to be released.

Reserves a volume set system-wide.

Reserves an online volume set.

Enables/disables the MPE/iX movable volume facility.

Defragment diskspace, general user volume management

Closes a specified volume set and takes it offline.

Reopens a volume set closed with

VSCLOSE

VSRELEASE

Releases a volume set that was explicitly reserved by the user with

VSRESERVE

VSRELEASESYS

Cancels a previously issued

VSRESERVESYS

command for a specified volume set.

VSRESERVE

Reserves a particular volume set online.

VSRESERVESYS

Reserves a volume set online system-wide.

VSUSER

Lists all users of a currently reserved, mountable volume set.

Using Command Files and User-Defined Commands

ANYPARM

Define a parameter that accepts all characters without the need for quotes.

ESCAPE

OPTION

PARM

RETURN

Allows the CI programmer to simulate all aspects of CI error handling.

Modifies the environment of user-defined commands and command files.

Defines a parameter for a UDL or command file.

Used in user command files to return execution to the calling environment.

SETCATALOG

Specifies a file containing user-defined commands.

SHOWCATALOG

Displays information about user-defined commands (UDCs).

XEQ

Executes a program or command file.

Using Computer Language Programs

BASIC

Interprets a compatibility mode BASIC/V program.

BASICGO

BASICOMP

BASICPREP

BBASIC

BBASICGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode BASIC/V program.

Compiles a compatibility mode BASIC/V program.

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode BASIC/V program.

Starts execution of the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter in compatibility mode.

Compiles, prepares, and executes an HP Business BASIC/V program in compatibility mode.

22 Chapter 1

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

BBASICOMP

Compiles an HP Business BASIC/V program in compatibility mode.

BBASICPREP

Compiles and prepares an HP Business BASIC/V program in compatibility mode.

BBXL

BBXLCOMP

BBXLGO

BBXLLK

Initiates execution of the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter.

Compiles an HP Business BASIC/XL program.

Compiles, links, and executes an HP Business BASIC/XL program.

Compiles and links an HP Business BASIC/XL program.

CCXL

CCXLGO

CCXLLK

COB74XL

COB74XLG

COB74XLK

COB85XL

COB85XLG

Compiles an HP C/iX program.

Compiles, links, and executes an HP C/iX program.

Compiles and links an HP C/iX program.

Compiles an HP COBOL II/XL program using the 1974 ANSI standard entry point and creates an object file.

Compiles, links, and executes an HP COBOL II/XL program using the

ANSI 1974 standard entry point.

Compiles and links an HP COBOL II/XL program using the 1974 ANSI standard entry point.

Compiles an HP COBOL II/XL program using the 1985 ANSI standard entry point and creates an object file.

Compiles, links, and executes an HP COBOL II/XL program using the

ANSI 1985 standard entry point.

COB85XLK

COBOLII

Compiles and links an HP COBOL II/XL program using the 1985 ANSI standard entry point.

Compiles a compatibility mode COBOLII program on the COBOL 74 compiler.

COBOLIIGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode COBOLII program on the COBOL 74 compiler.

COBOLIIPREP

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode COBOLII program on the

COBOL 74 compiler.

FORTGO

FORTPREP

FORTRAN

FTN

FTNGO

FTNPREP

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program.

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program.

Compiles a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program.

Compiles a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN 77/V program.

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN

77/V program.

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN 77/V program.

Chapter 1 23

Commands by Task

Task-Related Commands

FTNXL

FTNXLGO

FTNXLLK

PASCAL

Compiles an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program.

Compiles, links, and executes an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program.

Compiles and links an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program.

Compiles a compatibility mode Pascal/V program.

PASCALGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode Pascal/V program.

PASCALPREP

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode Pascal/V program.

PASXL

PASXLGO

Compiles an HP Pascal/iX program.

Compiles, links, and executes an HP Pascal/iX program.

PASXLLK

RPG

RPGGO

RPGPREP

RPGXL

RPGXLGO

RPGXLLK

SPL

SPLGO

SPLPREP

Compiles and links an HP Pascal/iX program.

Compiles an RPG/V program in compatibility mode.

Compiles, prepares, and executes an RPG/V program in compatibility mode.

Compiles and prepares an RPG/V program in compatibility mode.

Compiles an RPG/XL program.

Compiles, links, and executes an RPG/XL program.

Compiles and links an RPG/XL program.

Compiles a compatibility mode SPL/V program.

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode SPL/V program.

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode SPL/V program.

24 Chapter 1

Command Definitions A-B

This chapter provides information on MPE/iX commands. For your convenience, they are arranged in alphabetical order. Each command specification contains the following information:

Command Name Provides the command name at the top of each page followed by a brief

definition of its function.

Syntax

Provides information in diagram format defining how to enter the command and its parameters.

Parameters

Provides an explanation of each parameter and its function, limitations, and defaults.

Operation Notes Provides an explanation of the operation of the command and notes on

any special considerations.

Use

Provides information on the conditions within which the command can be used such as a session, job, program, or in BREAK. This entry also indicates whether the command can be interrupted with the

Break

key and, if appropriate, lists any special capabilities required to use it. Refer to the

NEWACCT

command for a list of special capabilities.

Examples

Provides examples of how to use the command.

Related Information Provides pointers to other commands or manuals that might

contain additional information.

Chapter 2 25

Command Definitions A-B

26 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

Commands and Parameters

Commands and Parameters

MPE/iX commands tell the computer to perform a specific function. The parameters you enter for each command tell the computer to perform the function in a specific way.

MPE/iX uses four classifications of parameters:

• Required parameters.

• Optional parameters.

• Keyword parameters.

• Positional parameters.

These four classifications of parameters are briefly defined below. To understand the command syntax diagrams, refer to the Conventions pages in the front of this manual.

Required Parameters

If a command has any required parameters, they must be entered or MPE/iX displays an error message. In the syntax diagrams for each command in this chapter, required parameters are either surrounded by no other marks or by braces

{ }

. In the following example, since

myfile

is not surrounded by any marks, it is a required parameter:

BUILD

myfile

In some cases, you must select one parameter from a list of two or more parameters. In the following example, you must provide either a job number or a session number since these parameters are surrounded by braces:

ALTJOB [#J

nnn

| #S

nnn

]

Optional Parameters

If a command has any optional parameters, you can either specify or ignore them, depending upon how you want the command to execute. In the syntax diagrams for each command in this chapter, optional parameters are surrounded by brackets

[ ]

. If you ignore optional parameters, MPE/iX uses the system-defined default values for each parameter. In the following example,

[;PASS]

is an optional parameter since it is surrounded by brackets:

NEWGROUP

groupname

[;PASS=[

password

]]

Chapter 2 27

Command Definitions A-B

Commands and Parameters

Positional Parameters

The meaning of a positional parameter depends upon its position (location) in the parameter list. In the syntax diagrams for each command in this chapter, positional parameters are separated from each other by a comma (

). If you omit a positional parameter from the list, you must provide the comma placeholder that would normally precede that parameter. In the following example, the subparameters of the

REC parameter of the

BUILD

command can be treated as positional parameters:

BUILD

filename

;REC=128,1,F,ASCII

If you choose to use the system-defined default value

, you need not specify it, but you must hold the position with a comma:

BUILD

filename

;REC=128,1,,ASCII

Keyword Parameters

A keyword parameter denotes the meaning or value of a given parameter. In the syntax diagrams for each command in this chapter, keyword parameters appear in uppercase

(

CAPITAL

) letters (although you may enter them in either uppercase or lowercase) and are preceded by a semicolon (

;

). In the following example,

REC

is a keyword parameter:

BUILD

filename

;REC=128,1,F,ASCII

Refer to the section "Combining Positional/Keyword Parameters," below, for additional information.

28 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

Commands and Parameters

Chapter 2 29

Command Definitions A-B

Native Mode Command Structure

Native Mode Command Structure

Many commands in this chapter have the designation Native Mode at the end of their definition. This means that the command is parsed by the Native Mode Command

Parser. If Native Mode is not specified, the command is parsed by the Compatibility

Mode Command Parser. (A command

parser

separates command parameters.) There is no relationship between the parser a command uses and the function(s) the command performs. Also, just because a command is parsed by the Compatibility Mode parser does not mean it functions in the same way it did in the Classic HP3000 environment.

All new commands for MPE/iX use the NM parser. Some commands used on MPE V/E which have been changed for MPE/iX use the NM parser and some do not. MPE V/E commands which have not been changed for MPE/iX generally use the CM parser.

The important thing to remember is that the Native Mode parser accepts several different formats for commands that you enter at the colon prompt (

). You may enter these

NM-parsed commands in one of the following ways:

• By using the formal command specification shown in the syntax diagram for each command in this chapter.

• By using positional parameter specifications to enter keyword parameter values.

• By combining positional and keyword specification

Another difference between the NM parser and the CM parser is that the CM parser restricts a single comand parameter value to be <=255 characters. On the NM side, the value is limited by the size of the CI’s command buffer.

Formal Command Specification

You may enter an NM-parsed command as shown in the syntax diagram for each command, for example:

COMMAND KEYWORD1=A;KEYWORD2=B;KEYWORD3=C

Positional Parameter Specification

You may also enter an NM-parsed command by omitting the keyword parameter name and only entering the values as positional parameters, for example:

COMMAND A,B,C

If you omit the keyword specifications and enter the values as positional parameters, the values must be treated as such, and all rules for positional parameters must be followed.

For example, if you only specify

and

, you must use the positional place holder (

) as shown in the following example:

COMMAND A,,C

30 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

Native Mode Command Structure

Combining Positional/Keyword Parameters

Another option is to enter NM-parsed commands by using a combination of positional and keyword specifications, for example:

COMMAND A,B;KEYWORD3=C

There is one important rule to remember when you combine positional and keyword parameters: once you specify a keyword parameter, you may no use positional parameters.

For example, entering the following command would produce an error:

COMMAND A;KEYWORD2=B,C

An exception to the rule is that you may specify positional parameters that are

subparameters

of a keyword parameter. For example, in the

BUILD

command shown below,

REC

is a keyword but the next four parameters (which define records as being 80 bytes long, blocked at 1 and in Fixed ASCII format) are

positional

. This syntax is acceptable because they are

subparameters

of the key word

REC

BUILD

filename

;REC=-80,1,F,ASCII

The following example shows the correct way to combine positional and keyword parameters where the keyword has no subparameters:

COMMAND A;KEYWORD2=B;KEYWORD3=C

Entering Numbers in Commands

You may enter numbers as parameters to NM-parsed commands as follows:

• With or without leading zeros.

• As positive or negative numbers.

• Preceded by the

sign indicating hexadecimal or base 16.

• Precdeded by the

sign indicating octal or base 8.

• Preceded by the

sign indicating decimal or base 10 (if neither

$, %

nor

is specified base 10 is used).

• In the decimal range -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.

For example, suppose you wanted to

suspend

spooling on

LDEV

6, your system printer. You could enter :

SPOOLER DEV=#0006;SUSPEND;SHOW

Chapter 2 31

Command Definitions A-B

Native Mode Command Structure

Or, because

decimal

is the default you could omit the

sign and enter:

SPOOLER DEV=0006;SUSPEND;SHOW

Or, omitting the leading zeroes you could enter:

SPOOLER DEV=6;SUSPEND;SHOW

When entering numbers as command parameters, it is advisable to omit leading zeros for some commands parsed by the compatibility mode (CM) parser.

Using Quotes and Strings

The NM parser optionally accepts any

string

input in single or double quotes. For example, because the file name parameter of the

command is a

string

parameter, you could enter it as follows: or

PRINT FILENAME

PRINT "FILENAME"

PRINT 'FILENAME'

General Rules for Using Quotes

Quotes are

required

if the value of any string parameter contains any of the following

delimiters

;

, comma semicolon

(

= blank (one or more spaces) equal sign

) left parentheses right parentheses

For example, suppose you want to set a variable called MYVAR to a value of

;(A)

. Because this string contains both a semi-colon and parentheses, you would enter

SETVAR

as follows:

SETVAR MYVAR ";(A)"

As another example, suppose you wanted to use the

INFO=

parameter of the

RUN

command to pass the following string (which contains both commas and spaces)

BLUE RIGHT 24,

SPLIT LEFT, 2

. You would enter:

RUN PROG;INFO="BLUE RIGHT 24, SPLIT LEFT, 2"

32 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

Native Mode Command Structure

String Processing

MPE/iX

string processing

finds the first double or single quote and pairs it with the last quote of the same

type

to form a string. In other words, single quotes pair only with other single quotes and double quotes only with other double quotes. For this reason you can use single quotes within double quotes, and double quotes within single quotes. For example, all three of the following

INFO

strings are correct:

...;INFO="THIS IS THE 'WRITE' WAY"

...;INFO='THIS IS THE "WRITE" WAY TOO'

...;INFO="YOU SIMPLY CAN'T GO WRONG"

In all of the above cases, the quotes around the word WRITE and in the word CAN'T are contained within the string and are treated just like any other character.

Quotes within Strings

A technique called

quote folding

enables you to embed single or double quotes in quoted strings. For example, the following

INFO=

string would pass the string shown below it:

... ;INFO="JUST SAY ""GATO""."

JUST SAY "GATO".

Quote folding

works as follows: When the NM parser reads a quote (other than the very first quote in an entire line), it checks the character to the immediate right of the quote. If it is a quote of the same kind (single or double) it is disregarded and the previous quote is treated like any other non-quote character. For example, after being parsed, the following quoted string becomes the string listed below it:

...;"PASS ""A"" TO ""X"" AND ""B"" TO ""Y"""

PASS "A" TO "X" AND "B" TO "Y"

Here is another example:

"HERE ARE FOUR QUOTES "" "" "" """

HERE ARE FOUR QUOTES " " " "

To delete spaces between the four quotes, you would enter the string like this:

"HERE ARE FOUR QUOTES """""""""

After being parsed, the string would look like this:

HERE ARE FOUR QUOTES """"

The NM parser processes quoted strings in the same way regardless of the command or parameter with which they are used.

For

most

CM commands, the CM parser processes quoted strings in the same way as the

NM parser. However, the CM parser limits the length of quoted strings to 255 characters.

Exceptions

There are four exceptions to the syntax governing MPE/iX commands:

• User command parameter lists (which may affect string quoting rules).

Chapter 2 33

Command Definitions A-B

Native Mode Command Structure

• The

SETVAR

command.

• The

XEQ

command.

These three exceptions allow the use of only specific delimiters when specifying parameters, as defined below.

Also the ECHO command accepts all delimiters and treats them as part of the value to be echoed

Invoking User Defined Commands

User defined commands may be structured to accept the

KEYWORD=

parm

format, and you may mix keyword and positional parameters. User command parameter lists allow you to use the following to delimit parameters:

;

, comma semicolon

= blank (one or more spaces) equal sign

For example, if the user defined command

UDCA

is defined as

UDCA parm1,parm2,parm3 you could invoke it as follows: or

UDCA X;Y;Z

UDCA X PARM2=Y,PARM3=Z

If the

value

of any parameter contains any of the above

delimiters

you must use quotes to delimit the parameter string. For example, if

I;J;K

is a

single

string parameter value you must delimit it with quotes (because it contains semi-colons) as follows:

UDCA "I;J;K"

The

sign is used only to delimit a parameter

name

from a parameter

value

. If the value of a parameter contains an

sign, then you must delimit the value with quotes. For example:

UDCA PARM1="YES=OK"

Similarly, if a string value contains a quote, you must delimit it by a quote. As an example, suppose you have a UDC which runs a program with the

INFO

string. The

RUN

command within the UDC might look something like this:

RUN PROGNAME;INFO="!PARM"

If the

value

of the parameter were something like this:

THE "END" IS NEAR

, you would invoke the UDC like this:

UDCA PARM="THE ""END"" IS NEAR"

Or, you could enter this:

UDCA "THE ""END"" IS NEAR"

34 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

Native Mode Command Structure

NOTE

If a parameter value begins with a quote it

must

have a matching end quote. If it does not begin with a quote it may contain embedded quotes which will be treated as any other character.

For more information on the use of quotes, refer to the section "Using Quotes and Strings" earlier in this chapter.

The SETVAR Command

The

SETVAR

command allows you to use either spaces, semicolons, or commas to delimit parameters, as follows:

SETVAR NAME

expression

SETVAR NAME,

expression

SETVAR NAME;

expression

The rules for using quotes within strings containing delimiters or quotes, previously discussed, apply to the

SETVAR

command.

For example, suppose you want to set a variable called BIGVAR to a value of

X,"Y";Z

This expression contains two delimiters (comma and semicolon) as well as quotes. The correct

SETVAR

command would be:

SETVAR BIGVAR "X,""Y"";Z"

You could also delimit the expression from the variable name using either a comma or semicolon as follows:

SETVAR BIGVAR;"X,""Y"";Z"

SETVAR BIGVAR,"X,""Y"";Z"

For more information on the use of quotes, refer to the section "Using Quotes and Strings" earlier in this chapter.

The XEQ Command

The

XEQ

command allows you to use only spaces to delimit parameters, as follows:

XEQ

filename

[

parameters

]

XEQ

cmdfile

[

parameters

]

NOTE

A leading semicolon is optional for the first keyword parameter supplied for most commands if it immediately follows the command name. For example, the two commands below are equally valid:

ALTJOB JOB=...

ALTJOB ;JOB=...

Chapter 2 35

Command Definitions A-B

Remote Sessions and Command Intrinsics

Remote Sessions and Command Intrinsics

When used to invoke commands on

remote

systems the

COMMAND

HPCICOMMAND intrinsics do not return a meaningful status code. For more information on calling intrinsics refer to the MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual.

36 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

Running the CI as a Program

Running the CI as a Program

The MPE/iX Command Interpreter (CI) is a Native Mode Program. You can run it the way you would any other program, either by explicitly using the

RUN

command (the first example below), or by using the the

implied

RUN

(the second example):

RUN CI.PUB.SYS

In the first case, the

RUN

command controls execution of the CI. For more information, refer to the

RUN

command in this chapter.

The second case, referred to as

implied

run, is limited to recognizing the

INFO=

and

PARM= parameters. If you enter both

INFO=

and

PARM=

goes into effect

after

the

INFO= string is passed. The Table 2-1 shows the Parm= values.

Table 2-1 Parm= values for the CI

Parm

-1

-2

Action

UDC's are cataloged, the CI banner is displayed, and the WELCOME message is displayed. This is the default.

Same as 0, however the CI terminates after processing the

info

string; it terminates after the first command is executed if no

info

string is specified.

UDC's are cataloged, the CI banner is suppressed, and the WELCOME message is suppressed.

Same as 2, however the CI terminates after processing the

info

string; it terminates after the first command is executed if no

info

string is specified.

Logon UDC's are executed, UDC's are available, the CI banner is displayed, and the WELCOME message is displayed.

Same as 4, however the CI terminates after processing the

info

string; it terminates after the first command is executed if no

info

string is specified.

UDC's are not cataloged, the CI banner is suppressed, and the WELCOME message is suppressed. This requires SM capability.

Same as -1, however the CI terminates after processing the

info

string; it terminates after the first command is executed if no

info

string is specified. This requires SM capability.

NOTE

Parm -1 and -2 can be defeated via a SYSGEN misc configuration setting.

Chapter 2 37

Command Definitions A-B

ABORT

ABORT

Aborts the current program or operation suspended by BREAK. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ABORT

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

The

ABORT

command terminates a process that has been suspended by pressing the

Break

key. Programs do not terminate while critical system code is executing on their behalf, but terminate immediately following execution of that code.

The

ABORT

command is available only from a session and only during BREAK, but it does not disrupt the session. Some operations abort immediately upon entering BREAK without requiring the

ABORT

command. An

ABORT

command results in the job control word

(JCW) being set to the

SYSTEM 0

state. For a discussion of job control words, refer to the

SETJCW

command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session (in BREAK only). It is not available from a job or a program. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To abort the current program or operation, press

Break

. When the colon prompt (

) appears, enter:

ABORT

The system then displays the message

PROGRAM ABORTED PER USER REQUEST

and redisplays the colon prompt (

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

RESUME

SETJCW

None

38 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ABORTIO/ =ABORTIO

ABORTIO/ =ABORTIO

Aborts a single pending I/O request for a device.

Syntax

ABORTIO

ldev

=ABORTIO

ldev

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the device for which you intend to abort one pending I/O request.

Operation Notes

This command aborts a single pending I/O request for the specified ldev. To delete all queued I/O requests for a device, repeat the

ABORTIO

command until the following message appears on the

$STDLIST

device:

NO I/O TO ABORT FOR DEVICE #

ldev

Devices that are job-accepting or data-accepting always have outstanding READ requests pending, due to the auto-recognition feature of MPE/iX. Use the

ABORTIO

command to clear these pending input requests.

Sometimes, you may need to clear all outstanding I/O requests to allow proper execution of other console commands including

ABORTJOB

TAKE

DOWN

, and

REFUSE

NOTE

If the

ABORTIO

command is not effective from the system console, use the

=ABORTIO

command. (You can only issue the

CTRL A

=ABORTIO

command from the physical console.) Use the

=ABORTIO

command only when you cannot execute the

ABORTIO

command.

Use

You may issue the

ABORTIO

command from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It is executable only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

The

=ABORTIO

console command cannot be issued from a job.

Chapter 2 39

Command Definitions A-B

ABORTIO/ =ABORTIO

Examples

To abort a pending I/O request for logical device 53, enter:

ABORTIO 53

It is necessary to issue several

ABORTIO

commands to abort all pending I/O operations on a spooled device, as shown below:

STOPSPOOL 5

11:20/31/SP#5/STOPPED

11:20/31/LDEV#5 NOT READY

REFUSE 5

ABORTIO 5

11:21/40/NO I/O TO ABORT FOR DEVICE 5

Related Information

Commands

SHOWDEV

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

40 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ABORTJOB/ =ABORTJOB

ABORTJOB/ =ABORTJOB

Aborts a job or session.

Syntax

ABORTJOB

{ #J

nnn

[

jobname

user

acct

}

=ABORTJOB

{ #J

nnn

[

jobname

user

acct

}

Parameters

nnn

A job number.

nnn jobname user acct

A session number.

The name of the job, as identified by the

SHOWJOB

command.

A user name.

An account name.

Operation Notes

The

ABORTJOB

command terminates the designated job or session, and displays the following message on the job/session list device:

SESSION ABORTED BY SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

If you use the

[

jobname

user

acct form of the command when there is more than one job or session executing under that name, MPE/iX selects which job/session to abort.

Therefore, to exercise more precise control when aborting jobs or sessions, use the

nnn

nnn form of the

ABORTJOB

command. Although the job/session is abnormally terminated, log records are issued, and CPU-times and connect-times are updated. Any I/O activity, such as printing or file storage, is terminated.

The

ABORTJOB

command can be applied to waiting and scheduled jobs, as well as to executing jobs. If the spooler input file (

$STDIN

) for a batch job has been created and not yet opened (in other words, the job is in the WAIT state), the entire file is deleted. If the

ABORTJOB

command is issued before the output spoolfile is complete, only that portion of the file already spooled is printed, along with an error message indicating that the job was aborted. If a request is pending at the system console, it is automatically terminated by the

ABORTJOB/=ABORTJOB

command and the following message appears on the system console:

time

/#S

nnn

pin

/REQUEST REQUIRING OPERATOR REPLY FOR PIN #

HAS BEEN ABORTED

When the

ABORTJOB

command is successful, a logoff message is displayed on the console, indicating that the job has been aborted, as shown in the example below:

ABORTJOB #S9

11:20/#S9/34/LOGOFF ON LDEV #77

Chapter 2 41

Command Definitions A-B

ABORTJOB/ =ABORTJOB

The standard error message that appears when a request is manually terminated by entering

in response to

=REPLY

(or

) is displayed on the user's terminal:

SESSION ABORTED BY SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

The

=ABORTJOB

command may be used at the physical console if

ABORTJOB

is ineffective.

Refer to the "Use" section of this command.

Use

You may issue this command from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It is executable only from the console unless it is distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command, or the

JOBSECURITY

command is set to

LOW with AM or SM capability.

=ABORTJOB

may be issued only from the console.

NOTE

Users with AM capability may only abort jobs and sessions within their own account. Users with SM capability may abort jobs and sessions across accounts.

Examples

To terminate session number 139, enter:

ABORTJOB #S139

17:10/#S139/34/LOGOFF ON LDEV #62

To terminate job number 9, enter:

ABORTJOB #J9

20:18/#J9/26/LOGOFF ON LDEV #10

In both of the preceding examples, the

LOGOFF ON LDEV #

messages indicates that

ABORTJOB

command was successfully executed.

To terminate session 6, which has a pending device allocation message, enter:

?17:00/#S6/23/LDEV# FOR "SCRTAPE" ON TAPE (NUM)?

ABORTJOB #S6

17:10/#S6/120/REQUEST REQUIRING OPERATOR REPLY FOR

PIN 23 HAS BEEN ABORTED

17:10/#S6/120/LOGOFF ON LDEV #58

Related Information

Commands

ALTJOB

BREAKJOB

JOBFENCE

JOBSECURITY

RESUMEJOB

SHOWJOB

STREAM

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

42 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ACCEPT

ACCEPT

Permits a designated device to accept jobs/sessions and/or data.

Syntax

ACCEPT

[ JOBS | DATA ]

,ldev

Parameters

JOBS

The designated device recognizes the

JOB

and

HELLO

commands. The device must be interactive to support sessions.

DATA

The designated device recognizes the

DATA

command. Data-accepting devices are not supported.

NOTE

ldev

If you omit both the

JOBS

and the

DATA

parameters, then both the

JOB

and

HELLO

commands, and the

DATA

command are allowed.

The logical device number of the device for which the

JOB

HELLO

, and/or

DATA

commands are being enabled.

Operation Notes

The operator or system supervisor uses this command to designate which devices may be used to initiate jobs or sessions and/or data. When a device is configured as an accepting device, MPE/iX automatically scans the first input record for a valid

JOB

HELLO

, or

DATA command. This feature, called auto-recognition, allows users to access the device without specifically requesting use of the device with a message to the system console.

If you explicitly specify the

JOBS

parameter, the

command is not executed unless the device is configured as a default output device.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It is executable only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Chapter 2 43

Command Definitions A-B

ACCEPT

Examples

To permit logical device 19 to accept jobs and data, enter:

ACCEPT 19

SHOWDEV 19

LDEV AVAIL OWNERSHIP VOLID ASSOCIATION

19 AVAIL

To permit logical device 19 to accept jobs and data, and to allow the device to be spooled, enter:

ACCEPT 19

STARTSPOOL 19

11:12/31/SP#/SPOOLED IN

11:12/6/LDEV#19 NOT READY

SHOWDEV 19

DEV AVAIL OWNERSHIP VOLID DEN ASSOCIATION

19 SPOOLED SPOOLER OUT

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

REFUSE

Introduction to MPE XL for MPE V System Administrators

System Startup, Configuration, and Shutdown Reference Manual

44 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALLOCATE

ALLOCATE

Loads a compatibility mode program or procedure into virtual memory.

Syntax

ALLOCATE [ PROCEDURE, | PROGRAM, ]

name

Parameters

PROCEDURE

The procedure in

SL.PUB.SYS

to be allocated. The default is

PROGRAM

name

The program file to be allocated. Default.

The name of the program file or procedure to be allocated.

Operation Notes

A program or procedure is allocated by resolving external references and assigning code segment table (CST) or extended code segment table (XCST) entries to the program's code segments. Table entries are also allocated for any procedures called by the allocated program or procedure. Allocating a program or procedure does not increase execution speed but it does reduce the time it takes to load the program for execution.

CAUTION

Use care in deciding which programs or procedures to load with the

ALLOCATE

command. The number of CST table entries is limited and, if the limit is exceeded, data may be lost.

Segments remain loaded until they are deallocated with the

DEALLOCATE

command, or until the system is shut down or a system failure occurs. Programs or procedures must be reallocated with the

ALLOCATE

command following any start up.

To issue the

ALLOCATE

command a user must have EXECUTE access for any file referenced in the name parameter of this command.

Any external procedures referenced by a program being allocated by this command must reside in

SL.PUB.SYS

NOTE

Native mode (NM) and Compatibility Mode (CM) loader error messages are reported differently, allowing you to determine the system in which the error occurred.

NM Loader Error: ErrMessage (

LDRERR

nnnn)

CM Loader Error: ErrMessage (

LOAD ERR

nnnn)

Use

This command may be issued from a session or program. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. System supervisor (OP) capability is required to use this command.

Chapter 2 45

Command Definitions A-B

ALLOCATE

In addition to comma (,) a semicolon (;) and equal sign (=) may be used as a delimiter.

Example

To allocate a procedure identified as

PROC1

, that resides in

SL.PUB.SYS

, enter:

ALLOCATE PROCEDURE,PROC1

Program files residing in the nonsystem domain (a volume set) are not allocated. Attempts to do so result in a

LOAD ERR 92

message.

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

DEALLOCATE

Introduction to MPE XL for MPE V Programmers (30367-60004)

46 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALLOW

ALLOW

Grants a user access to a specific operator command.

Syntax

ALLOW FILE=

formaldesignator

[ ;SHOW]

ALLOW[

@.@

user.@

@.acct

user.acct

;COMMANDS=

command

[ ,

command

,...]

Parameters

formaldesignator An ASCII file name, which may consist of one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. It may be fully or partially qualified and may be back-referenced in a file equation.

SHOW

@.@

user

acct user

acct command

Lists input lines on

$STDLIST

Grants access to all users whether logged on or not.

Grants access to a specific user in all accounts.

Grants access to all users in a specific account.

Grants access to a specific user in a specific account.

The names of those commands to which the user is granted access.

Operation Notes

The operator uses the

ALLOW

command to distribute specific operator commands to system users.

ALLOW

specifies which users may execute operator commands, and which commands they may execute.

You may specify an indirect file with the

ALLOW

command, or you may execute

ALLOW

in subsystem mode. Each of these is explained below.

Using an indirect file to allow commands

To allow commands via an indirect file, you create a file that contains records identifying the users and accounts to whom you are allowing operator commands, followed by the list of commands allowed.

Using an indirect file with the

ALLOW

command is particularly convenient for system administrators since, once you make the file, you can reuse it to disallow the set of commands (via the

DISALLOW

command) or to allow the same set of commands again.

Here is an example of an indirect file:

EDITOR

HP32201A.07.17 EDIT/3000 TUES, MAY 29, 1994, 5:08 PM

/ADD

SUSAN.PAYROLL;COMMANDS=ALTJOB,ALTSPOOLFILE

Chapter 2 47

Command Definitions A-B

ALLOW

JOHN.ACCTNG;COMMANDS=ALTJOB,DELETESPOOLFILE

...

/KEEP ALLOWTMP

Once you create an indirect file, you then issue the

ALLOW

command, using the

;SHOW parameter to display each command line as it is executed from the file. For example:

ALLOW FILE=ALLOWTMP;SHOW

You may backreference the file with a file equation as follows:

FILE BACKF=ALLOWTMP

ALLOW FILE=*BACKF;SHOW

If the file has a lockword, enter it in the command line after the filename. For example,

"ALLOWTMP/

password

Using ALLOW in subsystem mode

To use the

ALLOW

command in subsystem mode, following these steps:

1. Enter

ALLOW

, followed by

Return

2. At the prompt (

), enter all of the commands you want to allow.

3. When you finish, press

Return

and enter a colon

as the first character of the new line.

(You may also type

EXIT

You cannot use the

FILE=

parameter in subsystem mode. The

ALLOW

subsystem will terminate if it encounters an error.

You may allow commands only to users who are currently logged on unless you specify the

@.@

option, which allows commands to

all

users. (Since this option has obvious disadvantages, you can remedy the situation by then issuing a

DISALLOW

command to disallow command use to selected users.)

Additional capabilities granted to a user are valid only for the duration of their current session. Once the user logs off, any special capabilities previously assigned are no longer applicable.

To determine which operator commands have been allowed globally (that is, using the @.@ construct), or to a specific user, use the

SHOWALLOW

command.

NOTE

Do not confuse

console

commands which are NOT allowable with

operator

commands. Operator commands are used in the day-to-day operation of your system and are generally allowable. A console command must be executed on the actual system console and must be preceded by

cntl-A

. Some console commands have the same name as non-console commands, an example is

RECALL

, which may be executed on any device.

The following is a list of commands that may be allowed.

ABORTIO HEADON RESUMESPOOL

ABORTJOB JOBFENCE SHUTQ

ACCEPT JOBSECURITY STARTSPOOL

ALLOW LDISMOUNT STOPSPOOL

ALTJOB LIMIT STREAMS

ALTSPOOLFILE LOG UP

48 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALLOW

CONSOLE MRJECONTROL VMOUNT

DELETESPOOLFILE OPENQ VSCLOSE

DISALLOW

DISCRPS

DOWN

DOWNLOAD

HEADOFF

OUTFENCE

REFUSE

RESUMEJOB

SPOOLER

VSOPEN

VSRELEASESYS

VSRESERVESYS

WARN

WELCOME

Use

You may issue this command from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

will terminate subsystem mode and produce an error message but has no effect on commands already entered in subsystem mode. This command is executable only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Examples

To give the user

USER.TECH

the ability to execute the

and

ABORTIO

commands, you would enter the following at the system console:

ALLOW USER.TECH;COMMANDS=REPLY,ABORTIO

In subsystem mode, to give the user

MGR.MANUALS

the ability to execute the

BREAKJOB command, you would enter the following at the system console:

ALLOW

>MGR.MANUALS;COMMANDS=BREAKJOB

>EXIT

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

DISALLOW

SHOWALLOW

Performing System Operation Tasks

Chapter 2 49

Command Definitions A-B

ALTACCT

ALTACCT

Changes the attributes of an existing account.

Syntax

ALTACCT

acctname

[ ;PASS=[

password

] ] [ ;FILES=[

filespace

]] [ ;CPU=[

cpu

]]

[ ;CONNECT=[

connect

] ] [ ;CAP=[

capabilitylist

] ] [ ;ACCESS=[ (

fileaccess

)]]

[ ;MAXPRI=[

subqueuename

] ] [ ;LOCATTR=[

localattribute

] ]

[ ;ONVS=

volumesetname

] [ ;USERPASS=[ {REQ | OPT } ] ] (1)

(1) The

USERPASS

parameter is only available if the HP Security Monitor has been installed.

Parameters

acctname

The name of the account to be altered.

password filespace cpu connect capabilitylist

The

password

to be assigned to the account. If you omit

password

, any existing

password

is removed. If you omit

PASS=

, any existing password is unchanged.

Disk storage limit, in sectors, for the permanent files in the account. The

filespace

limit cannot be less than the number of sectors currently in use for the account.

The limit on cumulative CPU-time, in seconds, for the account. This limit is checked only when a job or session is initiated, and, therefore, never causes the job or session to abort. The maximum value allowed is

2,147,483,647 seconds. You may set the counter to zero with the

RESETACCT

command.

The limit on total cumulative session connect-time, in minutes, allowed the account. This limit is checked at logon. Every time the process terminates the counter is updated. The maximum value allowed is

2,147,483,647 minutes. You may reset the counter to zero with the

RESETACCT

command.

Either 1) a list of capabilities, separated by commas, permitted the account, or 2) a list of additions and/or deletions to be applied to the account's existing set of capabilities. Additions and deletions are specified by a "+" or "-" immediately followed by the capability to add or delete, separated by commas.

If "+"/"-" is to be specified in the list, then the list must begin with "+" or

"-". For example,

CAP=+MR,-PH

is legal, but

CAP=MR,-PH

is not. It is not necessary to prefix each capability to be added or deleted with "+" / "-", as the occurrence of "+" / "-" indicates an action that remains in effect until the indicator changes. For example,

CAP=+MR,PH,-PM,DS

is equivalent to

CAP=+MR,+PH,-PM,-DS

50 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTACCT

If a capability is removed at the account level, users within the account are also denied that capability. No explicit change to the user's capabilities is necessary. Similarly, if a capability is returned to the account, any users with that capability regain it automatically.

Each capability is denoted by a two letter mnemonic, as follows:

System Manager = SM

Account Manager = AM

Account Librarian = AL

Group Librarian = GL

Diagnostician = DI

System Supervisor = OP

Network Administrator = NA

Node Manager = NM

Save Files = SF

Access to Nonshareable

I/O Devices = ND

Use Volumes = UV

fileaccess

Use Communication

Subsystem = CS

Programmatic Sessions = PS

User Logging = LG

Process Handling = PH

Extra Data Segments = DS

Multiple RINs = MR

Privileged Mode = PM

Interactive Access = IA

Batch Access = BA

Default is AM, AL, GL, SF, ND, IA, BA, except for the

SYS

account. The

SYS

account has no true default. It is assigned the maximum account capabilities when the system is delivered and, under normal circumstances, should not be altered.

If a capability is taken away from an account, it is unavailable to users in that account. However, users are not affected by this change until they log off and then log back on.

The restrictions on file access pertinent to this account. Default is

R,L,A,W,X:AC, entered as follows:

([{ R | L | A | W | X } [ ,...] : { ANY | AC } ] [ ;...] )

The R, L, A, W, and/or X specify modes of access by types of users (ANY and/or AC ) as follows:

R = READ

L = LOCK

A = APPEND

W = WRITE

X = EXECUTE

LOCK

allows exclusive access to the file.

APPEND

implicitly specifies

LOCK

WRITE

implicitly specifies

APPEND

and

LOCK

The user types are specified as follows.

ANY = Any user

AC = Member of this account only

Chapter 2 51

Command Definitions A-B

ALTACCT

subqueuename

Name of the highest priority subqueue that can be requested by any process of any job/session in the account, specified as AS, BS, CS, DS, or

ES. When you specify

;MAXPRI=

without a value,

subqueuename

defaults to

CS.

CAUTION

User processes executing in the AS or BS subqueues can deadlock the system.

If you assign these subqueues to nonpriority processes, other critical system processes may be prevented from executing. Exercise extreme caution when choosing subqueues.

localattribute

Local attribute of the account, as defined at the installation site. This is a double-word bit map, of arbitrary meaning, that might be used to further classify accounts. While it is not involved in standard MPE/iX security provisions, it is available to processes through the

WHO

intrinsic.

Programmers may use

localattribute

in their own programs to provide security. Default is double word 0 (null).

volumesetname

The MPE/iX volume set in which the account is to be altered. This volume set must be already defined and recognized by the system. When

ONVS=

volumesetname

is specified, the volume set directory is assumed.

When

ONVS=

is specified without

volumesetname

, the system directory is assumed.

MPE/iX volume set names consist of from 1 to 32 characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The remaining characters may be alphabetic, numeric, the underscore, or periods.

This parameter only works with the

FILES

parameter (all other parameters are ignored).

REQ

OPT

USERPASS=REQ specifies that all users in the account must have a non-blank password. It is available only if the HP Security Monitor has been installed.

USERPASS=OPT specifies that users in this account may or may not have passwords. If you do not use the USERPASS parameter, the old value remains. It is available only if the HP Security Monitor has been installed.

Operation Notes

The system manager uses the

ALTACCT

command to change the attributes of an existing account. You may enter multiple keywords on a single command line as shown in

"Examples." When you change one capability in a

capabilitylist

that contains several nondefault values, you must specify the entire new

%capabilitylist

. When you omit an entire keyword parameter group from the

ALTACCT

command, that parameter remains unchanged for the account. When you include a keyword, but omit the corresponding parameter (for example,

PASS=

Return

), the default value is assigned. Table 2-2 lists the default values for the

ALTACCT

command.

Table 2-2 shos the defalut parameters for the ALTACCT Command.

52 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTACCT

Table 2-2 Default Parameters for the ALTACCT Command

Parameter

password filespace cpu connect capabilitylist fileaccess subqueuename localattribute

Default Values

No password

Unlimited

AM, AL, GL, SF, ND, IA, BA (All accounts except

SYS

)

SM, AM, AL, GL, DI, OP, SF, ND, PH, DS, MR, PM (

SYS

account only)

(R,A,W,L,X:AC) (All accounts except

SYS

)

(R,X:ANY;A,W,L:AC) (

SYS

account only)

CS subqueue

0 (null)

Any value changed with the

ALTACCT

command takes effect the next time MPE/iX is requested to check the value. If an attribute is removed from an account while users are logged on, they are not affected until they log off their current job or session and log on again. MPE/iX does not automatically generate a message informing users of the change; it is your responsibility to warn account members in advance of any changes. If you take a capability away from an account, all account members and groups within the account are denied the capability the next time that they log onto the account.

You cannot remove system manager (SM) capability from the

SYS

account or account manager (AM) capability from any account. From within any account, you can remove AM capability from all but one (the last) of the users assigned it. It is possible, however, to remove AM capability from all users in an account, but only if you do so from another account that has SM capability.

NOTE

If you specify volume-related commands or parameters for a volume set that is not currently mounted, or for an account that does not exist, MPE/iX returns an error message.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. System manager (SM) capability is required to use this command.

Examples

To change an account named

AC2

so that its

password

GLOBALX

, and its

filespace

is limited to 50,000 sectors, enter:

ALTACCT AC2;PASS=GLOBALX;FILES=50000

Chapter 2 53

Command Definitions A-B

ALTACCT

To change the password and the file space of an account called

MALCHIOR

in the volume set

TIME_LORD

, you need to issue two commands:

ALTACCT MALCHIOR;PASS=OMSBOROS

ALTACCT MALCHIOR;ONVS=TIME_LORD;FILES=20000

You must specify the changes for the system volume set (the first command) and for the volume set itself (the second command). Specifying a

volumesetname

limits the user to changing only

FILES

in the second command.

Related Information

Commands

ALTGROUP

ALTUSER

LISTACCT

LISTGROUP

LISTUSER

NEWACCT

NEWGROUP

NEWUSER

RESETACCT

Manuals

Performing System Management Tasks

54 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTFILE

ALTFILE

Changes the attributes of an existing file or directory. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ALTFILE[ FILE=]

filename

[ ] ;OWNER=

ownername

] ] [ [ ;GROUPID=]

POSIXgroupname

]

Parameters

filename

The filename of the object to be altered, specified in either MPE or HFS syntax. The

filename

may name a file, hierarchical directory, root, MPE group or account. Note that MPE groups or accounts can ONLY be named via HFS (Hierarchical File System) syntax. Temporary files are not recognized.

This is a required parameter. You may not use wildcards, back-reference a file equation, or name a system-defined file such as $NULL.

If the filename is in MPE syntax and it has a lockword, do NOT include the lockword on the command line, or you will get an error.

ownername

The name of the user who will become the owner (UID) of

filename

. This

ownername

must already exist on the system. Default is for the UID of the file to remain unchanged. Note that no qualification is done on this name; it must be fully specified. To have the

ownername

upshifted, enclose it in quotes.

POSIXgroupname

The name of the POSIX group (GID) that this file will belong to. This

POSIXgroupname

must already exist on the system. You cannot use this parameter to change the GID of an MPE group or account. Default is for the file to retain its previous GID. To have

POSIXgroupname

upshifted, enclose it in quotes.

Operation Notes

You use the

ALTFILE

command to alter a file's characteristics. Currently the attributes that you may modify are the owner (UID) and POSIX group (GID) for a file, hierarchical directory, MPE group or account, with the restriction that you may not alter the GID for

MPE groups or accounts.

You must have the appropriate privilege to change the requested attribute(s). In order to change the UID of a file, you must be one of the following:

• The file's account manager (your logon account matches the GID of the file and you have MPE/iX account manager (AM) capability). In this case,

ownername

must specify a user belonging to the account manager's logon account.

• A system manager (a user who has the MPE/iX system manager (SM) user capability).

In this case,

ownername

may specify any user existing in the user database.

Chapter 2 55

Command Definitions A-B

ALTFILE

In order to change the GID of a file, you must be one of the following:

• The file owner (your logon name matches the UID of the file). In this case,

POSIXgroupname

must specify your logon account.

• The file's account manager (your logon account matches the GID of the file and you have the MPE/iX account manager (AM) capability). In this case,

POSIXgroupname

must specify the account manager's logon account.

• A system manager (you have MPE/iX system manager (SM) capability). In this case,

POSIXgroupname

may specify any GID existing in the group database.

You may issue the command once to modify multiple attributes. If you specify multiple attributes, all modifications must succeed for any to take effect. If you enter no attributes, the command has no effect on the specified file.

Related Information

Commands

ALTSEC

LISTFILE

RELEASE

SECURE

Manuals

Performing System Management Tasks

56 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTGROUP

ALTGROUP

Changes one or more attributes of a group.

Syntax

ALTGROUP

groupname

[ .

acctname

]

[ ;PASS=[

password

]] [ ;CAP=[

capabilitylist

] ]

[ ;FILES=[

filespace

] ] [ ;CPU=[

cpu

] ]

[ ;CONNECT=[

connect

] ] [ ;ACCESS=[ (

fileaccess

)] ]

[ ;ONVS=

volumesetname

] [ ;HOMEVS=

volumesetname

]

Parameters

groupname

The name of the group whose attributes are to be changed.

acctname password capabilitylist

The name of the account in which the group is to reside. System manager

(SM) capability is required to use this parameter.

The

password

to be assigned to the group, which is used to verify logon and access only. If the

PASS

parameter is omitted, no change is made. If

PASS is used and

password

is omitted, the existing password is removed. If

PASS is used and

password

is specified the existing password is changed; if there is no existing password for the group a password is created.

Either 1) a list of capabilities, separated by commas, permitted this group, or 2) a list of additions and/or deletions to be applied to the group's existing set of capabilities. Additions and deletions are specified by a "+" or

"-" immediately followed by the capability to add or delete, separated by commas.

If "+"/"-" is to be specified in the list, then the list must begin with "+" or

"-". For example,

CAP=+MR,-PH

is legal, but

CAP=MR,-PH

is not.

It is not necessary to prefix each capability to be added / deleted with "+" /

"-", as the occurrence of "+" / "-" indicates an action that remains in effect until the indicator changes. For example,

CAP=+MR,PH,-PM,DS

is equivalent to

CAP=+MR,+PH,-PM,-DS

Chapter 2 57

Command Definitions A-B

ALTGROUP

filespace cpu connect fileaccess

Each capability is denoted by a two letter mnemonic, as follows:

Process Handling = PH

Extra Data Segments = DS

Multiple RINs = MR

Privileged Mode = PM

Interactive Access = IA

Batch Access = BA

Default is IA, BA except for the

PUB

group of the

SYS

account which has no true default. It is assigned the maximum group capabilities when the system is delivered and should not normally be changed.

Disk storage limit, in sectors, for the permanent files of the group. A group's

filespace

cannot be set to a value greater than the corresponding limits currently defined for the group's account. Nor can a group's

filespace

be set to a value less than the actual number of sectors in use in that group. Default is unlimited file space.

The limit on the total cumulative CPU-time, in seconds, for the group. This limit is checked only when a job or session is initiated; the limit never causes a job/session to abort. The maximum value allowed is 2,147,483,647 seconds. If the limit is exceeded, users with account manager capability are warned when logging on; other users are denied access.

The CPU limit for a group cannot be set to a value greater than the corresponding limit currently defined for the group's account. Default is unlimited CPU-time. The counter may be set to zero with the

RESETACCT command.

The limit on the total cumulative session connect-time, in minutes, that the group is allowed. This limit is checked at logon, and whenever the session initiates a new process. The maximum value allowed is

2,147,483,647 minutes. If the limit is exceeded, users with account manager capability are warned when logging on; other users are denied access.

A group's connect limit cannot be set to a value greater than the corresponding limit currently defined for the group's account. Default is unlimited connect-time. The counter may be set to zero with the

RESETACCT

command.

The restriction on file access pertinent to this group. Default is

R,X:ANY;A,W,L,S:AL,GU for the public group (

PUB

); and R,A,W,L,X,S:GU for all other groups, where R, L, A, W, and X specify modes of access by types of users (ANY, AC, GU, AL, GL) as follows:

R = READ

L = LOCK

A = APPEND

W = WRITE

X = EXECUTE

S = SAVE

LOCK

allows exclusive access.

APPEND

implicitly specifies

LOCK

WRITE implicitly specifies

APPEND

and

LOCK

58 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTGROUP

The user types are specified as follows:

ONVS

ANY = Any user

AC = Member of this account only

GU = Member of this group only

AL = Account librarian user only

GL = Group librarian user only

To specify two or more user or access types, separate them by commas.

A particular volume set for which the group attributes are to be changed.

The volume set must be already defined and recognized by the system. If you specify

ONVS

, the only other parameter that works with it is the

FILES parameter. If

volumesetname

is omitted from the

ONVS=

parameter, or you omit

ONVS

, the operation is performed on the system volume set.

HOMEVS

Changes the home volume set from the current set to the set specified by

volumesetname

. You may do this only if the group on the current home system volume set is empty and not in use; no one is logged onto that group.

volume setname

The full name of the MPE/iX volume set, consisting of from 1 to 32 characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The remaining characters may be alphabetic, numeric, the underscore, or periods.

You cannot change the home volume set if the home volume set is the system volume set, and it contains files. If it contains no file, you can change the home volume set.

Consider the following when changing the home volume set:

• If the home volume set is the system volume set, no files may exist in the group and the group may not be in use (no users may be logged onto the group). Otherwise, the command fails.

• If the current home volume set is not the system volume set but the volume set is mounted, no files may exist in the group on that volume set, and the group may not be in use. Otherwise, the command fails.

• If the current home volume set is not the system volume set and it is not mounted, it may be changed.

It is permissible to reassign a group to a different volume set despite the presence of files belonging to

groupname

. This is possible provided that the old volume set is not the system volume set and the

groupname

is not currently bound to its home volume set. This binding occurs automatically when the volume set is mounted; it occurs explicitly when the

MOUNT

VSOPEN

commands are invoked; it occurs implicitly when the

FOPEN intrinsic is invoked.

Operation Notes

This command changes one or more attributes of a group. Multiple parameters may be specified on a single command line as shown in "Examples." When an entire parameter is omitted from an

ALTGROUP

command, the corresponding value for the group remains

Chapter 2 59

Command Definitions A-B

ALTGROUP

unchanged. When a keyword is included but the corresponding parameter is omitted (as in

PASS =

Return

), the default value is assigned. Table 2-3 lists the default values for the

ALTGROUP

command. Table 2-3 shows the default values for the ALTGROUP Command.

Table 2-3 Default Values for the ALTGROUP Command

Parameter

password capabilitylist filespace cpu connect fileaccess

Default Values

Null (No

password

)

IA, BA (except

PUB.SYS

)

PH, DS, MR, PM, IA, BA (

PUB.SYS

only)

Unlimited

R,A,W,L,X,S:GU (All groups except

PUB

)

R,X:ANY;A,W,L,S:AL,GU (

PUB

group only)

When a parameter is modified with the

ALTGROUP

command, it immediately takes effect in the directory. It does not affect any active users with open files in the group, until they log off their current session and log on to that

username

and group again. For this reason, notify all group users of any planned changes in advance.

NOTE

If you specify volume created commands or parameters for a volume set that is not currently mounted, or for an account that does not exist, MPE/iX returns an error message.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. Account manager (AM) or system manager (SM) capability is required to use this command.

Examples

To assign a new

password

PASS2

, to a group named

GROUPX

, enter:

ALTGROUP GROUPX;PASS=PASS2

To alter the group

LEILA

that resides on the volume set

TIME_LORD:

ALTGROUP LEILA;ONVS=TIME_LORD;FILES=10000

If the group

LEILA

contains no files, and no one is logged onto the group, you may also alter the home volume set to

DICHONDRITE

, provided

DICHONDRITE

exists and is recognized by the system:

ALTGROUP LEILA;HOMEVS=DICHONDRITE

60 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTGROUP

However, if

LEILA

does contain files, you cannot change the home volume set for this group without creating a new group and transferring those files to it.

Related Information

Commands

ALTACCT

ALTUSER

Manuals

Volume Management Reference Manual

Chapter 2 61

Command Definitions A-B

ALTJOB

ALTJOB

Alters the attributes of waiting or scheduled jobs. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ALTJOB[ JOB=] {

#Jnnn #Snnn

}

[ ;INPRI=

inputpriority

] [ ;OUTDEV={ l

dev devclass

} ]

[.HIPRI][;JOBQ=queuename]

Parameters

nnn

A job number.

nnn

A session number. (Although syntactically correct, this parameter is rarely used: sessions do not wait.)

inputpriority

The new input priority (0 = lowest; 14 = highest).

ldev or devclass The logical device number or device class name of the destination device job's

$STDLIST

HIPRI

queuename

Allows the OP or SM to bypass the joblimit, see the JOB command for more detail.

The name of the job queue whose limit is being changed.

Operation Notes

The

ALTJOB

command, in conjunction with the

JOBFENCE

command, allows you to control the flow of all jobs on the system with the exception of

HIPRI

jobs. It can be used to alter only jobs in the INTRO, WAIT, or SCHED state. Jobs with an input priority less than or equal to the current JOBFENCE, a numerical value from 0 to 14, are deferred.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

BREAK

has no effect on this command. If issued from the console or by a user with SM capability, or

allowed

via the

ALLOW

command, the

ALTJOB

command can be used to alter

any

job. A user who is

not

at the console, does not have SM or has

not

been allowed the command may issue

ALTJOB

only if

jobsecurity

is set to

low

. If

jobsecurity

is set to

low

then all users can issue

ALTJOB

against their own jobs and account managers (AM capability) can issue it against any job in that account.

Example

In the following example, three jobs are submitted by users, each with an

INPRI

value of 8.

To change the

INPRI

values to ensure that

JOB1

runs first,

JOB2

runs last, and

JOB3

runs second with

allocated as the

OUTDEV

for

JOB3

, enter the following commands:

62 Chapter 2

JOBFENCE 14

15:11/#J1/24/DEFERRED JOB INTRODUCED ON LDEV #53

15:11/#J2/25/DEFERRED JOB INTRODUCED ON LDEV #53

15:13/#J3/26/DEFERRED JOB INTRODUCED ON LDEV #53

SHOWJOB

JOBNUM STATE IPRI JIN JLIST INTRODUCED JOB NAME

#S23 EXEC 20 20 THU 2:15P OPERATOR.SYS

#J1 WAIT D 8 10S 12 THU 3:11P JOB2,OP.SYS

#J2 WAIT D 8 10S 12 THU 3:11P JOB3,SUE.PAYROLL

#J3 WAIT D 8 10S 12 THU 3:13P JOB1,JIM.ACCTG

4 JOBS:

0 INTRO

3 WAIT; INCL 3 DEFERRED

1 EXEC; INCL 1 SESSIONS

0 SUSP

JOBFENCE= 14; JLIMIT= 5; SLIMIT= 16

ALTJOB #J1;INPRI=10

ALTJOB #J3;INPRI=9;OUTDEV=LP

ALTJOB #J2;INPRI=8

JOBFENCE 6

SHOWJOB

JOBNUM STATE IPRI JIN JLIST INTRODUCED JOB NAME

#S23 EXEC 20 20 THU 2:15P OPERATOR.SYS

#J1 EXEC 10 10S 12 THU 3:13P JOB2, OP.SYS

#J3 EXEC 9 10S LP THU 3:11P JOB1,JIM.ACCTG

#J2 EXEC 8 10S 12 THU 3:11P JOB3,SUE.PAYROLL

4 JOBS:

0 INTRO

0 WAIT; INCL 0 DEFERRED

4 EXEC; INCL 1 SESSIONS

0 SUSP

JOBFENCE= 6; JLIMIT= 5; SLIMIT= 16

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

JOBFENCE

JOBSECURITY

LISTJOBQ

Performing System Operation Tasks

Command Definitions A-B

ALTJOB

Chapter 2 63

Command Definitions A-B

ALTLOG

ALTLOG

Alters the attributes of an existing user logging identifier.

Syntax

ALTLOG

logid

[ ;LOG=

logfile

{ ,DISC ,TAPE } ] [ ;PASS=

password

[ { ;AUTO ;NOAUTO } ]

Parameters

logid

The logging identifier whose attributes are to be changed. This identifier must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

logfile password

AUTO

NOAUTO

The name of the file to receive data from the logging procedure. This name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. You must specify the device class on which log file resides, either

DISC

TAPE

The new password for the logging identifier. This password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

Initiates an automatic

CHANGELOG

if the current log file becomes full. This option is ignored is

TAPE

is specified. Refer to the

CHANGELOG

command.

Prevents the initiation of an automatic

CHANGELOG

. A

CHANGELOG

is not performed if the current log file becomes full. Default.

Operation Notes

This command changes the attributes of an existing user logging identifier to those specified in the parameter list. Parameters not included in the

ALTLOG

command retain their current values. System supervisor (OP) or user logging (LG) capability is required to use this command. Only the creator of the logging identifier can alter its attributes.

To use the

AUTO

parameter, the log process for logid must be enabled for changing. You may do this by ending the log file name with the numeric characters 001 (for example,

fname001). This naming convention works in conjunction with the file set number to generate sequential file names automatically.

If a log file is restricted to a single volume or volume class when it is created with the

BUILD

command, then successive log files created by User Logging will have the same restriction.

If a new log file name is specified with the

ALTLOG

command, the links with any previous log file are broken.

64 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTLOG

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. User logging (LG) capability is required to use this command.

Example

To change the destination log file of the logging identifier

KIM

to log file

and specify that

resides on disk, enter:

ALTLOG KIM;LOG=C,DISC

Since the keyword parameter,

PASS=

, was omitted,

KIM

retains any password previously specified.

Related Information

Commands

CHANGELOG

GETLOG

LISTLOG

SHOWLOGSTATUS

Manuals

User Logging Programmer's Guide System Startup, Configuration, and

Shutdown Reference Manual

Chapter 2 65

Command Definitions A-B

ALTPROC

ALTPROC

Changes characteristics of the specified processes. Currently, a process' priority, queue attribute, and workgroup may be changed. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ALTPROC[ [ PIN=] {

pinspec

(

pinspec

[

,pinspec

] ...) } [ ;JOB=] {

jobspec

(

jobspec

[

,jobspec

]

...) } ]

[ [ ;PRI=]

pri

[ ;WG= ] {

workgrp

NATURAL_WG } ]

[ { ;TREE ;NOTREE }]

[{ ;USER ;ANYUSER } ]

[ ;SYSTEM]

Parameters

pinspec

The process(es) you want to alter. This is a required parameter, unless you specify

jobspec

. If you omit both, you will get an error.

jobspec

The

pinspec

, expressed [#p ]pin, is a Process Identification Number (PIN).

pinspec

is 0, then the caller's pin is used. To alter system processes, you must have SM capability and specify the

SYSTEM

option.

NOTREE

is the default for all

pinspec

target processes, and can be overridden with the

TREE

option.

The

USER

and

ANYUSER

options do not apply to

pinspec

The name of the job or session whose processes are to be altered. A

jobspec

can be any of the following, jobnumber, username, @S, @J, or @.

• The jobnumber must be in the form of either

#Jnnn

#Snnn

• The username must be in the form

user

account

]. If there is more than one job/session matching the same username, they will all be altered.

• Wildcards have the following meanings:

@S - all sessions,

@J - all jobs,

@ - all sessions and jobs

The

USER

and

ANYUSER

options apply only to

jobspec

and only if

jobspec

is wildcarded. The

USER

option, which is the default, alters only processes matching the user's name, while the

ANYUSER

option alters all processes matching the wildcarded

jobspec

. For example, if the user's name is

STEVE.UI and you enter the command shown below, then only job processes logged on as STEVE.UI are altered.

:ALTPROC job=@j;pri=cs

66 Chapter 2

pri

CAUTION

NOTE

Command Definitions A-B

ALTPROC

However, if you add anyuser

to the same command as shown below, then all job processes are altered.

:ALTPROC job=@j;pri=cs;anyuser

TREE

is the default for all

jobspec

target processes, and can be overridden with the

NOTREE

option.

The

SYSTEM

option is ignored for all

jobspec

target processes.

The

jobspec

is optional as long as a

pinspec

is supplied. If both are omitted, an error is reported.

The queue or absolute priority for the process. If omitted, the priority is unchanged.

Exercise extreme caution when altering a process's priority, scheduling queue attribute, or workgroup membership. Such a change can significantly impact system performance.

For Workload Manager Users

Avoid using the

;PRI=

option to explicitly change a process. If you have created user-defined workgroups that have

;MEMB_QUEUE

as membership criteria, use of the

;PRI=

option may change the workgroup. Instead, use either the

;WG=

workgrp

;WG=NATURAL_WG

option, explained below, to move target processes into existing workgroups.

Using

;WG=

to explicitly change a workgroup should be a temporary measure, and used rarely. Instead, adjust workgroup membership criteria to ensure that desired processes become natural members of the workgroup.

If you specify both the

;WG=

and

;PRI=

in the

ALTPROC

command line, you will get an error.

The

pri

value may be one of the following:

• A scheduling queue value {BS,CS,DS,ES} sets the queue attribute of the target process(es). If a user-defined workgroup does not capture the process, then the process will fall into to the corresponding system-defined default workgroup at the base priority (subject to decay as it consumes CPU). To assign a scheduling queue value, you must have OP capability.

• A queue manager value {BM,CM,DM,EM} sets the queue attribute of the target process(es). If a user-defined workgroup does not capture the process, then the process will fall into the corresponding system-defined default workgroup at the base priority (non-decayable). To assign a queue manager value, you must have SM capability.

• An absolute priority {

nnn

} sets the priority of the process to the specified value that will not decay. The workgroup of the process will not be changed (the process will have the same timeslice value). Note that the

Chapter 2 67

Command Definitions A-B

ALTPROC

workgrp

priority specified need not fall between the base and limit priorities of the workgroup. To assign an absolute priority value, you must have SM capability.

If you do not have SM capability, then your

MAXPRI

value represents the highest priority that you can assign a process. A warning appears when the specified priority exceeds

MAXPRI

is ignored for System

Manager (SM) capability.

A workgroup value {

workgrp

} moves the target process(es) to the specified

workgroup. A process moved in this manner is considered an artificial

member of the workgroup (the process was placed in workgroup explicitly,

rather than naturally by meeting the membership criteria specified for the workgroup).

A process remains an artificial member of its assigned workgroup until either the workgroup is purged or the process' explicit assignment is changed (via

ALTPROC

or an AIF call). An artificial member is not affected by a system-wide scan or by the changing of its process attributes used to determine workgroup membership. A workgroup specification requires

SM capability and can only be used to modify the workgroup assignment of user processes.

You cannot specify both the

;WG=

and

;PRI=

in the

ALTPROC

command line. Workload Manager users should use

;WG=

instead of

;PRI=

NATURAL_WG

The natural workgroup specification {

NATURAL_WG

} releases one or more process(es) from their explicit workgroup assignment, allowing them to migrate to their natural workgroup. A natural workgroup specification requires SM capability.

TREE

NOTREE

USER

ANYUSER

SYSTEM

This option alters each process specified as well as all of its descendants.

TREE

is the default for all

jobspec

target processes. If you specify both

TREE and

SYSTEM,

you will see a warning that

TREE

will be ignored.

This option alters only the processes specified. Descendant processes will not be altered.

NOTREE

is the default for all

pinspec

target processes.

The

USER

option applies only when

jobspec

is wildcarded. It alters only processes matching the user's name.

USER

is the default.

The

ANYUSER

option applies only when

jobspec

is wildcarded. It alters all

jobspec

target processes, regardless of their owners.

Use the

SYSTEM

option if the target process specified in

pinspec

is a system process. SM capability is required for the

SYSTEM

option.

SYSTEM

is ignored for all

jobspec

processes and when you specify a workgroup or natural workgroup. If you specify both

SYSTEM

and

TREE

, you see a warning that

TREE

will be ignored.

CAUTION

Exercise extreme care when altering system processes since doing so can significantly degrade system efficiency.

68 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTPROC

Operation Notes

To execute the

ALTPROC

command, you must have System Supervisor (OP) or System

Manager (SM) capability. SM capability is necessary to alter system processes, for the

WG= option, for certain specifications to the

PRI

option, and to increase a process' priority above

MAXPRI

. You may issue the

ALTPROC

command from a session, job, program, or while in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command.

Example

To alter process 605, and its current descendants, so that their priorities execute within the DS_Default workgroup, enter:

:ALTPROC #p605; tree; wg=DS_Default

To alter process 605, and its current descendants, so that their scheduling queue attribute is DS, enter:

:ALTPROC #p605; tree; pri=DS

The outcome of this command is not necessarily identical to the outcome achieved with the previous command. If the system was configured with a user-defined workgroup that captured the processes (

MEMB_QUEUE=DS

and a match on other membership attributes, if specified), then the processes would be a member of the user-defined workgroup rather than the DS_Default workgroup.

To alter all job processes to the CS_Default workgroup, enter:

:ALTPROC job=@j; wg=CS_Default; anyuser

To return the processes modified by the previous example to their natural workgroup(s), enter:

:ALTPROC job=@j; wg=NATURAL_WG; anyuser

To alter all job processes matching the user's name to the CS_Default workgroup, enter:

:ALTPROC job=@j; wg=CS_Default; user

To alter the current process' priority so that it behaves like a CS queue manager (SM capability required), enter:

:ALTPROC 0;pri=CM

To alter all processes logged on as mgr.payroll to linear 155 (SM capability required), enter:

:ALTPROC job=mgr.payroll; pri=155

To alter the queue attribute of pins 150, 247, 211 to be ES, enter:

:ALTPROC (150,#p247,211); pri=ES

Related Information

Commands

SHOWPROC

TUNE

SHOWQ

NEWWG

ALTWG

PURGEWG

SHOWWG

Manuals

MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

Using the HP 3000 Workload Manager

Chapter 2 69

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

ALTSEC

Changes the access permissions of an object by altering the access control definition

(ACD).

ACDs are the main method of controlling access to files, hierarchical directories, and devices. ACDs are automatically assigned to hierarchical directories and to files existing in hierarchical directories.

You can change access permissions for any of the following:

• files

• hierarchical directories

• devices

• device classes

You can also use

ALTSEC

to change the access masks of files. The file status change time stamp is updated by

ALTSEC

. You cannot use the

ALTSEC

command to change access permissions for MPE groups, accounts, or the root directory.

Syntax

ALTSEC

objectname

[ ,{FILENAME LDEV DEVCLASS } ]

[ ;[ ACCESS=] (

fileaccess

[ ;[

fileaccess

] [ ;...] ] )]

[{ ;NEWACD= ;ADDPAIR= ;REPPAIR= } { (

acdpair

[ ;

acdpair

] [ ;...] ) ^

filereference

} ]

[ ;DELPAIR= { (

userspec

[ ;userspec] [ ;...] ) ^

filereference

} ]

[ { ;REPACD=} { (

acdpair

;

acdpair

[ ;...] ) ^

filereference objectname

} ]

[ ;COPYACD=

objectname

{ ,FILENAME ,LDEV } ] [ ;DELACD] [ ;MASK]

Parameters

objectname

Specifies the actual file designator, directory name, logical device number, or device class whose security provisions you want to alter.

Either MPE or hierarchical file system (HFS) file name Syntax may be used for the actual file designator of the file or directory whose access permissions are to be altered.

You can only use wildcard characters with MPE Syntax files that reside in a group.

A logical device number must be a numeric value configured on the system, or an @ sign, that indicates all devices on the system. A device class name must be configured on the system.

File equations are ignored during resolution of the object name to avoid having accidental file equation references cause unintentional changes to an object's access permissions.

70 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

ACCESS

MPE Syntax

You can include MPE file name Syntax but not RFA information. If the object is an MPE Syntax file, its format is:

filename

lockword

][.

groupname

acctname

]]

You may specify file lockwords for files protected by active lockwords unless the objects are also protected by a current ACD. In a batch job, if a lockword exists on a file, you must specify it. In a session, if a lockword exists and is omitted, MPE/iX will prompt you for it.

HFS Syntax

You must begin file designators using HFS file name Syntax with either a dot (.) or a slash (/). The maximum length is 255 characters (including the

"./" or "/").

The

objectname

parameter is followed by one of the three

type identifiers

listed below.

FILENAME

Indicates that

objectname

refers to either a file or directory.

This is the default if a type identifier is not specified.

LDEV

DEVCLASS

Indicates that

objectname

refers to a logical device number.

Indicates that

objectname

refers to a device class.

Optional keyword that indicates a

fileaccess

specification follows. This option affects security at the

file

level only. If the file is protected by an

ACD, the ACD overrides the file access mask.

File access mask specifications, entered as follows:

fileaccess

{ R L A W X } [,...] : { ANY AC GU AL GL CR } [,...]

The R, L, A, W, and X specify

modes

of access by types of users (ANY, AC,

GU, AL, GL, CR) as follows:

R = READ

L = LOCK

A = APPEND

W = WRITE

X = EXECUTE

LOCK

allows opening the file with dynamic locking option.

APPEND implicitly specifies

LOCK

WRITE

implicitly specifies

APPEND

and

LOCK

. You may specify two or more

modes

if you separate them by commas.

The user types are specified as follows:

ANY = Any user

AC = Member of this account only

GU = Member of this group only

AL = Account librarian user only

GL = Group librarian user only

CR = Creator

Chapter 2 71

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

NEWACD

REPACD

ADDPAIR

REPPAIR

acdpair

You may specify two or more user types if you separate them by commas.

The default is R,L,W,A,X:ANY. The colon (

) separating one or more

modes

from one or more user types is required punctuation in the specification of

fileaccess

Creates a new ACD for the specified object.

NEWACD

is used when an ACD does not currently exist. It must be followed by valid ACD pair(s) as described below.

Indicates "replace ACD". Use

REPACD

to replace an entire existing ACD for the specified object, or to copy an ACD from an existing

objectname

to the specified

objectname

where

objectname

refers to a file. (You cannot use

REPACD

to copy ACDs between devices.) The

REPACD

parameter must be followed by valid ACD pair(s) as described below.

Adds a new ACD pair to an existing ACD. It must be followed by valid

ACD pair(s) as described below.

Replaces an existing ACD pair in an existing ACD. You must follow this with a valid ACD pair(s) as described below. A new ACD pair will replace an existing ACD pair if it has the same user and account name.

An access control definition pair. Like the

fileaccess

parameter this consists of a

modes

part and a

userspec

part. The

modes

part is separated from the

userspec

part by a colon (:). Acceptable

modes

for files are:

R : read file access

W : write file access

L : lock file access

A : append file access

X : execute file access

NONE : no access

RACD : copy or read the ACD permission

Acceptable

modes

for directories are:

CD : create directory entries access

DD : delete directory entries access

RD : read directory entries access

TD : traverse directory entries access

NONE : no access

RACD : copy or read the ACD permission

File ACD pairs may contain R, W, L, A, X, NONE, and RACD. Directory

ACD pairs may contain CD, DD, RD, TD, NONE, and RACD.

The

userspec

part consists of

• a fully qualified user name (

username.accountname

)

• the file owner represented as

$OWNER

• the file group represented as

$GROUP

• the file group mask represented as

$GROUP_MASK

•

@.accountname

, which represents all users in the account accountname

• @.@, which represents all users in the system

72 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

You cannot use wildcards in any other manner within a user specification.

A typical ACD consisting of three ACD pairs might look like this:

(R,W:ENGR.MFG;R,W,RACD:@.MRKT;R:@.@)

This ACD would allow Read and Write access to the

ENGR

user of the

MFG account; Read and Write access to any user of the

MRKT

account along with the ability to read or copy the ACD; and Read access to any user in any account.

^ filereference

A file containing one or more ACD pairs. ACD pairs must be separated by semi-colons and may be placed on separate lines. A single ACD pair may

not

span more than one line. The file name must be preceded by the ^ sign

(caret symbol) to indicate that the designated file contains the ACD definition. This is known as an indirect file.

The

ALTSEC

command fails if the indirect file does not contain a syntactically correct ACD. ACD pairs may be on separate lines, but a pair may not span lines. Parentheses are optional when defining an

acdpair

within an indirect file.

DELPAIR

The file reference may be specified using MPE or HFS file name Syntax.

For example:

filename

[ /

lockword

] [ .

group

[ .

account

] ]

If the file has an active lockword, you must be specify it. ACDs override lockwords. Lockwords can only be specified in file references using MPE name Syntax. Unqualified file names are relative to the current working directory.

(Indicates "delete pair"). Use to delete one or more ACD pairs in an existing ACD).

DELPAIR

must be followed by a valid

userspec

COPYACD

DELACD

MASK

Username and accountname, the same as the

userspec

described above in

acdpair

. A wildcard (@) may be used for the username or both the username and accountname together. A wildcard may

not

be specified for the accountname unless it is also specified for the username.

(Indicates "copy ACD"). Use

COPYACD

to copy an ACD from an existing

objectname

to the specified

objectname

. ACDs can be copied only between like objects. You must specify

FILENAME or LDEV

FILENAME

is the default. You cannot copy an ACD

from

a device class (

DEVCLASS

), although you may copy

all devices on the system by specifying the

sign as the target device.

(Indicates "delete ACD"). Use

DELACD

to delete all ACD pairs from the specified

objectname

. ACDs may be removed only from devices and files in

MPE groups. The file access matrix controls access to a file when an ACD is deleted.

(Indicates "recalculate MASK"). Use

MASK

to recalculate the ACD file group class mask ($GROUP_MASK) access permissions.

Chapter 2 73

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

Operation Notes

You use the

ALTSEC

command to alter security provisions for files, hierarchical directories, devices, and device classes by manipulating an object's access control definition (ACD) or its access mask. All of these objects may have ACDs, but only files have access masks which can be changed using this command. An object's ACD may be altered using this command with the ACD keywords

NEWACD

REPACD

COPYACD

ADDPAIR

REPPAIR

DELPAIR

DELACD

, and

MASK

A file's access mask may be altered using either the

ACCESS

keyword or an access specification without a keyword. Using the

ACCESS

keyword is a recommended practice to help distinguish between file access mask and ACD operations. Only the owner of a file can use the

ALTSEC

command to change a file's access mask. Object owners and users with appropriate privilege can use this command to manipulate an object's ACD. Files and hierarchical directories have their owner's identity and a file group ID (GID) stored in their file labels. System managers have the appropriate privilege to manipulate the ACDs for all objects. Account managers for the account matching an object's GID have appropriate privilege. Devices are owned by system managers. The ability to manipulate an ACD or file mask is not affected by the object access currently granted to a user.

File ACDs override file lockwords and the file access matrix. ACDs permit more precise access control than the file access matrix by allowing access permissions to specific users.

MPE/iX allows you to specify a maximum of 40 ACD pairs for a particular object. Since a large number of ACD pair specifications overflows the command line buffer, you must enter large numbers of ACD specifications may be entered through an indirect file.

The

ALTSEC

command fails if you attempt to alter the access permissions for a permanent disk file whose group's home volume set is not mounted.

Release 5.0 requires ACDs on the following files:

• All hierarchical directories

• All files under hierarchical directories

• All files directly under MPE/iX groups where the file GID does not match the GID of the accound and group in which the file is located. One way this occurs would be if you rename a file from an MPE group outside the account to another MPE group.

Required ACDs cannot be removed with the ALTSEC command even by users with SM or

AM capability.

File Access Matrix Examples

To view the file access matrix, use

LISTFILE,4

You have created a file named

FDATA

, and want to change its file access matrix access permissions to grant write access to only yourself. Enter:

ALTSEC FDATA;ACCESS=(W:CR)

To change file access permissions for the

FPROG

program file to allow all group users to execute programs, but only account and group librarian users to read or write to the file, enter:

74 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

ALTSEC FPROG;ACCESS=(X:GU;R,W:AL,GL)

ACD Examples

To view ACD information, use the

LISTFILE,-2

command. This form of the

LISTFILE command displays

only

ACD information.

You have created a file named

FDATA

, and want to assign a new ACD to

FDATA

, granting write access to a user named

FRIEND.ACCT

. Enter:

ALTSEC FDATA;NEWACD=(W:FRIEND.ACCT)

As the creator of a file, you can access the file by default, so you don't need to grant yourself access through an ACD. Users with appropriate privileges are always permitted to access files protected by ACDs.

To extend the ACD for the

FDATA

file so that all users on the system can read it, and all users within your account

ACCT

can also write to it, enter:

ALTSEC FDATA;ADDPAIR=(R:@.@;W,R:@.ACCT)

If you decide that users outside your account

ACCT

should not have read access to the file

FDATA

any longer, enter:

ALTSEC FDATA;DELPAIR=(@.@)

This does not delete all ACD pairs, only the ACD pair matching @.@. To delete the entire

ACD, enter:

ALTSEC FDATA;DELACD

To replace the entire ACD, enter:

ALTSEC FDATA;REPACD=(W:FRIEND.ACCT)

You want to copy the ACD associated with LDEV 5 to all devices in device class

TERM

ALTSEC TERM,DEVCLASS;COPYACD=5,LDEV

ACDs may be copied only between objects of the same type.

You want to grant users in account

ACCT

all access to directory

Mydir1

ALTSEC ./Mydir1;ADDPAIR=(CD,DD,RD,TD,RACD:@.ACCT)

You want to grant read and write access to yourself and read access for other members of your group to an HFS Syntax file named a_file_of_Mine

ALTSEC ./a_file_of_Mine;REPPAIR=(RACD,R,W:$OWNER;

RACD,R:$GROUP,$GROUP_MASK;NONE:@.@)

To add a new ACD to file

PROGNAME

allowing all users on the system to execute it, but only users in account

ACCT

to write to it enter:

ALTSEC PROGNAME;NEWACD=(X:@.@;W,X:@.ACCT)

To add a new ACD pair to an ACD which already exists for file

PROGNAME

which will allow the user

ENGR

of the

LAB

account to read, write, lock, append, execute and read the ACD information enter:

ALTSEC PROGNAME;ADDPAIR=(R,W,X,RACD:ENGR.LAB)

Chapter 2 75

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSEC

Note that L and A (lock and append) need not be specified because they are implied with W

(write).

To add an ACD that prevents any user except

OPERATOR.SYS

(and any user with SM capability) from accessing LDEV 7 (a tape drive), enter:

ALTSEC 7,LDEV;NEWACD=(R,W:OPERATOR.SYS)

Note in the last example that X is not used because it makes no sense to

execute

a tape drive. It also makes no sense to

lock

append

a tape drive but W tacitly provides L and A anyway.

To eliminate any ACD that may be in effect for device class LP, and to prevent any user except

MGR.FINANCE

from writing to a printer in device class LP, enter:

ALTSEC LP,DEVCLASS;DELACD

ALTSEC LP,DEVCLASS;NEWACD=(W:MGR.FINANCE)

Related Information

Commands

LISTF

LISTFILE

RELEASE

SECURE

SHOWDEV

, and the

fileaccess

parameter for the

ALTACCT

ALTGROUP

NEWACCT

and

NEWGROUP commands.

Manuals None

76 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSPOOLFILE

ALTSPOOLFILE

Alters the characteristics of an output spoolfile.

Syntax

ALTSPOOLFILE{

#Onnn ldev1

} { ;PRI=

outputpriority

;COPIES=

numcopies

;DEV={

ldev2 devclass

}

;DEFER } [ ;...]

Parameters

nnn ldev1

The output device file identification of a spoolfile.

The logical device number of the device where an ACTIVE spoolfile currently resides.

outputpriority The output priority of the designated device file (0 = lowest; 14 = highest).

numcopies

The number of copies to be produced from the designated device file. Range is 1 through 127; default is 1.

ldev2 or devclass The logical device number or device class name of the spoolfile's destination device. If ACTIVE, the file is returned to the READY state. It may immediately become ACTIVE on ldev2 if all requirements are met.

DEFER

Immediately changes the output priority of an ACTIVE or READY spoolfile to 0. If ACTIVE, the file is returned to the READY state.

Operation Notes

The operator uses the

ALTSPOOLFILE

command to change the printing priority of a spoolfile, to increase or decrease the number of copies produced, and/or to change the destination device or class.

When altering an ACTIVE spoolfile, first take the output device offline. This gives you time to enter the command and determine that the ACTIVE spoolfile is the file being printed.

When the

ALTSPOOLFILE

command has been sent to the spooler process, MPE/iX returns the colon prompt (

). No change to the spoolfile is made, however, until the output device is returned online.

NOTE

If you are altering the

PRI

COPIES

parameter for an ACTIVE spoolfile there is no need to take the output device offline. These two parameters can be altered while the device is online.

Chapter 2 77

Command Definitions A-B

ALTSPOOLFILE

You may alter the outputpriority or the numcopies of an ACTIVE spoolfile without interrupting the printing process. If you alter the device or defer the ACTIVE spoolfile with the

DEFER

parameter, the printer stops immediately. In both cases, the entire file is printed when printing resumes. Deferring a spoolfile lowers its output priority to zero, the lowest priority possible. To print a deferred spoolfile, you must raise its priority above the current outfence using the

ALTSPOOLFILE

command.

If you intend to print a spoolfile on an HP 2680A Laser Page Printer, you may add an environment file to it before printing.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It is executable from the console by users with system supervisor (OP) or system manager (SM) capability. It may be distributed to other users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

Examples

To defer the

ACTIVE

spoolfile (#O86) on LDEV 6 take device 6 offline, then enter: or

ALTSPOOLFILE #O86;DEFER

ALTSPOOLFILE 6;DEFER

To change the priority of deferred spoolfile #O123 from 0 to 3 enter:

ALTSPOOLFILE #O123;PRI=3

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

OUTFENCE

Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual

78 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTUSER

ALTUSER

Changes the attributes currently defined for a user.

Syntax

ALTUSER

username

[

.acctname

]

[ ;PASS=[

password

] ] [ ;CAP=[ capabilitylist] ]

[ ; MAXPRI=[

subsueuename

] ] [ ;LOCATTR=[

localattribut

] ]

[ ;HOME=[

homegroupname

] ] [ ;UID=[

uid

]

[ ;USERPASS=[

req opt

] [

Expired

] ]

The USERPASS parameter is only available if the HP Security Monitor has been installed.

Parameters

username acctname password capabilitylist

The name assigned to the user within a logon account.

The account in which the user is to reside. System manager (SM) capability is required to use this parameter.

The

password

to be assigned to the user. If

password

is omitted, any existing

password

is removed. If

PASS=

is omitted, any existing password is unchanged.

Either 1) a list of capabilities, separated by commas, permitted to this user, or 2) a list of additions and/or deletions to be applied to the user's existing set of capabilities. Additions and deletions are specified by a "+" or

"-" immediately followed by the capability to add or delete, separated by commas.

If "+"/"-" is to be specified in the list, then the list must begin with "+" or

"-". For example,

CAP=+MR,-PH

is legal, but

CAP=MR,-PH

CAP=+MR,PH,-PM,DS

is equivalent to

CAP=+MR,+PH,-PM,-DS

The capabilities allowed to users are restricted by the capabilities assigned to the user's account. If a capability is absent at the account level, users within the account are also denied that capability, whether or not it is explicitly assigned to them.

Each capability is denoted by a two-letter mnemonic as follows:

System Manager = SM

Account Manager = AM

Account Librarian = AL

Group Librarian = GL

Diagnostician = DI

System Supervisor = OP

Network Administrator = NA

Node Manager = NM

Chapter 2 79

Command Definitions A-B

ALTUSER

Save Files = SF

Access to Nonshareable

I/O Devices = ND

Use Volumes = UV

Create Volumes = CV

Use Communication

Subsystem CS

Programmatic Sessions = PS

User Logging = LG

Process Handling = PH

Extra Data Segments = DS

Multiple RINs = MR

Privileged Mode = PM

Interactive Access = IA

Batch Access = BA

Programmatic Sessions = PS

Default is SF, ND, IA, and BA. Note that CV automatically gives the user

UV capability, and removal of UV results in automatic removal of CV.

subqueuename

The name of the highest priority subqueue that may be requested by any process of any job/session initiated by the user. This parameter is specified as AS, BS, CS, DS, or ES, but cannot be greater than that specified with the

NEWACCT

ALTACCT

commands. The

subqueuename

defined for the user is checked against the

subqueuename

defined for the account at logon, and the lower priority of the two is used as the maximum priority restricting all processes of the job/session. Also, the priority requested by the user at logon is checked against the

subqueuename

defined for the user, and the user is granted the lower of these two values. Default is CS.

CAUTION

Processes capable of executing in the AS or BS subqueues can deadlock the system. By assigning nonpriority processes to these subqueues, you may prevent critical system processes from executing. Exercise extreme care when assigning processes to the AS or BS subqueue.

localattribute

Defined at the installation site, this arbitrary double word bit map is used to further classify users. While it is not part of standard MPE/iX security provisions, programmers may define it (through the

WHO

intrinsic) to enhance the security of their own programs. The bit map for the user local attributes must be a subset of the bit map for the account local attributes.

The

ALTUSER

command checks the local attributes of the user with those of the account. Default is double word 0 (null).

homegroupname

The name of an existing group assigned as the home group for this user.

The first user established when an account is created, by default, has

PUB assigned as the home group. Subsequent new users, by default, have no home group assigned. If no home group is assigned, the user must always specify an existing group when logging on.

uid

User ID to be altered for the account manager in the user database. The

uid

parameter must be a unique positive (non-zero) 32-bit integer.

Req

USERPASS=REQ specifies that all users in the account must have a non-blank password. It is available only if the HP Security Monitor has been installed.

80 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ALTUSER

Opt

Expired

The password expires immediately. The user cannot logon without selecting a new password. It is only available if the HP Security Monitor has been installed.

Operation Notes

The

ALTUSER

command allows the account manager to change the

password

, capabilities, processing subqueue, security checking, and home group currently defined for a user. More than one of these attributes may be changed at a time, by entering multiple keyword parameters on a single command line, using the semicolon (

;

) delimiter.

To change an attribute, enter the keyword and its new value. When an entire keyword parameter group is omitted from the

ALTUSER

command, the corresponding value for the user remains unchanged. When a keyword is included, but the corresponding parameter is omitted (as in

PASS=

Return

), a default value is assigned as shown in

Table 2-4 'Default Values for the ALTUSER Command' on page 81 .

Table 2-4 Default Values for the ALTUSER Command

Parameter

password capabilitylist subqueuename localattribute homegroupname

Default Values

NULL password

SF, ND, IA, and BA (provided these capabilities have been specified for the account)

0 (null)

The first user established when the account is created has

PUB

assigned as home group. Subsequent users have no group assigned as home. If a user has no home group assigned, an existing group must be specified when initiating a job or a session.

When a parameter is modified with the

ALTUSER

command, it is immediately registered in the directory. However, it does not affect users who are currently logged on to the system.

They are affected the next time they log on to the same user name and account. For this reason, warn users in advance of any intended changes.

Avoid changing the

capabilitylist

homegroupname

of the user

MANAGER.SYS

. SM capability cannot be taken away from

MANAGER.SYS

ALTUSER will not allow a user with AM capability to remove AM from their own capability list. However, a user with AM can remove AM from the capability list of another

AM user inside the same account.

Chapter 2 81

Command Definitions A-B

ALTUSER

Use

This command may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in break mode. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. Account manager (AM) capability is required to use this command. System manager (SM) capability is required to specify a user in an account other than your own.

Examples

Suppose an account's capabilities are AM, AL, GL, SF, ND, PH, DS, MR, IA, and BA. To change the

capabilitylist

of the user

JONES

from IA, BA, SF, PH, DS to include multiple RIN

(MR) capability, enter:

ALTUSER JONES;CAP=IA,BA,SF,PH,DS,MR

To alter two attributes,

password

and

subqueuename

, for user

JONES

enter:

ALTUSER JONES;PASS=JJ;MAXPRI=DS

Related Information

Commands

ALTACCT

ALTGROUP

LISTUSER

NEWACCT

NEWUSER

Manuals

Performing System Management Tasks

82 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

ASSOCIATE

ASSOCIATE

Gives a user operator control of a device class.

Syntax

ASSOCIATE

devclass

Parameters

devclass

The name of a logical device class configured with SYSGEN.

Operation Notes

This command links a device class, such as

, to an individual user on the system. The user may then execute any valid operator command for a device in the device class and receive the status messages for the devices in that device class on

$STDLIST

. For example, a remote printer may be associated with a terminal, so that messages concerning the printer go to the terminal, not the system console.

Before a user can be associated, the system manager must run a utility program (the version of

ASOCTBL.PUB.SYS

that matches your operating system) in order to create a device class/user association table. This table defines which users may be associated with which device classes. At any given time, only one user may be associated with a given device class. If the device belongs in several device classes, only one of those device classes may be associated.

The operator commands, which may be made available to users through the

ASSOCIATE command, are:

ABORTIO OUTFENCE

ACCEPT REFUSE

ALTSPOOLFILE REPLY

DELETESPOOLFILE RESUMESPOOL

DISCRPS SHUTQ

DOWN SPOOLER

DOWNLOAD STARTSPOOL

FORMSALIGN STOPSPOOL

HEADOFF SUSPENDSPOOL

HEADON UP

OPENQ

Both the system supervisor and the user may

DISASSOCIATE

a user from a device. In addition, a user implicitly disassociates a device when logging off.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, program, or in BREAK. It may not be used from a job. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To be the controller of the device class

TAPE

, enter:

Chapter 2 83

Command Definitions A-B

ASSOCIATE

ASSOCIATE TAPE

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

DISASSOCIATE

Performing System Operation Tasks

84 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BASIC

BASIC

Interprets a compatibility mode BASIC/V program. BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000

Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BASIC[

commandfile

] [ ,[

inputfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

Parameters

commandfile

Actual file designator of the source file or device from which BASIC/V commands and statements are input. This can be any ASCII input file.

Formal file designator is

BASCOM

. Default is

$STDINX

inputfile listfile

Actual file designator of the file containing data input for a BASIC/V program. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

BASIN

. Default is

$STDINX

Actual file designator of the destination file for the program listing and output. This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BASLIST

. Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BASCOM

BASIN

, and

BASLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BASIC

command is generally used for online programming in BASIC/V, but it can also be used to interpret BASIC/V programs submitted in batch mode. In batch mode, the

BASIC/V

>EOD

command is required after any data following the BASIC/V

>RUN command, or after the

>RUN

command itself if there is no data.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Chapter 2 85

Command Definitions A-B

BASIC

Examples

To enter commands and data from your standard input device, with program listing and output transmitted to the standard output device, enter:

BASIC

You may also submit commands and data to the BASIC/V interpreter through input files that you have stored on disk. Files created using the editor must be kept with the

UNN

(unnumbered) option of the editor

KEEP

command. In this example, BASIC/V interpreter commands and statements are submitted from the command file

MYCOMDS

. The data that the program uses is stored in the input file

MYDATA

. The program listing and output are written to the file

MYLIST

BASIC MYCOMDS,MYDATA,MYLIST

Related Information

Commands

BASICGO

BASICOMP

BASICPREP

Manuals

BASIC/V Compiler Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

86 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BASICGO

BASICGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode BASIC/V program. BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BASICGO[

commandfile

] [ ,

listfile

]

Parameters

commandfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the BASIC/V compiler commands are read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

BSCTEXT

. Default is

$STDINX

listfile

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BSCLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BSCTEXT

and

BSCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

This command compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode program from a

"fastsave" file created by the BASIC/V interpreter. This enables the program to run faster than it would if it were executed by the interpreter.

To save the program after it is written, use the BASIC/V interpreter command

SAVE

filename

,FAST

. The program then can be compiled, prepared, and executed with the

BASICGO

command. You must specify the

FAST

option to compile the program.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Chapter 2 87

Command Definitions A-B

BASICGO

Example

To compile, prepare, and execute the BASIC/V program

MYPROG

, enter:

BASICGO

$CONTROL USLINIT

$COMPILE MYPROG

$EXIT

The above example begins execution of the BASIC/V compiler, initializes the USL, compiles the program

MYPROG

, and then exits from the compiler.

Related Information

Commands

BASIC

BASICOMP

BASICPREP

Manuals

BASIC/V Compiler Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

88 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BASICOMP

BASICOMP

Compiles a compatibility mode BASIC/V program. BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000

Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BASICOMP[

commandfile

] [ ,[

uslfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

Parameters

commandfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the BASIC/V compiler commands are read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

BSCTEXT

. Default is

$STDINX

uslfile

Actual file designator of the user subprogram library (USL) file to which the object code is written, which can be any binary output file with a file code of

USL

1024

. Its formal file designator is

BSCUSL

. If the uslfile parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

. If entered, this parameter specifies that the file was created in one of four ways:

listfile

• By using the

SAVE

command to save the default USL file

$OLDPASS

, created by a previous compilation.

• By building the USL with the MPE segmenter command

BUILDUSL

Refer to the MPE Segmenter Reference Manual (30000-90011).

• By creating a new USL file with the MPE/iX

BUILD

command and a file code of

USL

1024

• By specifying a nonexistent uslfile parameter, thereby creating a permanent file of the correct size and type.

Actual file designator of the file on which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal designator is

BSCLIST

. Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BSCTEXT

BSCUSL

, and

BSCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BASICOMP

command compiles a program from a "fastsave" file generated by the

BASIC/V interpreter. If a USL file is not specified, the BASIC/V compiler stores the object code in the default systemcdefined temporary file

$OLDPASS

, as shown in the second

Chapter 2 89

Command Definitions A-B

BASICOMP

example, below. You may, however, build a USL file in the permanent file domain, then direct the BASIC/V compiler to store the object code in this file by naming the USL file in the

BASICOMP

command line. Refer to "Examples."

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile the BASIC/V program

MYPROG

onto the USL named

OBJECT

, enter:

BUILD OBJECT;CODE=USL

BASICOMP, OBJECT

$CONTROL USLINIT

$COMPILE MYPROG

$EXIT

The above example builds the USL file, begins execution of the BASIC/V compiler and specifies the USL named

OBJECT

, initializes the USL, compiles the fastsave program named

MYPROG

, and then exits from the compiler.

If you do not choose to build a USL file, the

BASICOMP

command compiles your program and stores the object code in the default USL file

$OLDPASS

BASICOMP

$COMPILE MYRUN

$EXIT

The above example begins execution of the BASIC/V compiler, accepts commands from

$STDINX

, and specifies

$OLDPASS

the USL output and

$STDLIST

for listing output. It compiles from the fastsave file named

MYRUN

into a USL named

$OLDPASS

, and then exits from the BASIC/V compiler.

To run your program, enter:

PREPRUN $OLDPASS

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

BASIC

BASICGO

BASICPREP

BASIC/V Compiler Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

90 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BASICPREP

BASICPREP

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode BASIC/V program. BASIC/V is not part of the

HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BASICPREP[

commandfile

] [ ,[

progfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

Parameters

commandfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the BASIC/V compiler commands are read. This can be any ASCII file. Formal file designator is

BSCTEXT

. Default is

$STDINX

progfile

Actual file designator of the program file on which the prepared program segments are written. When progfile is omitted, the MPE segmenter creates the program file, which resides in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

. To create your own program file, do so in one of two ways:

listfile

• By using the

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

1029

PROG and a numextents value of 1. This file is then used by the

PREP command.

• By specifying a nonexistent file in the progfile parameter, in which case a temporary job file of the correct size and type is created.

Actual file designator of the file to which the listing is written. This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BSCLIST

. Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BSCTEXT

and

BSCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BASICPREP

command compiles and prepares a program for execution from a " fastsave" file generated by the BASIC/V interpreter. If the progfile parameter is omitted, the prepared program segments are stored in the systemcdefined temporary file

$OLDPASS

. To save the prepared program in a file other than

$OLDPASS

, either create a file and specify its file name on the

BASICPREP

command line, or specify a nonexistent

progfile.

A program compiled and prepared with the

BASICPREP

command may be executed with the MPE/iX

RUN

command.

Chapter 2 91

Command Definitions A-B

BASICPREP

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile and prepare a program named

MYPROG

from the BASIC/V fastsave file named

MYCOMDS

, with the listing directed to the standard list device, enter:

BASICPREP,MYCOMDS

The file

MYPROG

is an ASCII file that contains the following BASIC/V compiler commands:

$CONTROL USLINIT SOURCE

$COMPILE MYPROG

$EXIT

The above example initializes the USL and lists the program, compiles the fastsave program

MYPROG

, and then exits from the compiler.

Related Information

Commands

BASIC

BASICGO

BASICOMP

Manuals

BASIC/V Compiler Reference Manual

92 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBASIC

BBASIC

Starts execution of the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter in compatibility mode. HP

Business BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental

Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BBASIC[

commandfile

] [ ,[

inputfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

Parameters

commandfile

Actual file designator of the source file or device from which HP Business

BASIC/V commands and statements are input. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

BASCOM

. Default is

$STDINX

inputfile outfile

Actual file designator of the file containing data input for a HP Business

BASIC/V program. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

BASIN

. Default is

$STDINX

Actual file designator of the destination file for the program listing and output. This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BASOUT

. Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BASCOM

BASIN

, and

BASOUT

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BBASIC

command is generally used for online programming in HP Business BASIC/V, but it can also be used to interpret HP Business BASIC/V programs submitted in batch mode. In batch mode, the HP Business BASIC/V

>EXIT

>::

command is required as the last statement in the command file. HP Business BASIC/V has its own online help facility.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Example

To enter commands and data from your standard input device, with program listing and output transmitted to the standard output device, use:

BBASIC

Chapter 2 93

Command Definitions A-B

BBASIC

You may also submit commands and data to the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter through input files that you have stored on disk. Files created using the editor must be kept with the

UNN

(unnumbered) option of the editor's

KEEP

command. In this example, HP

Business BASIC/V interpreter commands and statements are submitted from the command file

MYCOMDS

. The data that the program uses is stored in the input file

MYDATA

The program listing and output are written to the file

MYLIST

BBASIC MYCOMDS,MYDATA,MYLIST

Related Information

Commands

BBASICGO

BBASICOMP

BBASICPREP

Manuals

HP Business BASIC/XL Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

94 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBASICGO

BBASICGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes an HP Business BASIC/V program in compatibility mode. HP Business BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System

Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BBASICGO

infile

[ ,

listfile

]

Parameters

infile

Actual file designator of the

BSAVE

file containing the HP Business

BASIC/V program to be compiled. Formal file designator is

BBCIN

listfile

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BBCLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BBCIN

and

BBCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. Refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

This command compiles, prepares, and executes a program from a

BSAVE

file created by the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter. This enables the program to run faster than it would if it were executed by the interpreter.

You may create a

BSAVE

program file within the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter after it is saved by using the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter

>SAVE

filename command. The program then can be compiled, prepared, and executed with the

BBASICGO

command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Example

To compile, prepare, and execute the HP Business BASIC/V program

MYPROG

and send the listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

BBASICGO MYPROG,LISTFL

Chapter 2 95

Command Definitions A-B

BBASICGO

Related Information

Commands

BBASIC

BBASICOMP

BBASICPREP

Manuals

HP Business BASIC/XL Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

96 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBASICOMP

BBASICOMP

Compiles an HP Business BASIC/V program in compatibility mode. HP Business BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BBASICOMP

infile

[ ,[

uslfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

Parameters

infile

Actual file designator of the

BSAVE

file containing the HP Business

BASIC/V program to be compiled. Formal file designator is

BBCIN

uslfile

Actual file designator of the user subprogram library (USL) file on which the object program is written, which can be any binary output file with file code of

USL

1024

. Its formal file designator is

BBCUSL

. If the uslfile parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

. If entered, this parameter specifies that the file was created in one of four ways:

listfile

• By using the

SAVE

command to save the default USL file

$OLDPASS created by a previous compilation.

• By building the USL with the MPE segmenter command

BUILDUSL

Refer to the MPE Segmenter Reference Manual (30000-90011).

• By creating a new USL file with the

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

USL

1024

• By specifying a nonexistent uslfile parameter, thereby creating a permanent file of the correct size and type.

Actual file designator of the file on which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal designator is

BBCLIST

. Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BBCIN

BBCUSL

, and

BBCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BBASICOMP

command compiles a source program stored in a

BASIC SAVE

file generated by the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter. The compiled program executes significantly faster than the corresponding interpreted version.

Chapter 2 97

Command Definitions A-B

BBASICOMP

BSAVE

program file can be created from within the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter after it is written, by using the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter

>SAVE

filename

command. The program may be compiled with the

BBASICOMP

command, then prepared with the

PREP

command, and executed with the

RUN

command .

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile the HP Business BASIC/V program

MYPROG

into the USL named

OBJECT

, enter:

BBASICOMP MYPROG,OBJECT

If you do not choose to build a USL file, the

BBASICOMP

command compiles your program, storing the object code in the default USL file

$OLDPASS

BBASICOMP MYPROG

If you now want to run your program, use the

PREPRUN

command:

PREPRUN $OLDPASS

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

BBASIC

BBASICGO

BBASICPREP

HP Business BASIC/XL Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

98 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBASICPREP

BBASICPREP

Compiles and prepares an HP Business BASIC/V program in compatibility mode. HP

Business BASIC/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental

Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

BBASICPREP

infile

[ ,[

progfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

Parameters

infile

Actual file designator of the

BSAVE

file containing the HP Business

BASIC/V program to be compiled. Formal file designator is

BBCIN

progfile

Actual file designator of the program file to which the prepared program segments are written. When progfile is omitted, the MPE segmenter creates the program file, which resides in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

. If you do create your own program file, you must do so in one of two ways:

listfile

• By using the

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

1029

PROG and a numextents value of 1. This file is then used by the

PREP command.

• By specifying a nonexistent file in the progfile parameter, in which case a temporary job file of the correct size and type is created.

Actual file designator of the file on which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BBCLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BBCIN

and

BBCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BBASICPREP

command compiles and prepares a program from a

BSAVE

file generated by the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter. If you omit the progfile parameter, the prepared program segments are stored in the systemcdefined temporary file

$OLDPASS

. If you want to save the prepared program in a file other than

$OLDPASS

, you may either create a file and specify its file name on the

BBASICPREP

command line, or specify a nonexistent

progfile.

BSAVE

program file can be created from within the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter after it is written, by using the HP Business BASIC/V interpreter

>SAVE

filename

command. The program may be compiled with the

BBASICOMP

command, then prepared with the

PREP

command, and executed with the

RUN

command.

Chapter 2 99

Command Definitions A-B

BBASICPREP

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Example

To compile and prepare a program named

MYPROG

from the HP Business BASIC/V

BSAVE file named

MYCOMDS

, and send the listing to the standard list device, enter:

BBASICPREP MYCOMDS,MYPROG

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

BBASIC

BBASICGO

BBASICOMP

HP Business BASIC/XL Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

100 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBXL

BBXL

Initiates execution of the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter. HP Business BASIC/XL is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. (Native Mode)

Syntax

BBXL[

commandfile

] [ ,[

inputfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] ] [ ;XL=

xllist

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line Syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

commandfile

The name of an ASCII file that contains a set of HP Business BASIC/XL commands and/or statements. The formal file designator is

BASCOM

Default is

$STDINX

inputfile listfile xllist

Actual file designator of the file containing data input for a HP Business

BASIC/XL program. Formal file designator is

BASIN

. Default is

$STDINX

Actual file designator of the destination file for the program listing and output. This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BASOUT

. Default is

$STDLIST

A quoted list of the executable libraries which is searched when resolving external procedure references during execution of a user's program.

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BASCOM

BASIN

, and

BASOUT

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BBXL

command is generally used for online programming in HP Business BASIC/XL, but it can also be used to interpret HP Business BASIC/XL programs in batch mode. In batch mode, the HP Business BASIC/XL

>EXIT

>::

command is required as the last statement in the command file. HP Business BASIC/XL has its own online help facility.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR ""

), the command file is not executed and the command fails.

Chapter 2 101

Command Definitions A-B

BBXL

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It is not available in BREAK.

Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

To enter commands and data from your standard input device, with the program listing and output transmitted to the standard output device (both of these are usually the terminal in interactive mode), use:

BBXL

You may also enter commands and statements to the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter by using input files that you have stored on disk. Files created using the editor must be kept with the

UNN

(unnumbered) option of the editor's

KEEP

command. In this example, HP

Business BASIC/XL interpreter commands and statements are entered from the command file

MYCOMDS

. The data that the program uses is stored in the input file

MYDATA

. The program listing and output are written to the file

MYLIST

BBXL MYCOMDS,MYDATA,MYLIST

If you have compiled a number of library procedures into an executable library named

MYXL.MYGRP.MYACCT

and wish to reference these in a program in the interpreter, use:

BBXL XL='MYXL.MYGRP.MYACCT'

Appropriate EXTERNAL and/or INTRINSIC statements in your program are used to define the formal parameters, and an alias, if required, for the external procedure in the executable library.

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

BBXLCOMP

BBXLGO

BBXLLK

HP Business BASIC/XL Migration Guide HP Business BASIC/XL

Reference Manual

102 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLCOMP

BBXLCOMP

Compiles an HP Business BASIC/XL program. HP Business BASIC/XL is not part of the

HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. (Native Mode)

Syntax

BBXLCOMP

textfile

[ ,[

objectfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line Syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the

BASIC SAVE

file (file code

1247

BSVXL

) containing the HP Business BASIC/XL program to be compiled. Formal file designator is

BBCIN

objectfile listfile

Actual file designator of the object file to which the object code is written.

This file is stored in binary form and has a file code of

1461

NMOBJ

. If your program uses

GLOBAL COPTION RLFILE

then this file is a binary file with a file code of

1033

NMRL

. Its formal file designator is

BBCOBJ

. If the

objectfile parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

If you specify objectfile, the compiler stores the object file in a permanent file of the correct size and type, and with the name you specified.

For an

NMOBJ

file, if a file of the same name already exists, the object code overwrites that file.

For an

NMRL

file, if

GLOBAL COPTION RLINIT

is used, then the relocatable library file is overwritten. If

GLOBAL COPTION RLINIT

is not used, then the new object code is added but previously written information remains.

If the compiler issues an error message telling you that a new or existing object file is too small, build the object file with a larger size and recompile to it.

You may use the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to store

$OLDPASS

as a permanent file under another name.

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

BBCLIST

. If you do not specify listfile, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Chapter 2 103

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLCOMP

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BBCIN

BBCOBJ

, and

BBCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BBXLCOMP

command compiles a source program stored in a

BASIC SAVE

file generated by the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter. The compiled program executes significantly faster than the corresponding interpreted version.

Create a

BASIC SAVE

program source file from within the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter by entering the program and using the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter

>SAVE

filename command. Compile the source program in

filename

with the

BBXLCOMP command, then link with the MPE/iX

LINK

command, and execute the program with the

MPE/iX

RUN

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile the HP Business BASIC/XL source program in the file

MYPROG

into the

NMOBJ file named

OBJECT

, enter:

BBXLCOMP MYPROG,OBJECT

If you do not specify an

NMOBJ

file, the

BBXLCOMP

command compiles your program, storing the object code in the default file

$OLDPASS

BBXLCOMP MYPROG

The above example runs the HP Business BASIC/XL compiler using the contents of

MYPROG

as the

BASIC SAVE

formatted source file.

$OLDPASS

is the default object file

(

NMOBJ

) and

$STDLIST

is the default output listing.

If you now want to run your program, enter the

LINK

and

RUN

commands:

LINK

RUN $OLDPASS

This links the

NMOBJ

file and runs the program.

Related Information

Commands

BBXL

BBXLGO

BBXLLK

104 Chapter 2

Manuals

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLCOMP

HP Business BASIC/XL Migration Guide HP Business BASIC/XL

Reference Manual

Chapter 2 105

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLGO

BBXLGO

Compiles, links, and executes an HP Business BASIC/XL program. HP Business

BASIC/XL is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental

Operating Software and must be purchased separately. (Native Mode)

Syntax

BBXLGO

textfile

[ ,[

listfile

] ] [ ;XL

=xllist

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line Syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the

BASIC SAVE

file (file code =

1247

BSVXL

) containing the HP Business BASIC/XL program to be compiled. Formal file designator is

BBCIN

listfile xllist

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BBCLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

A quoted list of the executable libraries which is searched when resolving external procedure references when the program is loaded.

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BBCIN

and

BBCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. Refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

This command compiles a

BASIC SAVE

file created by the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter. The compiled program executes significantly faster than the corresponding interpreted version.

BASIC SAVE

program file is created from within the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter by using the HP Business BASIC/XL

>SAVE

filename command. The program then can be compiled, linked, and executed with the

BBXLGO

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

106 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLGO

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Chapter 2 107

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLGO

Example

To compile, link, and execute the HP Business BASIC/XL program

MYPROG

and direct the listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

BBXLGO MYPROG,LISTFL

Related Information

Commands

BBXL

BBXLCOMP

BBXLLK

Manuals

HP Business BASIC/XL Migration Guide HP Business BASIC/XL

Reference Manual

108 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLLK

BBXLLK

Compiles and links an HP Business BASIC/XL program. HP Business BASIC/XL is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. (Native Mode)

Syntax

BBXLLK

textfile

[ ,[

progfile

] [ ,

listfile

] ]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line Syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the

BASIC SAVE

file (filecode

1247

BSVXL

) containing the HP Business BASIC/XL program to be compiled. Formal file designator is

BBCIN

progfile listfile

Actual file designator of the object file to which the Link Editor writes the linked program. If you do not specify progfile, the default is

$NEWPASS

, which is closed as

$OLDPASS

Actual file designator of the file on which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

BBCLIST

. If you do not specify listfile, the default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

BBCIN

and

BBCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

BBXLLK

command compiles and links a source program stored in a

BASIC SAVE

file generated by the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter. If the progfile parameter is omitted, the linked program is written to the systemcdefined temporary file

$OLDPASS

. To save the linked program in a file other than

$OLDPASS

, specify the file name on the

BBXLLK command line.

Create a

BASIC SAVE

program file from within the HP Business BASIC/XL interpreter, by using the HP Business BASIC/XL

>SAVE

filename command. The program may be compiled and linked with the

BBXLLK

command and executed with the MPE/iX

RUN command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Chapter 2 109

Command Definitions A-B

BBXLLK

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Example

To compile and link a source program stored in the HP Business BASIC/XL

BASIC SAVE file named

MYSCR

to the program file named

MYPROG

, and send the listing to the standard list device, enter:

BBXLLK MYSCR,MYPROG

Related Information

Commands

BBXL

BBXLCOMP

BBXLGO

Manuals

HP Business BASIC/XL Migration Guide HP Business BASIC/XL

Reference Manual

110 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BREAKJOB

BREAKJOB

Suspends an executing job. (Native Mode)

Syntax

BREAKJOB #J

nnn

Parameters

nnn

A job number.

Operation Notes

The operator can use the

BREAKJOB

command to suspend any executing job, including spooled and streamed jobs. A job using a critical system resource is not suspended until it releases the resource.

When you issue the

BREAKJOB

command for a job that controls a nonshareable device, a console message is displayed listing the device(s) that the job controls. (As many as ten devices may be listed.) You may then decide whether the job should be allowed to run until it releases the device(s), or whether it should be aborted.

All commands that normally affect executing jobs, such as

ABORTJOB

, operate on suspended jobs. The

SHOWJOB

command, which lists all jobs, displays

SUSP

for those in the suspended state. To list suspended jobs only, enter

SHOWJOB SUSP

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It is executable only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command, or if

JOBSECURITY

is set to

LOW

Examples

To suspend job number 68, enter:

BREAKJOB #J68

To display suspended jobs, enter:

SHOWJOB SUSP

JOBNUM STATE INPRI JIN JLIST INTRODUCED JOB NAME

#68 SUSP 105 LP WED. 7:56AM TEST,USER.ACCT

Related Information

Commands

ALTJOB

ABORTJOB

RESUMEJOB

SHOWJOB

STREAM

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

Chapter 2 111

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

BUILD

Creates and immediately allocates a new empty file on disk.

Syntax

BUILD

filereferencer

[;REC=[ [

recsize

] [ ,[

blockfactor

] [ ,[ F U V B ] [ ,BINARY ,ASCII ] ] ] ] ]

[ ;CCTL [ ;NOCCTL] ]

[ ;TEMP] [ ;DEV= [

dsdevice# dsdevice#device

[

device

] ] ]

[ ;CODE=

filecode

] BUILD [ ;DISC=[ [

numrec

] [ ,[

numextents

] [ ,

initialloc

] ] ] ]

[ ;RIO ;NORIO ] [ ;MSG ;CIR ;STD ;KSAMXL ;SPOOL ]

[ ;ULABEL=

numlabels

] [ ;KEY={ ^

filereference keyinfo

} ]

[ ;FIRSTREC=

recnum

] [ ;REUSE ;NOREUSE ]

[ ;langid={

langid langname

} ]

[ { ;DEFBLK ;OPTMBLK }]

Parameters

filereference

Actual name of the file to be created. The

filereference

can be either in MPE of HFS Syntax.

MPE Syntax

If the

filereference

does not begin with a dot or a slash, it is parsed according to the MPE Syntax and has the following format:

filename

lockword

][.

groupname

acctname

]]

MPE names must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. If

acctname

is specified, you must have create directory (CD) access to the target group in the account. The default

groupname

and

acctname

are the logon group and account.

HFS Syntax

If the

filereference

begins with a dot (.) or a slash (/), it is parsed according to the HFS Syntax. In this case the

filereference

can consist of 1 to 253 characters for relative pathnames (for example,

./253chars

), and 254 characters for absolute names (for example,

/254chars

The following Syntax rules apply:

• File names are not upshifted.

• File names can be up to 254 characters in length for absolute pathnames, and 253 characters for relative pathnames.

• File names can begin with, and contain, any of the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _, .

112 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

• File names can contain (but not begin with ) a dash (-).

File names are of the form

recsize blockfactor path/filename

where the

path/filename

combination may have a maximum of 255 characters.

Record size. A positive number indicates words, while a negative number indicates bytes for new files only. For fixed length files, this is the logical record size. For undefined length files, this is the maximum record size.

For variable length files, this is the maximum logical record size if

blockfactor

is 1. If not, this is used to calculate the maximum logical record size and physical record size. For byte-stream files,

recsize

is 1 byte.

Records always begin on word boundaries. Therefore, the record size is rounded up to the nearest word boundary for block size calculations. For a binary file or a variable length ASCII file, odd byte lengths are rounded up and the extra byte is available for data.

However, if an odd byte length record size is specified for a fixed length or undefined length record file, the extra byte is not available for data.

Default is the configured physical record width of the associated device. If you do not use the

DEV=

parameter, the default is

DISC

with 1023 records.

For example, a fixed length ASCII file with a record size specified as 11 bytes has only 11 bytes available for data in each logical record. However, to determine actual block size, 12 bytes is used for the record size (block size = 12 bytes multiplied by the

blockfactor

). If the file is specified as a binary file, the 11 bytes are rounded up to 12 bytes (6 words), all of which are available for each logical record.

The number of logical records per physical block in a new file. The default is calculated by dividing the specified

recsize

into the configured block size; this value is rounded downward to an integer that is never less than 1. For variable length record files,

blockfactor

and

recsize

are used to calculate the maximum logical and physical record size. The

blockfactor

is then set to 1.

For files containing undefined length records, the

blockfactor

is ignored. The maximum size of

blockfactor

is 255.

For byte-stream files,

blockfactor

is set to 1.

F, U, V

Defines the length of the records of the file. A file may contain fixed length records (

), undefined length records (

), variable length records (

) or byte-stream format (

). For disk files, the default is

BINARY

ASCII

Indicates the type of records the file contains.

BINARY

indicates binary coded records and is the default.

ASCII

indicates ASCII coded records.

CCTL

NOCCTL

Indicates whether or not carriage control characters are supplied along with data written to an ASCII file.

CCTL

indicates carriage control characters accompany the data;

NOCCTL

indicates carriage control characters are not specified. The default is

NOCCTL

Chapter 2 113

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

TEMP

dsdevice device

Indicates that the file is created as a temporary file and is saved in the job/session temporary file domain when closed. The default is that a permanent file is created.

The device class name or logical device number used to open a communications link to a remote computer that contains the source file.

The default is the local system, or the computer on which the transfer request originates. A

symbol is a delimiter between the file name of the remote computer and the remote device file name.

Either the

devclass

ldev

on which the file is to reside. A device class name

(

devclass

), such as

DISC

consists of up to eight alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character. The

DEV=

parameter does not accept device names, volume classes, or volume names. When you specify

devclass

, the file is allocated to any available device in that class. If you are opening a file destined for a mountable volume, you must specify a device class that includes the drives upon which the home volume set is mounted.

The file is then allocated to any of the home volume set's volumes that fall within that device class.

The logical device number (

ldev

) consists of a one to three number specifying a particular device. Default is the device class name

DISC

filecode

A code indicating a specially formatted file. This code is recorded in the file label and is available to processes accessing the file through the

FFILEINFO

FGETINFO

intrinsic. Although any user can specify a positive integer ranging from 0 to 32,767 or a mnemonic name for this parameter, certain reserved integers and mnemonics have particular system defined meanings.

Default is the unreserved file code of 0.

Using

1090

(

LOG

) as your designated file code may not yield the number of records you specify in the

DISC=

parameter. Most files use the number of records specified in the

DISC=

parameter as the maximum limit; user logging uses this specified number as a minimum.

numrec numextents initialloc

The maximum number of logical records in a new file. The maximum for fixed length and undefined length records is 2,147,483,647. The default is

1023.

Maximum number of disk extents. You may specify a value of -1, or any number from 1 to 32. Default is 8.

Number of extents to be initially allocated to the file at the time that it is opened. If you specify -1 for this parameter, the default value is used.

RIO

NORIO RIO

creates a relative I/O file, which is a special file access method primarily used by COBOLII programs. You can, however, access these files from programs written in any language. Specifying

RIO

implicitly changes the record length parameter to

, or fixed length record. The default,

NORIO

, creates a nonrelative I/O file.

114 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

RIO

and

NORIO

specifications affect only the physical characteristics of the file. If

NOBUF

is specified in the

FILE

command, the file is not accessed in

RIO

mode; otherwise,

RIO

access is used with

RIO

files. Special operations on

RIO

files, such as replicating an

RIO

file, set

NOBUF

access. Refer to the

Accessing Files Programmer's Guide for a discussion of relative I/O.

STD

MSG

CIR

KSAMXL

SPOOL

Defines the type of file.

The default is

STD

(standard MPE/iX disk file). You do not need to specify

STD

; in fact, if you do specify it, you will see the error message

The STD keyword is not appropriate in the context of a BUILD command. (CIERR 216)

MSG

(message file) allows communication between any set of processes in a first in, first out (

FIFO

) manner. Records are read from the start of the file and are logically deleted and/or are appended to the end of the file.

CIR

(circular file) acts as a normal sequential file until full. When full, the first physical block is deleted when the next record is written, and remaining blocks are logically shifted to the front of the file. A circular file cannot be simultaneously accessed by readers and writers.

KSAMXL

specifies a native mode KSAM file (KSAM XL file).

SPOOL

specifies an unlinked output spool file. The default

outpri

on the spool file is 8; the default number of copies is 1. The unlinked output spool file must be created on a disk device. Specify the target printer device at

SPOOLF...;PRINT

time; if you do not, an error results.

The characteristics of a file created with the

SPOOL

keyword are:

• variable length records of 1008 bytes each

• a blocking factor of 1

• ASCII format

• permanent file

• record limit of 1023

• undefined maximum number of extents with 0 extents initially allocated

These characteristics override any other characteristics, such as binary format, which may be specified.

numlabels

The number of user label records to be created for the new file. Up to 255 labels can be specified. This parameter applies to any type of file.

^filereference or keyinfo filereference

is a file containing key information. This parameter only applies to new KSAM files; it is required for new KSAM files. The caret (^) indicates that the contents of the file will be used.

keyinfo

has the following format:

Chapter 2 115

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

keytype keylocation keysize

;KEY=

(

keytype,keylocation,keysize

[,DUP|RDUP];

keytype,keylocation,keysize

[,DUP|RDUP])

One key specification (

keytype, keylocation, keysize

[,DUP|RDUP] must be included for each key in the KSAM file. The first occurrence of the key specification describes the primary key; each subsequent key specification describes an alternate key. There may be up to 15 alternate key specifications in addition to the primary key description.

KSAM key type, specified as BYTE, INTEGER, REAL, IEEEREAL,

NUMERIC, PACKED, OR *PACKED. Specify the whole word or only the first letter; valid abbreviations are B, I, R, E, N, P, and *. If more than one letter is specified, the word must be spelled correctly.

Location of the first byte of the key within the data record counting from the first byte in the record. The first byte in the data record is always numbered 1. Only one key can start at the same location. This parameter applies only to KSAM files.

Length of the KSAM key in bytes. The length depends on

keytype

as follows:

BYTE 1 to 255 bytes

INTEGER 1 to 255 bytes

REAL 1 to 255 bytes

IEEEREAL 4, 8, or 16 bytes

NUMERIC 1 to 28 bytes

PACKED 1 to 14 bytes (odd number of digits)

*PACKED 2 to 14 bytes (even number of digits)

This parameter is required for all key types.

DUP OR RDUP

These two options apply only to KSAM files. The

DUP

option allows you to specify that duplicate key values are permitted. If

DUP

is not specified, records with duplicate key values are rejected and an error message is issued when such records are written to the file. When the

DUP

option is used, each new duplicate key is inserted at the end of the duplicate key chain. This maintains the chronological order of the duplicate keys.

The

RDUP

option specifies that duplicate keys are allowed and to be inserted randomly in the duplicate key chain. This method makes insertion of such keys faster, but does not maintain the chronological order of the duplicate key chain. The default is that duplicate keys are not allowed.

recnum

Determines whether record numbers in the new KSAM file are to start with zero or one. If the integer 1 is specified, records are numbered beginning with 1; otherwise, they start with 0. The only acceptable values for

recnum

are 1 and 0. This option can only be used for new KSAM files.

REUSE or NOREUSE

The

REUSE

option forces KSAM files to reuse deleted record space.

The

REUSE

option forces

RDUP

to be set to TRUE for all keys.

116 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

langid

If the

NOREUSE

option is used, deleted record space is not reused. If the

DUP

option is specified for a key, duplicate records are placed chronologically at the tail end of the file. The default is

NOREUSE

An integer number indicating the native language of the KSAM file to be built. The default is 0, or NATIVE-3000. The language must be currently configured on the system. See the Native Language documentation for more information.

langname

The name indicating the native language for the KSAM file to be built. The default language is NATIVE-3000. The language must be currently configured on the system. See the Native Language documentation for more information.

DEFBLK or OPTMBLK

These two options apply only to KSAM files. DEFBLK specifies that the data block size will be the default data block size of 4096 bytes.

OPTMBLK specifies that KSAMXL will select the optional data block size based on the record size. The default is DEFBLK.

NOTE

The file system uses the values specified on the

BUILD

command line to compute other characteristics of the file. Therefore, the values (or default values) may be valid within their respective fields, but may cause overflow errors in the computation of internally needed file specifications.

Operation Notes

This command builds a new file on disk. If it is an ASCII file, the initially allocated file space is initialized to blanks. If it is a binary file, the file space is initialized to zeros.

Unless the

TEMP

parameter is specified, the file is saved in the permanent file domain. To create a permanent file, you must have save file (SF) capability and SAVE access in the group to which the new file belongs. You can only build a file belonging to your logon account.

If specified, the

DEV=

parameter must be consistent with the group to which the new file belongs. If the group's home volume set is not mounted,

BUILD

implicitly generates a volume set reservation request. If the volume is not recognized by the system, the command fails. Refer to Volume Management Reference Manual.

The default characteristics of a file created with the

BUILD

command are: fixed length records of 128 words each, a blocking factor of 1, binary formatted, permanent file, a record limit of 1023, and a maximum of 8 extents with 0 extent initially allocated. This is equivalent to entering:

BUILD

filename

;REC=128,1,F,BINARY;DEV=DISC;DISC=1023,8,

Use

This command may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in break mode. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Chapter 2 117

Command Definitions A-B

BUILD

Examples

The following example creates a permanent disk file named

WORKFILE

, which can reside on any disk.

WORKFILE

has fixed length records of 80 bytes each. The records are blocked 3 records per block (which is the

blockfactor

), and are written in ASCII code. The file has a maximum capacity of 2000 records divided into 10 extents with 2 extents initially allocated.

BUILD WORKFILE;REC=-80,3,F,ASCII;DISC=2000,10,2

The following example uses the

CODE=

parameter to create a logging file called

NEWDATA

BUILD NEWDATA;DISC=3000,1,1;CODE=LOG

Related Information

Commands

COPY

LISTFILE

LISTF

LISTFTEMP

PURGE

RENAME

Manuals

MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual

118 Chapter 2

Command Definitions A-B

BYE

BYE

Ends an interactive session. (Native Mode)

Syntax

BYE

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

This command terminates a session and displays the CPU-time used (in seconds), connect-time (in minutes), and the date and time, as follows:

CPU=48. CONNECT=35. FRI, MAY 4, 1987, 10:56 PM

If you enter the

HELLO

command without logging off your current session, MPE/iX terminates your current session and immediately initiates a new one. If you are logged on to the computer with a telephone connection, and you hang up before terminating your session, MPE/iX issues a

BYE

command automatically.

If you enter the

BYE

command before initiating a session on the system, no system message is displayed.

Use

This command may be issued from a session. It may not be used from a job, program, or in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To terminate a session, enter:

BYE

Related Information

Commands

HELLO

Manuals None

Chapter 2 119

Command Definitions A-B

BYE

120 Chapter 2

Command Definitions C-E

Chapter 3 121

Command Definitions C-E

CALC

CALC

Evaluates an expression. (Native Mode)

Syntax

CALC

expression

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

expression

The expression to be evaluated.

Operation Notes

The

CALC

command evaluates

expression

and displays the result to

$STDLIST

. Expressions can yield integer, string, or Boolean results. Integer results are displayed in decimal, hexadecimal (

prefix), and octal (

prefix) notations. Boolean expressions are displayed as

TRUE or FALSE. The variable

HPRESULT

is set to the result of the last

expression

evaluated by

CALC

. The type of

HPRESULT

changes depending on the type of result generated by

CALC

Table 3-1 lists some of the logical operators for the CALC command. Enter :HELP expressions for more information

Table 3-1 Logical Operators - The CALC Command

Logical operators: AND, OR, XOR, NOT

Boolean functions and values: BOUND, TRUE, FALSE, ALPHA, ALPHANUM, NUMERIC,

ODD

Comparison operators:

Bit manipulation operators:

Arithmetic operators:

Functions returning strings:

=, <>, <, >, <=, >=

LSL, LSR, CSR, CSL, BAND, BOR, BXOR, BNOT

MOD, ABS, * , / , + , -, ^ (exponentiation)

CHR, DWNS, UPS, HEX, OCTAL, INPUT, LFT, RHT, RPT,

LTRIM, RTRIM, STR

Functions returning integers: ABS, LEN, MAX, MIN, ORD, POS, TYPEOF

Other functions: FINFO, SETVAR

The operands you may use are any variable, integer, string, Boolean constant, or the system-reserved words

WARN

FATAL

SYSTEM

, and

. You may form compound logical expressions using the AND, NOT, XOR, and OR logical operators, optionally nested within parentheses.

122 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CALC

Do not use the FINFO function with the

CALC

command for remote files. It ignores their existence and returns incorrect information.

Use

This command is available in a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

terminates the

INPUT( )

function.

Example

The result of

CALC sample

depends on the value entered for sample

and on the type of the value, as shown in Table 3-2

Table 3-2 Results of CALC

Type sample

5*10-7

LEN("abc")

UPS("Abc")

1=1

MAX(1,0,abs(-12),10)

Displayed (

HPRESULT

)

43, $2B, %53

3, $3, %3

ABC

TRUE

12, $c, %14

Integer

String

Boolean

Integer

Related Information

Commands

DELETEVAR

ELSEIF

SETJCW

SETVAR

SHOWJCW

SHOWVAR

WHILE

Manuals Appendix B, "Expression Evaluator Functions"

Command Interpreter Access and Variables Programmer's Guide

Chapter 3 123

Command Definitions C-E

CCXL

CCXL

Compiles an HP C/iX program. HP C/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer

System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP C/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

CCXL

[

textfile

] [ ,[

objectfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the text file that contains the source code to be compiled. This is an ASCII file that you prepare with an editor such as EDIT/3000. The formal file designator is

CCTEXT

objectfile

If you are running HP C/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, then the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

When

textfile

is your terminal, you can enter source code interactively.

When you have entered all the source code, type a colon (

) to end the interactive input.

Actual file designator of the object file to which the object code is stored.

This file is in binary form and has a file code of

1461

NMOBJ

. Its formal file designator is

CCOBJ

. If the

objectfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

If you specify

objectfile

, the compiler stores the object file in a permanent file of the correct size, type, and name you specified. If a file of the same name already exists, the object code overwrites that file.

If the compiler issues an error message telling you that a new or existing object file to which you are trying to compile is too small, build a larger object file and recompile to it.

You may use the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to store

$OLDPASS

as a permanent file under another name.

124 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CCXL

listfile quotedstring

NOTE

The name of the file on which the compiler writes the program listing. It can be any ASCII file. The default is

$STDLIST.$STDLIST

is usually the terminal from a session or the printer from a batch job. The formal file designator is

CCLIST

listfile

$NULL

or a file other than

$STDLIST

, the compiler displays on

$STDLIST

those lines that contain errors.

A string of no more than 1024 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it).

The

quotedstring

is used to pass initial compiler options to the compiler program. Options must be delimited by blank spaces.

The formal file designators used in this command (

CCTEXT

CCOBJ

, and

CCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list.

Operation Notes

The

CCXL

command compiles an HP C/iX program and stores the object code in a permanent file (

objectfile

) or in

$OLDPASS

if you do not specify an object file. If

textfile

is not specified, the compiler expects the source program to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, the compiler sends the program listing to your standard device and identifies it by the formal file designator

CCLIST

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HP PATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Chapter 3 125

Command Definitions C-E

CCXL

Examples

The following example compiles an HP C/iX program entered from your standard input device and stores the object program in the object file

$OLDPASS

. The listing is then sent to your standard list device.

CCXL

The next example compiles an HP C/iX program contained in the disk file

SOURCE

and stores the object program in the object file

OBJECT

. The program listing is stored in the disk file

LISTFILE

CCXL SOURCE,OBJECT,LISTFILE

Program development in native mode uses the MPE/iX

LINK

command, not the MPE V/E

PREP

command. This produces a significant change in the method of linking code. In

MPE/iX, you must compile the source files into separate object files and then use the Link

Editor to link the two object files into the program file, as in this example:

CCXL MAIN, OBJMAIN

CCXL SUB, OBJSUB

LINK FROM=OBJMAIN,OBJSUB;TO=SOMEPROG;RL=LIBCINIT.LIB.SYS

RUN SOMEPROG

Related Information

Commands

CCXLGO

CCXLLK

RUN

LINK

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP C Programmer's Guide

126 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CCXLGO

CCXLGO

Compiles, links, and executes an HP C/iX program. HP C/iX is not part of the HP 3000

Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP C/iX is installed on your system.

(Native Mode)

Syntax

CCXLGO

[

textfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the text file that contains the source code to be compiled. This is an ASCII file that you prepare with an editor such as EDIT/3000. The formal file designator is

CCTEXT

listfile quotedstring

If you are running HP C/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, then the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

When

textfile

is your terminal, you can enter source code interactively.

When you have entered all the source code, type a colon (

) to end interactive input.

The name of the file on which the compiler writes the program listing. It can be any ASCII file. The default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal from a session or the printer from a batch job. The formal file designator is

CCLIST

listfile

$NULL

or a file other than

$STDLIST

, the compiler displays on

$STDLIST

those lines that contain errors.

A quoted string of no more than 1024 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it).

The

quotedstring

is used to pass initial compiler options to the compiler.

Options must be delimited by blank spaces.

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

CCTEXT

and

CCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list.

Chapter 3 127

Command Definitions C-E

CCXLGO

Operation Notes

The

CCXLGO

command compiles, links, and executes an HP C/iX program. If

textfile

is omitted, the compiler expects input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, the compiler sends the program listing to the formal file designator

CCLIST

(default is

$STDLIST

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor purges the object file and writes the linked program to

$OLDPASS

, which is then executed and may be executed repeatedly.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile, link, and execute an HP C/iX program entered from your standard input device, with the program listing sent to your standard list device, enter:

CCXLGO

To compile, link, and execute an HP C/iX program from the disk file

SOURCE

and send the program listing to the file

LISTFILE

, enter:

CCXLGO SOURCE,LISTFILE

Related Information

Commands

CCXL

CCXLLK

RUN

LINK

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP C Programmer's Guide

128 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CCXLLK

CCXLLK

Compiles and links an HP C/iX program. HP C/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900

Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

This command is recognized only if HP C/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

CCXLLK

[

textfile

] [ ,[ [

progfile

] ] [ ,[

listfile

] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the text file that contains the source code to be compiled. This is an ASCII file that you prepare with an editor such as EDIT/3000. The formal file designator is

CCTEXT

progfile listfile quotedstring

If you are running HP C/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, then the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal. When

textfile

is your terminal, you can enter source code interactively. When you have entered all the source code, type a colon (

) to end the interactive input.

The name of the program file on which the MPE/iX linker writes the linked program. If you omit the

progfile

parameter, the program is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

The name of the file on which the compiler writes the program listing. It can be any ASCII file. The default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal from a session or the printer from a batch job. The formal file designator is

CCLIST

listfile

$NULL

or a file other than

$STDLIST

, the compiler displays on

$STDLIST

those lines that contain errors.

A string of no more than 1024 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it).

The

quotedstring

is used to pass initial compiler options to the compiler.

Options must be delimited by blank spaces. For a list of options, refer to the HP C/iX Reference Manual (31506-90005).

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

CCTEXT

and

CCLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list.

Chapter 3 129

Command Definitions C-E

CCXLLK

Operation Notes

The

CCXLLK

command compiles and links an HP C/iX program into a file on disk. If you do not specify

textfile

, the compiler expects input from the current input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, the compiler sends the listing output to the formal file designator

CCLIST

(default

$STDLIST

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. Link Editor overwrites

progfile

and writes the linked program to

$OLDPASS

, if

progfile

is omitted, which can then be executed.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

The following example compiles and links an HP C/iX program entered through your standard input device and stores the linked program in the file

$OLDPASS

. The listing is printed on your standard list device:

CCXLLK

To compile and link an HP C/iX source program from the source file

SOURCE

, store it in

PROG

, and send the listing to your standard list device, enter:

CCXLLK SOURCE,PROG

Related Information

Commands

CCXL

CCXLGO

RUN

LINK

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP C Programmer's Guide

HP C/iX Reference Manual

130 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CHANGELOG

CHANGELOG

Changes the user logging file without stopping or interrupting the logging process.

Syntax

CHANGELOG

logid

[ ;DEV=

device

]

Parameters

logid

Name of the currently active user logging process. This name may contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

device

Name of the device on which the new logging file is to be created. The device may be either

DISC

TAPE

. Default is

DISC

Operation Notes

This command permits the user to change the active logging file without stopping the logging process with the

LOG

logid

STOP

command. By specifying a device, you may switch the logging file from one device to another, regardless of the device on which the logging file was created. If you enable automatic logging with the

ALTLOG

GETLOG

command, however, the only device available for logging is the default,

DISC

If a log file is restricted to a single volume or volume class when it is created with the

BUILD

command, then successive log files created by User Logging will have the same restriction.

If the

CHANGELOG

command is valid, the system writes a changelog record to the end of the current logging file and closes the file. It then opens a new logging file whose characteristics are identical to those of the preceding file and makes the new file permanent. If the system is unable to open a new file of the same size, it tries to open a new file half the size of the old file. It repeats this process until a new file is opened successfully, or until the size is less than 256 records. In the second case, user logging terminates.

If the system opens a new log file, it immediately writes a changelog record to the new file.

The changelog record posted to the old logging file contains the fully qualified identifier of the new logging file. A corresponding changelog record written to the new file contains the fully qualified identifier of the old logging file. Changelog records also contain the device type of the logging file to which the changelog refers.

The following message is displayed on the

$STDLIST

to confirm a successful change:

Log file for logid AAA has been changed from

A001.PUB.SYS to A002.PUB.SYS (ulogmsg 38)

If the new logging file is a serial file, a message advising the operator to mount the new log file appears on the console:

Chapter 3 131

Command Definitions C-E

CHANGELOG

Mount new tape volume for changelog of logid AAA

(ulogmsg 40).

Normally when a user logging file is full, the system terminates the logging process and displays an appropriate message.

However, by specifying the

AUTO

parameter in a

GETLOG

ALTLOG

command, you enable an automatic

CHANGELOG

, thereby eliminating the need to issue the

CHANGELOG

command manually. Refer to the

ALTLOG

and

GETLOG

commands in this chapter.

To use

CHANGELOG

(manually or automatically), end the first user logging file name with the numeric characters 001 (for example,

fname001

). This establishes a naming convention that works in conjunction with the file set number to generate sequential file names independently. New file names consist of the file name root (

fname

) plus the next sequential increment of the last three digits:

Current File Next File

TEST001 TEST002

TEST002 TEST003

... ...

TEST998 TEST999

TEST999 TEST000

The logging process opens files, and automatically names them with the next sequential number, up to a maximum of 999. Thereafter, the numbering sequence resets to 000 and begins incrementing all over again.

Automatic logging with the

CHANGELOG

command is available only for disk files.

NOTE

The logging process specified by

logid

must be in an ACTIVE state. If the logging process is in any other state, such as RECOVERING, STOP,

INITIALIZING, or if the logging process has another

CHANGELOG

pending, the command terminates in an error state. The

ALTLOG

command permits changing the log file for an inactive logging process.

ALTLOG

, however, does not provide a way to link log files into a set.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

You must be the

logid

creator or have system manager (SM) or system supervisor (OP) capability to use the

CHANGELOG

command. User logging (LG) capability is also required.

Example

If you are running a logging process with a

logid

KATHY

, logging to logfile

KLOG001

, and you want to close the current logfile and log to a new logfile,

KLOG002

, without interrupting the logging process, enter:

CHANGELOG KATHY

132 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CHANGELOG

Related Information

Commands

ALTLOG

GETLOG

LISTLOG

LOG

OPENLOG

RELLOG

SHOWLOG

SHOWLOGSTATUS

Manuals

User Logging Programmer's Guide

Chapter 3 133

Command Definitions C-E

CHDIR

CHDIR

Changes the process' current working directory (CWD). (Native Mode)

Syntax

CHDIR

[ [ DIR=]

dir_name

] [ ;SHOW | NOSHOW]

Parameters

dir_name

The name of the directory you want to change to, which is assumed to be an MPE name unless you specify otherwise. To change to an HFS-named directory, begin

dir_name

with a dot (.) or a slash (/). The

dir_name

may not end in a slash, and using wildcards is not allowed.

SHOW

NOSHOW

This parameter is optional. If you omit

dir_name

CHDIR

switches you to your logon directory, which is your logon group in the form

/LOGON_ACCOUNT/LOGON_GROUP in all uppercase letters.

Displays the absolute pathname of the new directory on $STDLIST.

SHOW is the default.

Does not display the absolute pathname.

Operation

The

CHDIR

command changes the process' current working directory to

dir_name

or to the logon group, if you omit

dir_name

. You can change the CWD to any HFS directory if you precede

dir_name

with a dot (.) or a slash (/) or to an MPE account or group to which you have the appropriate permission.

Issuing the

CHDIR

command does not give users access to files in a directory (or group and account) that they would not otherwise have. That is, it has no affect on file access permissions.

The CWD is a process-local attribute, which means that

CHDIR

changes the CI's CWD for the life of that CI process or until another

CHDIR

command is issued. When

CHDIR

is executed programmatically from a child process of the CI (e.g.,

HPEDIT

), only that process'

CWD is changed; the CWD of the parent process (in this example, the CI) remains the same.

CHDIR

does not post any accounting information: Connect and CPU time are still accounted to the user's logon account and group.

HPCWD

is a read-only, CI string variable that contains the name of the current working directory in HFS syntax. At logon,

HPCWD

contains

/account_name/logon_group_name

. The

CHGROUP

command causes the

HPCWD

variable to be set to

/account/group_changed_to

The table on the next page summarizes the differences and similarities between the

CHDIR and

CHGROUP

commands.

134 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CHDIR

Affects

Accumulation of CPU and Connect times

Set of accessible files

CWD of process

HPCWD variable

Disk space accumulation

CHGROUP CHDIR

yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes no

Use

The

CHDIR

command may be invoked from a job, a session, a program, or in Break.

Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. You must have traverse directory entries

(TD) permission to each directory component in

dir_name

(refer to the

ALTSEC

command in this chapter for more information on directory permissions.) The CWD is not changed if the

CHDIR

command fails.

Examples

The following example shows the command entry to change to the directory dir1

in the

MYGRP

group in the

MYACCT

account.

CHDIR /MYACCT/MYGRP/dir1

The following example shows the command entry to change to the MPE group level

(

AGROUP

) in the

MYACCT

account.

CHDIR /MYACCT/AGROUP

The following example shows the command entry to change to a directory named

My_dir

In this example,

My_dir

is a relative pathname and it is subdirectory in the current working directory (CWD).

CHDIR ./My_dir

The following example shows the command entry to change to a directory named john

, in the group

JONES

, in the account

MYACCT

, by specifying the full pathname.

CHDIR /MYACCT/JONES/john

In the following example, a change is made to a directory named final

by specifying the relative pathname. The variable

HPCWD

displays the current working directory after the change is made.

CHDIR ./es/final

SHOWVAR HPCWD

HPCWD = /MYACCT/JONES/john/es/final

Chapter 3 135

Command Definitions C-E

CHDIR

Related Information

Commands

CHGROUP

FINDDIR

(UDC),

LISTFILE

LISTDIR

(UDC),

NEWDIR

PURGEDIR

Manuals

Performing System Management Tasks

136 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CHGROUP

CHGROUP

Switches you from the current group to another group within the logon account to which you are allowed access. (Native Mode)

Syntax

CHGROUP

[ [

groupname

] [ /

grouppass

] ]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

groupname

The name of the group to which the user is switched. If the parameter is omitted, the user is switched to the home group.

grouppass

The password of the group you are switching to, if it is assigned a password. In a session, if the target group has a password and you fail to supply one on the command line, MPE/iX will prompt you to enter one. You have three tries to enter the correct password before the command fails.

In a batch job, if the target group has a password and you fail to supply one, MPE/iX issues an error message "INCORRECT PASSWORD (CIERR

1441)" and the job fails.

In either case, when you switch to your home group, you may omit the password.

Operation Notes

This command changes the user's current group to

groupname

. The entire command interpreter environment is preserved (temporary files, file equations, cataloged UDCs, and variables). The user must know the password, if any, for

groupname

. In a session, if a password is associated with

groupname

, and the user fails to supply a

grouppass

, the system prompts the user to enter one. In a job, if a password is associated with

groupname

, and the user fails to supply a

grouppass

, the error message

INCORRECT PASSWORD (CIERR 1441) is issued and the job fails.

The

CHGROUP

and

CHDIR

commands both change their process' CWD. However,

CHDIR does not post any accounting information, and

CHGROUP

affects the CWD of every process in the job/session structure. Connect and CPU times are still accounted to the user's logon account and logon group.

Use

This command is available in a session or a job, but not in BREAK or from a program. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Chapter 3 137

Command Definitions C-E

CHGROUP

Examples

To switch the user from the current group to the group called

GORODA

, enter:

CHGROUP GORODA

To switch the user from the current group to the group called

GORODA

, with the assigned password

MUSASHI

, enter:

CHGROUP GORODA/MUSASHI

To switch the user from the current group to the user's home group, enter:

CHGROUP

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

CHDIR

HELLO

None

138 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XL

COB74XL

Compiles an HP COBOL II/iX program using the 1974 ANSI standard entry point and creates an object file. HP COBOL II/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer

System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

COB74XL [

textfule

]

[,[

objectfile

][ ,[

listfile

][,[

masterfile

][,

newfile

]]]]

[;INFO=

quotedstring

][ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

[ ;XDB=

xdbfilename

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the file that contains the source code that is to be compiled.

This can be any ASCII or toolset access method (TSAM) file that you prepare with an editor such as EDIT/V. The formal file designator is

COBTEXT

objectfile

If you are running HP COBOL II/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

Actual file designator of the object file, which is the output of the compiler.

This file is stored in binary form and has a file code of either

NMOBJ

(

1461

) or

NMRL

(

1033

). Its formal file designator is

COBOBJ

. If the

objectfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

, if it exists, or to

$NEWPASS

, which then becomes

$OLDPASS

If you specify

objectfile

, the compiler stores the object file in a permanent file of the correct size, type, and name you specified.

If either a file of the same name or the default file

$OLDPASS

already exists, the new object code overwrites the old if the file code is

NMOBJ

or is appended to the old if the file code is

NMRL

. If the file code is

NMRL

, any existing version of the code module is first purged.

Chapter 3 139

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XL

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

The functionality of NMRLS closely maps to the MPE/V USLS. Refer to the HP COBOL/XL Programmer's Guide (31500-90002) for information on the

RLINIT

and

RLFILE

commands that cause creation of an

NMRL

by default or initialization.

The compiler may issue an error message telling you that a new or existing object file is too small to contain the compiler's output or number of modules. In that case you must build a larger file or use the Link Editor to clean the

NMRL

. You may then recompile to the new file.

You may use the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to store

$OLDPASS

as a permanent file under another name.

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

COBLIST

. If you do not specify

listfile

, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Actual file designator of the master file with which

textfile

is merged to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and the

masterfile

. This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

A quoted string of no more than 255 characters, including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it, that specifies compile time options.

The

quotedstring

string may be used to pass dollar sign (

) commands to the compiler:

"$command1$command2$command3..."

. The

must be the first character in the string, and it must be used to separate multiple commands. To extend the

quotedstring

string over more than one physical line make an ampersand (

) the last character of one line and continue the

quotedstring

string onto the next physical line. Each

command is limited in length to the same size as in the source file:

COB74XL SALARIES,SALPRG;INFO="$CONTROL &

BOUNDS,MAP,VERBS$SET&$X9=ON"&

COB74XL ACCOUNTS;INFO="$DEFINE %A=5#"

workspacename

Actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace. The formal designator is

COBWKSP

xdbfilename

Actual file designator for the file to be used by the symbolic debugger

(XDB). This is a permanent file created by the compiler that contains the listing of the source files. The formal file designator is

COBXDB

If this file exists, then it must be in a special format created by a previous compile using this option. In this case, it is first purged. If the file is of the wrong type, the compile is not attempted. The user must either use a different name or purge the file.

140 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XL

Once the file is created, XDB expects the fully qualified name of the file to be unchanged. A

FILE

equation could be used if the file is renamed.

Operation Notes

The

COB74XL

command compiles an HP COBOL II/iX program into an object file on disk.

If you do not specify

textfile

, HP COBOL II/iX expects your input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP COBOL II/iX sends the program listing to the current list device.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBOBJ

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

NOTE

This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH

variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile an HP COBOL II/iX program stored in the file

SOURCE

into an object file called

OBJECT

, and send the listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

COB74XL SOURCE,OBJECT,LISTFL

Chapter 3 141

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XL

Program development in native mode uses the MPE/iX

LINK

command, not the MPE V/E

PREP

command. This produces a significant change in the method of compiling code. For example, if you have created a program called

MAIN

and a subprogram called

SUB

, each contained in a separate file, you might choose to append the code from

SUB

SOMEUSL

MPE V/E, like this:

COBOLII MAIN, SOMEUSL

COBOLII SUB, SOMEUSL

PREP SOMEUSL, SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

However, the

LINK

command (in MPE/iX native mode) does not append

SUB

. On MPE/iX, you must compile the source files into separate object files and then use the Link Editor to link the two object files into the program file, as in this example:

COB74XL MAIN, OBJMAIN

COB74XL SUB, OBJSUB

LINK FROM=OBJMAIN,OBJSUB;TO=SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

On the other hand, if an

NMRL

is used instead of an

NMOBJ

, the above can be simplified to the following:

BUILD RLFILE;DISC=10000;CODE=NMRL

COB74XL MAIN, RLFILE

COB74XL SUB, RLFILE

LINK RLFILE,SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

Related Information

Commands

COB74XLG

COB74XLK

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

HP COBOL II/XL Programmer's Guide

HP Link Editor/iX Reference Manual

142 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XLG

COB74XLG

Compiles, links, and executes an HP COBOL II/iX program using the ANSI 1974 standard entry point. HP COBOL II/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System

Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

COB85XLG[

textfile

]

[ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ] ]

[ ;INFO=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

[ ;XDB=

xdbfilename

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the file that contains the source file that is to be compiled.

This can be any ASCII or toolset access method (TSAM) file. The formal file designator is

COBTEXT

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

If you are running HP COBOL II/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

COBLIST

. If you do not specify

listfile

, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Actual file designator of the master file which is merged against

textfile

to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any

ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

A quoted string of no more than 255 characters, including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it, that specifies compile time options.

The

quotedstring

string may be used to pass dollar sign (

) commands to the compiler:

"$command1$command2$command3..."

. The

must be the first character in the string, and it must be used to separate multiple commands. To extend the

quotedstring

string over more than one physical

Chapter 3 143

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XLG

line make an ampersand (

) the last character of one line and continue the

quotedstring

string onto the next physical line. Each

command is limited in length to the same size as in the source file:

COB74XLG SALARIES;INFO="$CONTROL &

BOUNDS,MAP,VERBS$SET&$X9=ON" &

COB74XLG ACCOUNTS;INFO="$DEFINE %A=5#"

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace.

The formal file designator created by the compiler is

COBWKSP

xdbfilename

Actual file designator for the file to be used by the symbolic debugger

(XDB). This is a permanent file created by the compiler that contains the listing of the source files. The formal file designator is

COBXDB

Once the file is created, XDB expects the fully qualified name of the file to be unchanged. A

FILE

equation could be used if the file is renamed.

Operation Notes

The

COB74XLG

command compiles, links, and executes a program using the ANSI 1974 standard entry point. If you do not specify

textfile

, HP COBOL II/iX expects the source program to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP

COBOL II/iX sends the output to your standard list device.

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor purges the object file and writes the linked program to

$OLDPASS

, which is then executed and may be executed repeatedly.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBOBJ

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

144 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XLG

Examples

To compile, link, and execute an HP COBOL II/iX program entered from your standard input device and send the program listing to your standard list device, enter:

COB74XLG

To compile, link, and execute an HP COBOL II/iX program from the disk file

TEXTFL

and send the program listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

COB74XLG TEXTFL,LISTFL

Related Information

Commands

COB74XL

COB74XLK

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

HP COBOL II/XL Programmer's Guide

HP Link Editor/iX Reference Manual

Chapter 3 145

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XLK

COB74XLK

Compiles and links an HP COBOL II/iX program using the 1974 ANSI standard entry point. HP COBOL II/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System

Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

COB74XLk[

textfile

]

[ ,[

progfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ] ]

[ ;INFO=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

[ ;XDB=

xdbfilename

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the file that contains the source code that is to be compiled.

This can be any ASCII or toolset access method (TSAM) file. The formal file designator is

COBTEXT

progfile listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

If you are running HP COBOL II/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

The name of the object file to which the Link Editor writes the linked program. If you do not specify

progfile

, the default is

$NEWPASS

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

COBLIST

. If you do not specify

listfile

, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Actual file designator of the file which is merged against

textfile

to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

, if

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the file created by merging

textfile

and

masterfile

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

Default is that no file is written.

A string of no more than 255 characters, including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it, that specifies compile time options.

The

quotedstring

string may be used to pass dollar sign (

) commands to the compiler:

"$command1$command2$command3..."

. The

must be the first character in the string, and it must be used to separate multiple

146 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XLK

commands. To extend the

quotedstring

string over more than one physical line, make an ampersand (

) the last character of one line and continue the

quotedstring

string onto the next physical line.

Each

command is limited in length to the same size as in the source file:

COB74XLK SALARIES,SALPRG;INFO="$CONTROL &

BOUNDS,MAP,VERBS$SET&$X9=ON" &

COB74XLK ACCOUNTS;INFO="$DEFINE %A=5#"

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace.

The formal file designator created by the compiler is

COBWKSP

xdbfilename

Actual file designator for the file to be used by XDB. This is a permanent file created by the compiler that contains the listing of the source files. The formal file designator is

COBXDB

If this file exists, then it must be in a special format created by a previous compile using this option. In this case it is first purged. If the file is of the wrong type, the compile is not attempted. The user must either use a different name or purge the file.

Once the file is created, XDB expects the fully qualified name of the file to be unchanged. A

FILE

equation could be used if the file is renamed.

Operation Notes

The

COB74XLK

command compiles and links an HP COBOL II/iX program into a disk file.

If you do not specify

textfile

, HP COBOL II/iX expects your input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP COBOL II/iX sends the listing output to your current list device.

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor overwrites

progfile

which can then be executed.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Chapter 3 147

Command Definitions C-E

COB74XLK

Examples

To compile and link an HP COBOL II/iX program entered from your standard input device with the listing printed on the standard list device, enter:

COB74XLK

To compile and link an HP COBOL II/iX source program input from the text file

SFILE into a program file named

MYPROG

, with the resulting listing sent to the current list device, enter:

COB74XLK SFILE,MYPROG

Related Information

Commands

COB74XL

COB74XLG

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

HP COBOL II/XL Programmer's Guide

HP Link Editor/iX Reference Manual

148 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XL

COB85XL

Compiles an HP COBOL II/iX program using the 1985 ANSI standard entry point and creates an object file. HP COBOL II/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer

System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

COB85XL[

textfile

]

[ ,[

progfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ] ]

[ ;INFO=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

[ ;XDB=

xdbfilename

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the file that contains the source code that is to be compiled.

This can be any ASCII or toolset access method (TSAM) file. The formal file designator is

COBTEXT

objectfile

If you are running HP COBOL II/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

Actual file designator of the object file, which is the output of the compiler.

This file is stored in binary form and has a file code of either

NMOBJ

(

1461

) or

NMRL

(

1033

). Its formal file designator is

COBOBJ

. If the

objectfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

if it exists, or to

$NEWPASS

which then becomes

$OLDPASS

If you specify

objectfile

, the compiler stores the object file in a permanent file of the correct size, type, and name you specified.

If either a file of the same name or the default file

$OLDPASS

already exists, the new object code overwrites the old if the file code is

NMOBJ

or is appended to the old if the file code is

NMRL

. If the file code is

NMRL

, any existing version of the code module is first purged.

Chapter 3 149

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XL

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

Refer to the HP COBOL/XL Programmer's Guide (31500-90002) for information on the

RLINIT

and

RLFILE

commands that cause creation of an

NMRL

by default or initialization.

NMRL

. You may then recompile to the new file.

You may use the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to store

$OLDPASS

as a permanent file under another name.

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

COBLIST

. If you do not specify

listfile

, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Actual file designator of the master file with which

textfile

is merged to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any

ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

A quoted string of no more than 255 characters, including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it, that specifies compile time options.

The

quotedstring

string may be used to pass dollar sign (

) commands to the compiler:

"$command1$command2$command3..."

. The

must be the first character in the string, and it must be used to separate multiple commands. To extend the

quotedstring

string over more than one physical line make an ampersand (

) the last character of one line and continue the

quotedstring

string onto the next physical line. Each

command is limited in length to the same size as in the source file:

COB85XL SALARIES,SALOBJ;INFO="$CONTROL &

BOUNDS,MAP,VERBS$SET &$X9=ON" &

COB85XL ACCOUNTS;INFO="$DEFINE %A=5#"

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace.

The formal file designator is

COBWKSP

xdbfilename

Actual file designator for the file to be used by the symbolic debugger

(XDB). This is a permanent file created by the compiler that contains the listing of the source files. The formal file designator is

COBXDB

Once the file is created, XDB expects the fully qualified name of the file to be unchanged. A

FILE

equation could be used if the file is renamed.

150 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XL

Operation Notes

The

COB85XL

command compiles an HP COBOL II/iX program into an object file on disk.

If you do not specify

textfile

, HP COBOL II/iX expects the source text to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP COBOL II/iX sends the program listing to the current list device.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBOBJ

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile an HP COBOL II/iX program stored in the file

SOURCE

into an object file called

OBJECT

, and send the listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

COB85XL SOURCE,OBJECT,LISTFL

Program development in native mode uses the MPE/iX

LINK

command not the MPE V/E

PREP

command. This produces a significant change in the method of compiling code. For example, if you have created a program called

MAIN

and a subprogram called

SUB

, each contained in a separate file, you might append the code from

SUB

SOMEUSL

in MPE V/E, like this:

COBOLII MAIN, SOMEUSL

COBOLII SUB, SOMEUSL

PREP SOMEUSL, SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

When using

NMOBJ

, however, the

COB85XL

command (in MPE/iX native mode) does not append

SUB

. MPE/iX compiles the source files into separate object files and then uses the

Link Editor to link the two object files into the program file, as in this example:

COB85XL MAIN, OBJMAIN

COB85XL SUB, OBJSUB

LINK FROM=OBJMAIN,OBJSUB;TP=SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

On the other hand, if an

NMRL

is used instead of an

NMOBJ

, the above can be simplified to the following:

Chapter 3 151

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XL

BUILD RLFILE;DISC=10000;CODE=NMRL

COB85XL MAIN, RLFILE

COB85XL SUB, RLFILE

LINK RLFILE, SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

COB85XLG

COB85XLK

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

HP COBOL II/XL Programmer's Guide

HP Link Editor/iX Reference Manual

152 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XLG

COB85XLG

Compiles, links, and executes an HP COBOL II/iX program using the ANSI 1985 standard entry point. HP COBOL II/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System

Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode )

Syntax

COB85XLG[

textfile

]

[ ,[

progfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ] ]

[ ;INFO=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

[ ;XDB=

xdbfilename

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the file that contains the source file that is to be compiled.

This can be any ASCII or toolset access method (TSAM) file. The formal file designator is

COBTEXT

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

If you are running HP COBOL II/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

COBLIST

. If you do not specify

listfile

, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Actual file designator of the master file which is merged against

textfile

to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any

ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

A string of no more than 255 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it).

The

quotedstring

string may be used to pass dollar sign (

) commands to the compiler:

"$command1$command2$command3..."

. The

must be the first character in the string, and it must be used to separate multiple commands. To extend the

quotedstring

string over more than one physical

Chapter 3 153

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XLG

line, make an ampersand (

) the last character of one line and continue the

quotedstring

string onto the next physical line. Each

command is limited in length to the same size as in the source file:

COB85XLG SALARIES;INFO="$CONTROL &

BOUNDS,MAP,VERBS$SET&$X9=ON"

COB85XLG ACCOUNTS;INFO="$DEFINE %A=5#"

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace.

The formal file designator created by the compiler is

COBWKSP

xdbfilename

Actual file designator for the file to be used by the symbolic debugger

(XDB). This is a permanent file created by the compiler that contains the listing of the source files. The formal file designator is

COBXDB

Once the file is created, XDB expects the fully qualified name of the file to be unchanged. A

FILE

equation could be used if the file is renamed.

Operation Notes

The

COB85XLG

command compiles, links, and executes a program using the ANSI 1985 standard entry point. If you do not specify

textfile

, HP COBOL II/iX expects the source program to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP

COBOL II/iX sends the output to your standard list device.

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor purges the object file and writes the linked program to

$OLDPASS

, which is then executed and may be executed repeatedly.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBOBJ

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

154 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XLG

Examples

To compile, link, and execute an HP COBOL II/iX program entered from your standard input device and send the program listing to your standard list device, enter:

COB85XLG

To compile, link, and execute an HP COBOL II/iX program from the disk file

TEXTFL

and send the program listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

COB85XLG TEXTFL,LISTFL

Related Information

Commands

COB85XL

COB85XLK

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

HP COBOL II/XL Programmer's Guide

Chapter 3 155

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XLK

COB85XLK

Compiles and links an HP COBOL II/iX program using the 1985 ANSI standard entry point. HP COBOL II/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System

Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP COBOL II/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

COB85XLK[

textfile

]

[ ,[

progfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ] ]

[ ;INFO=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

] [ ;XDB=

xdbfilename

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

The name of the file that contains the source code that is to be compiled.

This can be any ASCII or toolset access method (TSAM) file. The formal file designator is

COBTEXT

progfile listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

If you are running HP COBOL II/iX from your terminal, you will probably specify a disk

textfile

. If you do not specify

textfile

, the default file is

$STDIN

is the current input device, usually your terminal.

The name of the object file to which the Link Editor writes the linked program. If you do not specify

progfile

, the default is

$NEWPASS

The name of the file to which the compiler writes the program listing. This can be any ASCII file. The formal file designator is

COBLIST

. If you do not specify

listfile

, the default is

$STDLIST

is usually the terminal in a session or the printer in a batch job.

Actual file designator of the file which is merged against

textfile

to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the file created by merging

textfile

and

masterfile

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

Default is that no file is written.

A quoted string of no more than 255 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it).

The

quotedstring

string may be used to pass dollar sign (

) commands to the compiler:

"$command1$command2$command3..."

. The

must be the first character in the string, and it must be used to separate multiple

156 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XLK

commands. To extend the

quotedstring

string over more than one physical line, make an ampersand (

) the last character of one line and continue the

quotedstring

string onto the next physical line.

Each

command is limited in length to the same size as in the source file:

COB85XLK SALARIES,SALPRG;INFO="$CONTROL &

BOUNDS,MAP,VERBS$SET&$X9=ON"

COB85XLK ACCOUNTS;INFO="$DEFINE %A=5#"

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace.

The formal file designator is

COBWKSP

xdbfilename

Actual file designator for the file to be used by the symbolic debugger

(XDB). This is a permanent file created by the compiler that contains the listing of the source files. The formal file designator is

COBXDB

Once the file is created, XDB expects the fully qualified name of the file to be unchanged. A

FILE

equation could be used if the file is renamed.

Operation Notes

The

COB85XLK

command compiles and links an HP COBOL II/iX program into a disk file.

If you do not specify

textfile

, HP COBOL II/iX expects your input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP COBOL II/iX sends the listing output to your current list device.

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor overwrites

progfile

which can then be executed.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBOBJ

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Chapter 3 157

Command Definitions C-E

COB85XLK

Examples

To compile and link an HP COBOL II/iX program entered from your standard input device, with the listing printed on the standard list device, enter:

COB85XLK

To compile and link an HP COBOL II/iX source program input from the text file

SFILE into a program file named

MYPROG

, with the listing sent to the current list device, enter:

COB85XLK SFILE,MYPROG

Related Information

Commands

COB85XL

COB85XLG

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

HP COBOL II/XL Programmer's Guide

158 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLII

COBOLII

Compiles a compatibility mode COBOLII program on the COBOL 74 compiler. COBOLII is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. The native mode equivalent of this command is

COB74XL

For information on the 85 entry point, refer to the HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

(31500-90001)

Syntax

COBOLII[

textfile

]

[ ,[

uslfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ] ]

[ ;INFO=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

Parameters

textfile uslfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

Actual file designator of the user subprogram library (USL) on which the object program is written. This can be any binary output file with a file code of

USL

1024

. Its formal file designator is

COBUSL

. If the

uslfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

. If this parameter is entered, it indicates that the file was created in one of four ways:

• By using the

SAVE

command to save the default USL file created during a previous compilation.

• By building the USL with the segmenter command

-BUILDUSL

. Refer to the MPE Segmenter Reference Manual (30000-90011).

• By creating a new USL file with the MPE/iX

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

USL

1024

• By specifying a nonexistent

uslfile

parameter, thereby creating a permanent file of the correct size and type.

Chapter 3 159

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLII

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

Actual file designator of the master file with which

textfile

is merged to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any

ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

A sequence of ASCII characters bounded by a pair of single quotation marks (apostrophes) or by double quotation marks. You may use the delimiting character as part of the string so long as it appears twice. Any occurrence of two single quotes in a row or two double quotes in a row, is considered part of the string, and, therefore, not the terminating delimiter.

INFO=

quotedstring

is used in the COBOLII programming language to pass compiler options to a program. These options appear before the first line of source code in the text file.

workspacename

Actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace. The formal designator is

COBWKSP

Operation Notes

The

COBOLII

command compiles a compatibility mode COBOLII program into a USL file on disk. If you do not specify

textfile

, COBOLII expects the source text to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, COBOLII sends the program listing to the current list device.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Example

To compile a COBOLII program stored in the file

SOURCE

into an object program on the

USL file

OBJECT

and send the listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

BUILD OBJECT;CODE=USL

COBOLII SOURCE,OBJECT,LISTFL

160 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLII

Related Information

Commands

COBOLIIGO

COBOLIIPREP

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

Chapter 3 161

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLIIGO

COBOLIIGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode COBOLII program on the COBOL

74 compiler. COBOLII is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System

Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. The native mode equivalent of this command is

COB74XLG

For information on the 85 entry point, refer to the HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

Syntax

COBOLIIGO[

textfile

] [ ,[[

listfile

][,[

masterfile

][ ,

newfile

]]]

[;INFO=

quotedstring

][ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

Actual file designator of the file on which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

Actual file designator of the master file which is merged against

textfile

to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and the

masterfile

. This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

A sequence of ASCII characters bounded by a pair of single quotation marks (apostrophes) or by double quotation marks. You may use the delimiting character as part of the string so long as it appears twice. Any occurrence of two single or two double quotation marks in a row, is considered part of the string, and, therefore, not the terminating delimiter.

INFO=

quotedstring

is used in the COBOLII programming language to pass compiler options to a program. These options appear before the first line of source code in the text file.

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace.

The formal file designator created by the compiler is

COBWKSP

162 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLIIGO

Operation Notes

The

COBOLIIGO

command compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode program using the COBOL 74 compiler. If you do not specify

textfile

, COBOLII expects the source program to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

COBOLII sends the output to your standard list device.

The USL file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$OLDPASS

, which is passed directly to the MPE segmenter. The segmenter purges the USL file and writes the prepared program to

$OLDPASS

, which is then executed and may be executed repeatedly.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

COBWKSP

, and

COBXDB

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It is not available in BREAK.

Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile, prepare, and execute a compatibility mode COBOLII program entered from your standard input device and send the program listing to your standard list device, enter:

COBOLIIGO

To compile, prepare, and execute a COBOLII program from the disk file

TEXTFL

and send the program listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

COBOLIIGO TEXTFL,LISTFL

Related Information

Commands

COBOLII

COBOLIIPREP

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP COBOL II/XL Reference Manual

Chapter 3 163

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLIIPREP

COBOLIIPREP

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode COBOLII program on the COBOL 74 compiler. COBOLII is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental

Operating Software and must be purchased separately. The native mode equivalent of this command is

COB74XLK

For information on the 85 entry point, refer to the COBOL/II 3000 Reference Manual

Syntax

COBOLIIPREP[

textfile

]

[ ,]

progfile

] ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,

newfile

] ] ]

[ ;INFOR=

quotedstring

] [ ;WKSP=

workspacename

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

progfile

Actual file designator of the program file to which the prepared program segments are written. If

progfile

is omitted, the MPE segmenter creates the program file, which resides in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

. If entered,

progfile

indicates that the file was created in one of two ways:

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

• By specifying a file code of

1029

PROG

, and a

numextents

value of 1.

This file is then used by the

PREP

command.

• By specifying a nonexistent file in the

progfile

parameter. A temporary job file of the correct size and type is created.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

Actual file designator of the file which is merged against

textfile

to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

COBMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the file created by merging

textfile

and

masterfile

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

COBNEW

Default is that no file is written.

A sequence of ASCII characters bounded by a pair of single quotation marks (apostrophes) or by double quotation marks. You may use the delimiting character as part of the string so long as it appears twice. Any occurrence of two single or double quotation marks in a row is considered part of the string, and, therefore, not the terminating delimiter.

164 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COBOLIIPREP

INFO=

quotedstring

is used in the COBOLII programming language to pass compiler options to a program. These options appear before the first line of source code in the text file.

workspacename

This parameter is the actual file designator of an HPToolset workspace used with HPToolset. The formal file designator created by the compiler is

COBWKSP

Operation Notes

The

COBOLIIPREP

command compiles and prepares a compatibility mode COBOLII program into a program file on disk. If you do not specify

textfile

, COBOLII expects your input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, COBOLII sends the listing output to your current list device.

The USL file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$OLDPASS

, which is passed directly to the MPE segmenter. The segmenter overwrites the USL file and writes the prepared program to

$OLDPASS

, if

progfile

is omitted, which can then be executed.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

COBTEXT

COBLIST

COBMAST

COBNEW

, and

COBWKSP

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for

Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It is not available in BREAK.

Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile and prepare a COBOLII program entered from your standard input device

(

$STDIN

), with the listing printed on the standard list device (

$STDLIST

), enter:

COBOLIIPREP

To compile and prepare a COBOLII source program input from the text file

SFILE

into a program file named

MYPROG

, with the listing sent to the current list device, enter:

COBOLIIPREP SFILE,MYPROG

Related Information

Commands

COBOLII

COBOLIIGO

Manuals HP COBOL II Reference Manual (31500-90001)

Chapter 3 165

Command Definitions C-E

COMMENT

COMMENT

Inserts a comment into a command stream or user command. (Native Mode)

Syntax

COMMENT [

text

] or

# [

text

]

Parameters

text

Information composed of the comment text. If the last nonblank character is an ampersand (

), comment text is continued onto the next line. Default is that a record containing only the string

"COMMENT"

is inserted in the command stream.

Operation Notes

The

COMMENT

command allows you to include an explanation about the purpose of commands or the logic used in creating the job. It also is used to create job headings. After the

COMMENT

command is entered, it can be followed by a message made up of any ASCII characters. If # format of a comment is used the # must be the 1st non-blank character in the command line

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

The following is an example of a job heading using a comment:

!JOB USER.TECHPUBS

!COMMENT THIS IS A SAMPLE JOB

!FORTGO MYPROG

!EOJ

Related Information

Commands

JOB

UDCs

, command files

Manuals None

166 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CONSOLE

CONSOLE

Changes the system console from its current device to another job-accepting terminal.

Syntax

CONSOLE

[

ldev

]

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the new console terminal. If omitted, the

CONSOLE

command displays the current logical device number of the console.

Operation Notes

The

CONSOLE

command is used to display the logical device number of the terminal currently being used as the system console, or to move the console to another logical device. Listing the current location of the console requires no special capabilities. Moving the console requires system manager (SM) capability.

The console cannot be moved to a terminal using a multipoint terminal software (MTS) line, or a packet assembly and disassembly (PAD) terminal over a modem.

When you switch the location of the console with the

CONSOLE

command, a message is printed on the former console and on the new console displaying the new logical device number of the system console. The old console is now just another session device and all the console capabilities are transferred to the newly designated terminal.

When you enter the

CONSOLE

command without parameters, it reports the current logical device number (LDEV) of the console. You may also find out the LDEV of the current console by interrogating the

HPCONSOLE

variable. To do so, enter the command

SHOWVAR

HPCONSOLE

at the colon prompt. Note, however, that Control and maintenance processor

(CMP) and diagnostic control unit (DCU) prompts and messages remain with the configured terminal, for example, Channel 1, Device 0. This feature cannot be moved to another terminal.

NOTE

Before transferring the system console to another terminal, be sure that you can take the console back when you need it by allowing yourself the

=CONSOLE

command. (

ALLOW

user.account;commands

=CONSOLE

). Users assigned system manager (SM) capability can retrieve the console without having been allowed the use of the

CONSOLE

command.

Since the system console is a session device, a session must be logged on to the console in order to execute operator commands.

Chapter 3 167

Command Definitions C-E

CONSOLE

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be used by any user to determine the location of the console. To change the location of the console, this command must be issued from the console itself, unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command, or the user must have system manager (SM) capability.

Examples

To determine the current location of the system console, enter:

CONSOLE

CONSOLE IS CURRENTLY ASSIGNED TO LDEV 20

To transfer the console to the terminal identified by MPE/iX as logical device 31, enter:

CONSOLE 31

CONSOLE HAS BEEN SWITCHED FROM LDEV 20 TO LDEV 31

168 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

CONTINUE

CONTINUE

Overrides a job error so that the job or user command (command file or UDC) continues executing. (Native Mode)

Syntax

CONTINUE

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

The

CONTINUE

command permits a job or session to continue even though the command immediately following the

CONTINUE

command results in an error (with an accompanying error message). It is not needed in a session, because sessions do not terminate when a command error occurs. The

CONTINUE

command is typically used in the line preceding any command suspected of causing the job or user command to abort. If an error occurs, the job or user command continues to run, and the error message is reported. The variable

CIERROR

contains the error number.

The

CONTINUE

command protects only the next command. However, if the next command is a user command (command file or UDC) and an error occurs anywhere within it, execution resumes at the command following the user command. In effect, the

CONTINUE command treats a user command as a simple, indivisible command.

You may use the

HPAUTOCONT

variable to produce a global "continue." Refer to appendix A,

"Predefined Variables in MPE/iX."

Use

This command may be issued in a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

If you anticipate a possible error resulting from the command

RUN MYPROG

, and wish to override this error and allow the job to continue executing, enter:

!JOB USER.PUBS

!CONTINUE

!RUN MYPROG

!IF JCW <= WARN THEN

! RUN MYPROG2

!ENDIF

!EOJ

Chapter 3 169

Command Definitions C-E

CONTINUE

Related Information

Commands

JOB

Manuals Appendix A, "Predefined Variables in MPE/iX"

170 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COPY

COPY

Copies one file to another by creating a new file or by overwriting an existing file.

The

COPY

command can be used to copy files to and from HFS directories. You cannot use

COPY

to copy directories to or from other directories. Users with SM capabilities are able to copy files to MPE accounts outside of their current logon account.

Syntax

COPY

[ FROM=]

sourcefile

[ { ;TO= | , | blank }

targetfile

] [ ASK | YES | NO ]

Parameters

sourcefile

The name of the file that is to be copied.

targetfile

A file with HFS syntax must begin with a dot (.), or a slash (/).

You may not specify system-wide ($ prefix), CM KSAM, or privileged files as

sourcefile

targetfile

The name of the file to which

sourcefile

is to be copied. If

targetfile

is omitted, the source file is copied to

sourcefile

in the user's current working directory

(CWD). You may qualify

targetfile

with both file and group name, or specify only the destination

group

or specify only the destination directory. To specifiy a group name as the target use

.groupname

. If only

group

is specified,

COPY

copies the source file to a file named

sourcefile targetfile

Likewise if only a directory is specified, COPY copies the source file to a file named

targetfile/sourcefile

NOTE

Since

.groupname

can be specified as the

targetfile

, and HFS file names can also start with a dot (.), this could lead to confusion as to whether an MPE group or HFS file name is desired for the

targetfile

. If the

targetfile

is an HFS filename starting with a dot (.), then the

targetfile

must be preceded with a dot and slash (./). For example, to represent a

targetfile

.FOO

in an HFS current working directory, the file must be represented as

./.FOO

NOTE

ASK

If the target file is a directory name it may end in a slash (/) to improve readability of copy in scripts.

The

max extent

value for

targetfile

value may not be the same as for

sourcefile

targetfile

already exists,

COPY

prompts the user to choose an action with the following prompt:

PURGE OLD

targetfile

Valid replies to this prompt are:

YES

Instructs

COPY

to purge the original

targetfile

and create a new

targetfile

Chapter 3 171

Command Definitions C-E

COPY

YES

Instructs

COPY

to terminate.

ASK

is the default, except in a job or in other cases when the user is not using interactive mode. In such cases,

ASK

has no meaning, and

YES becomes the default.

Instructs

COPY

to purge

targetfile

if it already exists. No message is displayed for the user, as would be the case with

ASK

YES

is the default in jobs, or at other times when the user is not using an interactive mode.

Instructs

COPY

to terminate if

targetfile

already exists.

Operation Notes

This command performs a fast copy of

sourcefile

targetfile

and leaves

sourcefile

unchanged.

Both files must be nonspooled disk files residing on the host system. You may specify files that are backreferenced with a file equation (

). However, this command only supports three file equation options: the file name, the final disposition (

;TEMP

;SAVE

), and the disk volume or volume class (

;DEV= DISC

;DEV=<DISC LDEV NUMBER>

). All other file equation options are ignored.

The file disposition of

targetfile

defaults to that of

sourcefile

. For example, if

sourcefile

TEMP

targetfile

is created

TEMP

. If

sourcefile

PERM

targetfile

is created as

PERM

. This file disposition can be overridden by using a file equation since this is one of the three options supported for file equations.

All file access attributes of the source file, including ACDs (access control definitions) are duplicated for the target file.

If a source file has an ACD, the ACD is copied to the target file. If a file does not have an

ACD, and it is copied outside an MPE group, it is automatically assigned an ACD.

Use

This command may be invoked from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command and purges the

targetfile

The

COPY

command can be invoked in BREAK and does not suffer from process creation overhead.

Examples

To copy

ABCD.

logongroup

EFG.

logongroup

, enter:

COPY ABCD, EFG

To copy

ABCD.

logongroup

ABCD.

newgroup

, enter:

COPY ABCD, .

newgroup

To copy

ABCD.

grp

ABCD.

logongroup

, enter:

COPY ABCD.

grp

172 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

COPY

In the next example the file

MYFILE.PUB.SYS

is copied to

MyFile

under the current working directory (CWD). Note that the target file name has to have the dot and slash (./) prefix.

COPY myfile.pub.sys, ./MyFile

In the next example, the file

File1

under the CWD is copied to

MYFILE.PUB

in the current account.

COPY ./File1, myfile.pub

In this next example, file1

in directory dir0

is copied to file2

in directory dir1

COPY ./dir0/file1, ./dir1/file2

In the following example, the file

TEST

has a lockword which is the word LOCK. The file is copied into file1

in the dir0

directory.

COPY TEST/LOCK, ./dir0/file1

The next example copies the file FILE1 to the directory dir1

COPY FILE1 ./dir1/

The next example copies the file file1 to the directory DIR1.

COPY ./file1 DIR1

Related Information

Commands

FCOPY

Manuals

Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Fundamental Skills

Chapter 3 173

Command Definitions C-E

DATA

DATA

Enters data into the system from a device file. (Cannot be used to enter data from

$STDIN

.) (Native Mode)

Syntax

DATA

[

jsname

username

[ /

userpass

] .

acctname

[ /

acctpass

] [ ;

filename

]

Parameters

jsname

Name of job or session that is to read data. Default is no job/session name.

It may contain up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter.

username userpass

User name that allows you to access MPE/iX in this account, as established by the account manager. It may contain up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter.

User password, optionally assigned by the account manager. It may contain up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter. If a password exists, but is not supplied in the command syntax, the

STREAM command will prompt you for it if:

acctname acctpass filename

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

DATA

command is a first level data command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

Account name under which job/session is running, as established by the system manager. It may contain up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter.

Account password, optionally assigned by system manager. It may contain up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter. If a password exists, but is not supplied in the command syntax, the

STREAM

command will prompt you for it if:

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

DATA

command is a first level data command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

Optional name for the data, used to distinguish between two separate data files that are to be read by the same program. It may contain up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter. Default is that no distinguishing name is assigned.

174 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DATA

Operation Notes

This command identifies data to be read from a device file other than your standard job/session input device. It can be used, for example, to input a data file from a spooled input device for later use by an interactive session or a batch job. The

DATA

command is the only command that can be entered before a job or session is initiated. Files identified by

DATA

may be input only from magnetic tape on spooled tape drives or with the

STREAM command.

To designate a set of data as an auxiliary file for your job or session, enter the

DATA command followed by the set of data and the

EOD

command. To access the data, begin your job or session using the same identity

([

jsname

username

acctname

)

used in the

DATA command. If the

filename

parameter is omitted, several data files can be read from any job or session with the same identity.

When entered from magnetic tape, such data must reside in a file on a single tape volume, and the blocking factor must be 1. When the media containing the data file is placed on the tape drive and that device is placed online, MPE/iX reads the entire file. At that point, the job can access the data, which remains available until it is actually read. To submit data from a disk file, you must use the

STREAM

command.

The time-related parameters of the

STREAM

command may

not

be used when

STREAM

is used with the

DATA

command.

The

STREAM

command will prompt you for both user and account passwords if they exist and are not supplied in the

DATA

command if the following conditions are met:

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

DATA

command is a first level data command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

Use

This command may be issued from a session or job. Use the

STREAM

command to input a data file. This command cannot be used directly from

$STDIN

or from a program.

Chapter 3 175

Command Definitions C-E

DATA

Examples

A data file is created on disk, and the

STREAM

command is used to make the file available to your program.

To create the file

DATAFL

on disk, invoke a text editor (like

EDITOR

) and enter the data beginning with the

DATA

command and ending with the

EOD

command. For example:

EDITOR

/ADD

DATA SESSB,BROWN.ACCT1

EOD

/KEEP DATAFL,UNN

/EXIT

To stream the data file using the

STREAM

command, enter:

STREAM DATAFL

To log on to a session, using precisely the same identity that was used in the

DATA command, enter:

MPE XL:HELLO SESSB,BROWN.ACCT1

To enter a

FILE

command equating the formal file designator (used by the program) with the stream device (identified by the device class name

JOBTAPE

), enter:

FILE DATAFL;DEV=JOBTAPE

To run the program that requires the data, enter:

RUN PROGY

Once the data has been read, it is no longer available to the system. If another program requires this data, the data must be entered again with the

STREAM

command.

Related Information

Commands

EOD

STREAM

Manuals None

176 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DEALLOCATE

DEALLOCATE

Deallocates a program or procedure previously loaded into memory with the

ALLOCATE command.

Syntax

DEALLOCATE

[ PROGRAM | PROCEDURE ]

,name

Parameters

PROGRAM

The program file indicated by name is deallocated. Default.

PROCEDURE

name

The code segment containing the procedure specified by name in

SL.PUB.SYS

is deallocated.

The name of the program file or procedure to be deallocated.

Operation Notes

DEALLOCATE

immediately releases table entries belonging to a program file or procedure that has been allocated. If the program is currently executing, the command takes effect once the program or procedure is no longer in use.

You may use a comma (,), a semicolon (;), and an equal sign (=) as delimiters.

NOTE

NM and CM loader error messages are reported differently, allowing you to determine the system in which the error occurred.

NM Loader Error:

ErrMessage

(

LDERR

nnnn

)

CM Loader Error:

ErrMessage

(

LOAD ERR

nnnn

)

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. Any program for which a user has EXECUTE access can be deallocated. A user with system supervisor (OP) capability can deallocate any program.

Example

To deallocate a program file named

PROGEX

, enter:

DEALLOCATE PROGEX

DEALLOCATE

does not give back memory; it gives back table entries.

Related Information

Commands

ALLOCATE

Chapter 3 177

Command Definitions C-E

DEALLOCATE

Manuals

Introduction to MPE XL for MPE V Programmers

178 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DEBUG

DEBUG

Instructs MPE/iX to enter the system debugger. (Native Mode)

Syntax

DEBUG

[

commands

]

Parameters

commands

A series of system debugger commands to be executed before the debugger prompt is displayed. The string may be as many as 255 characters long.

There are no delimiters or keywords needed to pass these commands to the debugger. If the

CONTINUE

command is not part of the

commands

string, you are left in debug after the execution of those commands.

Operation Notes

The

DEBUG

command enters the system debugger. An optional parameter,

commands

, defines a string of system debugger commands that are executed when the debugger is invoked, but before the debugger prompt is displayed.

If the string contains commands that return the user to the command interpreter, those commands are executed. Any remaining commands are pushed onto a command stack.

Another invocation of the

DEBUG

command executes the commands saved on the stack. If you invoke

DEBUG X;Y;Z

and the command

returns control to the CI, then

DEBUG

A;B;C

executes the commands

A;B;C;Y;Z

Use

This command may be issued from a session, program, or in BREAK. It may not be issued from a job. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. Privileged mode (PM) capability is required to use this command.

Example

To produce a stack trace and return to the command interpreter:

DEBUG TRACE;C

DEBUG XL A.00.00

HPDEBUG Intrinsic at: a.006b4104 hxdebug+$130

PC=a.006b4104 hxdebug+$130

* 0) SP=40221c58 RP=a.006b8e7c exec_cmd+$73c

1) SP=40221ac8 RP=a.006ba41c try_exec_cmd+$ac

2) SP=40221a78 RP=a.006b8638 command_interpret+$274

3) SP=40221620 RP=a.006bae5c xeqcommand+$1d0

4) SP=40221210 RP=a.006b7604 ?xeqcommand+$8

export stub: 7d.000068dc main_ci+$94

5) SP=40221178 RP=7d.00007420 PROGRAM+$250

Chapter 3 179

Command Definitions C-E

DEBUG

6) SP=40221130 RP=7d.00000000

(end of NM stack)

Related Information

Commands

RESETDUMP

RUN

SETDUMP

Manuals

System Debug Reference Manual

180 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DELETESPOOLFILE

DELETESPOOLFILE

Deletes a spoolfile from disk.

Syntax

DELETESPOOLFILE

{ #O

nnn

nnn ldev

}

Parameters

nnn

The identification of a READY or ACTIVE output spoolfile.

nnn ldev

The identification of a READY, input spooled data file.

The logical device number on which the spoolfile is ACTIVE.

Operation Notes

Before deleting an ACTIVE spoolfile, first take the output device offline. This allows you time to enter the command and determine that the ACTIVE spoolfile corresponds to the correct output device. When MPE/iX returns the colon prompt (

), you know that the

DELETESPOOLFILE

command instruction has been sent to the spooler process. It is not executed, however, until the output device is put back online.

You may not use the

DELETESPOOLFILE

command on the following type of files:

• System-defined standard input spoolfiles (

$STDIN

). Delete them with the

ABORTJOB command.

• ACTIVE spoolfiles with data input, entered with the

STREAM

command. You may delete these only when they are READY. You may not delete these files when they are OPEN.

The

DELETESPOOLFILE

command deletes ACTIVE data input files that are submitted on a spooled device. It cannot delete such files while they are being streamed.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, program, or in BREAK. It may not be issued from a job. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. This command may be used only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

Example

To delete the ACTIVE spoolfile being printed on LDEV

, first take the printer offline. This generates a

NOT READY

message at the console, after which you may enter the

DELETESPOOLFILE

command, as shown below:

11:21/7/LDEV#6 NOT READY

DELETESPOOLFILE 6

Chapter 3 181

Command Definitions C-E

DELETESPOOLFILE

When you put the device back online, the trailer page is printed, and the file deleted. If you have suppressed header/trailer output with the

HEADOFF

command, no trailer is printed before the spoolfile is deleted. However, the printer skips to the top of the next physical page. If the device is a page printer, the default environment is reloaded.

Related Information

Commands

ALTSPOOLFILE

Manuals

Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual

182 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DELETEVAR

DELETEVAR

Deletes one or more MPE/iX variables. (Native Mode)

Syntax

DELETEVAR

varname

[ ,

varname

] ... [ ,

varname

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

varname

The name of the variable to be deleted.

Operation Notes

Deletes a specific MPE/iX variable, or all variables specified by a pattern. If you specify more than one

varname

, you must separate them with commas.

You may use the wildcard characters,

, and

[ ]

to specify a set or range of values.

Specifies zero or more alphanumeric characters, or the underbar character

(

). Used by itself, it specifies all possible combinations of such characters.

Used with other characters it indicates all the possible names that include the specified characters.

@ABC@

specifies all names that include

ABC anywhere in the name.

Specifies one numeric character.

A###@

specifies all names that begin with

followed by any three digits, followed by any combination of 0 to 251 alphanumeric (or underbar) characters.

Specifies one alphanumeric character.

A?#

specifies all three-character names that begin with

, followed by an alphanumeric, followed by a digit.

[ ]

Specifies a set or range of characters. The set may appear anywhere in the name. This range specification is not case sensitive and, therefore,

[A-K] is the same as

[a-k]

. If you specify a null set such as

[k-a]

, MPE/iX reports an error.

@[abc

]

@# =

All names containing

, or

and ending in a single digit.

[a-k]@ =

[n-a] =

All names that begin with any one of the letters

through

Is not valid and is flagged as an error.

Chapter 3 183

Command Definitions C-E

DELETEVAR

Use

This command is available in a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Examples

To delete two specific variables, enter:

DELETEVAR

firstvariable, secondvariable

To delete all variables beginning with a single alphabetic character and ending with the characters axval

, enter:

DELETEVAR ?axval

To delete all variables created by the user, enter:

DELETEVAR @

To delete a range of variables, for example, those that begin with the letters

, or

T followed by zero or more characters that end with the string module

. In the following example variables such as

PMODULE

QMODULE

RMODULE

SMODULE

TMODULE

, and

TIME_MODULE

are all deleted by entering:

DELETEVAR [P-T]@MODULE

MPE/iX predefined variables, which are listed in appendix A, cannot be deleted.

To delete all variables beginning in

and ending in two digits such as

TMP11

T25

TMP_237

but not

, enter:

DELETEVAR T@##

Related Information

Commands

SETJCW

SETVAR

SHOWJCW

SHOWVAR

Manuals

Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Advanced Skills

Appendix A, "Predefined Variables in MPE/iX"

184 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISALLOW

DISALLOW

Prohibits access to a specific operator command.

Syntax

DISALLOW FILE=formaldesignator[ ;SHOW]

DISALLOW] [

@.@ user.@ @.user user.acct

] ;COMMANDS=

command

[ ,

command

,...]

Parameters

SHOW

@.@

user

acct user.acct

command

Lists input lines on

$STDLIST

Prohibits access to all users whether logged on or not.

Prohibits access to a specific user in all accounts.

Prohibits access to all users in a specific account.

Prohibits access to a specific user in a specific account.

The names of those commands to which the user is prohibited access.

Operation Notes

The operator uses the

DISALLOW

command to prohibit a user from executing specific operator commands previously allowed with the

ALLOW

command. You can use the command in any of three ways:

• Direct mode, in which you enter specific user names and account and the list of prohibited commands directly at the console.

• Indirect mode, in which you use a text editor such as EDIT/3000 to create a file that contains the user name and account of those users who will be prohibited from executing certain operator commands, and a list of disallowed commands.

• Subsystem mode, in which you enter the

DISALLOW

command, press

Return

, and, at the

">" prompt, enter the user and account names and the list of prohibited commands.

See the "Examples" section for more information.

You may enter as many prohibited commands as you want, in any of the three modes.

However, in direct mode and subsystem mode,

DISALLOW

acts to prohibit the first nineteen commands and ignores any additional commands you may have specified. To disallow more than nineteen commands, create a file that contains the necessary information and specify it on the command line (i.e. "Indirect mode").

Chapter 3 185

Command Definitions C-E

DISALLOW

NOTE

Do NOT confuse

operator

commands with

console

commands. For a description of the difference between console and operator commands refer to the

ALLOW command. The commands which may be disallowed are the same as the commands which may be allowed. Refer to the

ALLOW

command for a list of commands which may be allowed.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

will terminate subsystem mode and produce an error message but has no effect on commands already entered in subsystem mode. This command may be used only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Examples

To prohibit the user

USER.TECH

from executing the

and

ABORTIO

commands, enter the following at the system console:

DISALLOW USER.TECH;COMMANDS=REPLY,ABORTIO

To use subsystem mode to prohibit the user

MGR.MANUALS

from executing the

BREAKJOB command, enter the following at the system console:

DISALLOW

>MGR.MANUALS;COMMANDS=BREAKJOB

>EXIT

To use indirect mode, you create a file with all of the necessary information, and then invoke the changes by specifying the file using the

FILE=

parameter of the

DISALLOW command.

EDITOR

HP32201A.07.17 EDIT 3000 TUE, MAY 29, 1987, 5:08 PM

/ADD

SUSAN.PAYROLL;COMMANDS=ALTJOB,ALTSPOOLFILE

JOHN.ACCTNG;COMMANDS=ALTSPOOLFILE,DELETESPOOLFILE

...

/KEEP COMNDTMP

DISALLOW FILE=COMNDTMP;SHOW

If you want MPE/iX to display each command line as it is executed from the file, inclue the

SHOW

parameter.

You may backreference the file with a file equation as follows:

FILE BACKF=COMNDTMP

DISALLOW FILE=*BACKF;SHOW

If the file has a lockword it may be inserted as follows:

DISALLOW FILE=COMNDTMP/LOCKWORD;SHOW

186 Chapter 3

Related Information

Commands

ALLOW

SHOWALLOW

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

Command Definitions C-E

DISALLOW

Chapter 3 187

Command Definitions C-E

DISASSOCIATE

DISASSOCIATE

Removes control of a device class from the user.

Syntax

DISASSOCIATE

devclass

Parameters

devclass

The name of a device class configured during SYSGEN.

Operation Notes

This command negates a previously issued

ASSOCIATE

command by removing control of a device class from a user. The command may be issued by the system operator or by the user. The user implicitly disassociates a device when logging off.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To terminate control of the device class

TAPE

, enter:

DISASSOCIATE TAPE

Related Information

Commands

ASSOCIATE

188 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISCRPS

DISCRPS

Enables or disables the rotational position sensing (RPS) feature on a specified logical device. It requires a special firmware upgrade CS-80 disk drives.

Syntax

DISCRPS

ldev

{ ,ENABLE [ { ,

value,value

} ] ,DISABLE }

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the specified CS-80 disk drive.

ENABLE

DISABLE

value

Enables rotational position sensing on the device.

Disables rotational position sensing on the device.

Allows the time-to-target and window size to be tuned, in hundreds of micro seconds. If you specify one value you must specify both values. The first is interpreted as the time-to-target value; the second is interpreted as the window size value. This parameter only works in conjunction with

ENABLE

(micro seconds)

Default time-to-target 90 (9000 )

window size 30 (3000 )

ONLY use this parameter if you have a clear understanding of its meaning and implications.

Operation Notes

The

DISCRPS

command allows you to enable or disable the rotational position sensing feature for CS-80 disk drives. With RPS enabled, the disk drive signals its availability to do an I/O only when it is a small rotational distance away from the target data. This improves system performance when more than one drive is connected to the same HP-IB channel.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be executed only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

commands.

Chapter 3 189

Command Definitions C-E

DISCRPS

Example

To enable the RPS feature on logical device 1 and display the status of the disk drive, enter:

DISCRPS 1,ENABLE

SHOWDEV 1

LDEV AVAIL OWNERSHIP VOID DEN ASSOCIATION

1 DISC (RPS) 50 FILES

To use the

value

parameter with

ENABLE

to set time-to-target and window size to the default values, enter:

DISCRPS

ldev

,ENABLE,90,30

Related Information

Commands

SHOWDEV

Manuals

CS/80 Instruction Set Programmers Manual

190 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISCUSE (UDC)

DISCUSE (UDC)

The

DISCUSE

UDC executes the

DISKUSE

command to display disk space usage, in sectors, for one or more directories or a directory tree. This UDC is provided for those who are used to spelling disk with a "c".

System-defined UDCs are not automatically available. Your System Manager must use the

SETCATALOG

command to make these UDCs available for your use. For example:

SETCATALOG HPPXUDC.PUB.SYS;SYSTEM

Syntax

DISCUSE

[ [ DIR=]

dir_name

] [ ;USENAME | ;TREE | ;NOTREE]

Parameters

Refer to the

DISKUSE

command for a complete explanation of the parameters used with the

DISCUSE

UDC. The following parameters are supported with the

DISCUSE

UDC.

dir_name

TREE

Directory name for which information is being listed (optional).

Causes all directories below and including

dir_name

to be reported.

NOTREE

USENAME

Causes

dir_name

only to be reported.

Causes

DISKUSE

to use

dir_name

name to decide whether or not to display multiple levels of directories.

Operation Notes

The

DISCUSE

UDC runs the

DISKUSE

command and reports disk space, in sectors, for a directory. Refer to the

DISKUSE

command for a complete explanation of the operation.

Use

This UDC may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in break mode. Pressing

Break

aborts execution.

Examples

The following example illustrates the use of the

DISCUSE

UDC. Note that a message is printed to remind you to use the

DISKUSE

command.

DISCUSE

Please use the DISKUSE command.

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY (CWD= /ACCT/GROUP/d0)

BELOW

2100 330 .

Chapter 3 191

Command Definitions C-E

DISCUSE (UDC)

Refer to the

DISKUSE

command later in this chapter for additional examples.

Related Information

Commands

DISKUSE

LISTFILE

REPORT

192 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISKUSE

DISKUSE

Displays disk space usage, in sectors, for one or more directories or a directory tree.

Syntax

DISKUSE

[ [ DIR=]

dir_name

] [ ; TREE | NOTREE | USENAME ]

Parameters

dir_name

Directory name for which information is being listed (optional). The

dir_name

is assumed to be an MPE syntax name. HFS-named directories may be shown if

dir_name

starts with a dot (.) or a slash (/). If

dir_name

is an

HFS name and ends in a slash, then all objects at all levels under and including

dir_name

are reported, unless the

NOTREE

option is specified. The use of wildcards is permitted. If

dir_name

is omitted, the process' current working directory (CWD) is assumed.

TREE

NOTREE

USENAME

Causes all directories below and including

dir_name

to be reported. The

dir_name

may or may not end in a slash (/), with no error or warning detected. Since the MPE naming convention does not support a trailing slash (/), the

TREE

option is the only way to report multi-level disk space usage for an MPE-named directory in a single command.

Causes

dir_name

only to be reported. If

dir_name

is an HFS name and ends in a slash (/), a warning tells you that

NOTREE

overrides the trailing slash

(/).

Causes

DISKUSE

to use

dir_name

name to decide whether or not to display multiple levels of directories. If

dir_name

is an HFS name and ends in a slash (/), then it and all directories under it are shown. If

dir_name

does not end in a slash (/), then only

dir_name

is reported. The

USENAME

parameter only applies to HFS-named directories and is ignored for MPE-named directories. The

USENAME

parameter is the default.

Operation

The

DISKUSE

command reports disk space, in sectors, for a directory. Disk space allocated to directories themselves (including accounts and MPE groups) is counted as part of the total number of sectors. The process' CWD is shown for all relative pathnames.

The number of components in the pathname controls the level of directories being reported. If a pathname has four components, for example,

/a/b/c/d

, then only directories with four or more components contribute to the output. This also applies to the use of wildcard component names. For example,

/@/@/@/@

only counts directories with at least four components in their pathname (absolute or relative, depending on how it was specified). MPE names follow the same formula:

@.@.@

reports only MPE-named directories one level below MPE groups. (

@.@

is the same since it is qualified with the logon account name.)

Chapter 3 193

Command Definitions C-E

DISKUSE

Use

You must have traverse directory entries (TD) and read directory entries (RD) permissions to each directory contributing to the reported totals. TD access is needed to each directory component named in

dir_name

. (Refer to the

ALTSEC

command in this chapter for additional information on directory permissions.)

Note that the MPE syntax cannot specify a

group.account

. MPE syntax only permits

dir.group.acct

dir

is a valid MPE name; that is, all uppercase alphanumeric. (If

group.account

were specified, it would be interpreted as a file called

group.account.logon_account

Directory errors can occur while

DISKUSE

is collecting file space information. For example, if you lack traverse directory entries (TD) access to one or more of the lower level directories, an error occurs.

;TREE

is specified, you will only be able to see directories that you have TD and RD access to.

DISKUSE

stops on the first error encountered. This may result in no data (other than a header) displayed, or in the case of wildcard names, some directories are seen (up to the directory where the error occurred). Even in the wildcard directory name case, once an error is encountered,

DISKUSE

terminates.

There are several ways to see all disk space used on the system:

• To show the disk space for every directory on the system, enter:

DISKUSE /

• To show only the total system disk space in one line, enter:

DISKUSE /;NOTREE

NOTREE option overrides directory name ending in "/". (CIWARN 9041)

• To display disk space used by all directories directly under the root, enter:

DISKUSE /@

194 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISKUSE

Examples

The illustration below shows a hierarchical directory structure, upon which all of the succeeding examples are based. Directory names are shown as the character d

plus a number (for example, d0

), and file names are shown as the character f

plus a number (for example f1

). For illustrative purposes, the

HPPROMPT

variable has been set to show the current working directory (HPCWD). For example:

:setvar hpprompt "hpcwd:"

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

Hierarchical Directory Structure

/ACCT/GROUP/d0 = CWD

-----------------|------------------------------

| |

d1 d2

| | | | d3 f1 f2 f3

---------|--------------

| | | |

d4 f4 f5 d5

| | d6 f6

|---------------------

--|----

| | |

-|- ---|-------|--------------------

| | | | | | | | | | | |

f11 f12 d8 f13 f14 f15 d9 f16 f17 f18 f19 f20

The example shown below illustrates the format of the

DISKUSE

output. In this example, the

TREE

option is implied by the trailing slash (/). The current working directory (CWD) relative display is shown as part of the header line. If the CWD name is long, it truncates with a dollar sign ($).

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:diskuse ./

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY (CWD= /ACCT/GROUP/d0)

BELOW

64 + 0 ./d1/

96 32 ./d2/d4/

64 0 ./d2/d5/d8/

128 64 ./d2/d5/

112 48 ./d2/d6/

448 + 240 ./d2/

208

0 ./d3/d7/d9/

144 ./d3/d7/

336 + 128 ./d3/

48 + 0 (files directly below specified directory)

960 240 ./ (64 +)

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

Each of the columns contains information about the directory.

DIRECTORY

(left-justified) Displays the selected directory name, in HFS-format. The directory pathname wraps around to the next line if it is longer than the field.

LEVEL BELOW

(right-justified) Shows the number of sectors allocated directly to all objects immediately under the named directory. The space used by the listed directory file (container) does not contribute to this number, nor does the space used by the objects under directories under the displayed

Chapter 3 195

Command Definitions C-E

DISKUSE

TREE directory. The sum of the number of sectors reported by the following command equals the number shown under the

LEVEL BELOW

column. The number in the

LEVEL BELOW

column is zero if the reported directory is empty.

LISTFILE

dir_name

/@,2;NOTREE

(right-justified) Displays the total number of sectors used by the directory listed. This includes space used by the directory itself, all files immediately under the directory, and space used by all subdirectory entries. The sum of the number of sectors seen in the following command equals the total number in the

TREE

column.

LISTFILE

dir_name

,2;TREE

The plus signs (+) shown in the TREE column refer to the directories that are one level below the target directory. When added, the sectors shown in this example equal 896. The last entry shows the total number of sectors (960) used by all subdirectories under the target directory (896) plus the sectors used by the target directory itself (64).

The next example illustrates the use of the

NOTREE

option. Only the directory name is displayed.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:diskuse /ACCT/GROUP/d0 ;notree

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY

BELOW

960 240 /ACCT/GROUP/d0/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

If the directory name parameter is omitted, the CWD is assumed, as seen in the following example:

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:diskuse

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY (CWD= /ACCT/GROUP/d0)

BELOW

960 240 ./

The next example illustrates the use of the

TREE

option. Information is reported for the

dir_name

(d3) and all directories below.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:diskuse ./d3/@ ;tree

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY (CWD= /ACCT/GROUP/d0)

BELOW

64 0 ./d3/d7/d9/

208 + 144 ./d3/d7/

208 ./d3/@

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

MPE syntax can also be used, as shown in the following example (note that the

dir_name

(MYDIR) is upshifted.) This example is not based on the directory structure shown.

DISKUSE mydir.group.acct

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY

BELOW

2100 330 /ACCT/GROUP/MYDIR

196 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISKUSE

NOTE

The output is presented in HFS syntax, even if the directory name is supplied in MPE syntax. If wildcards were used to specify the directory name in MPE syntax, then the final line of output is the user-supplied directory name

(upshifted) in MPE format.

Wildcards can be used to see a "horizontal cut" of disk s pace usage at an arbitrary directory depth. Wildcarding can be used in

TREE

and

NOTREE

output, as shown in the following examples.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:diskuse ./@

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY (CWD= /ACCT/GROUP/d0)

64 +

BELOW

0 ./d1/

448 + 240 ./d2/

336 + 128 ./d3/

848

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

./@

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:diskuse ./@/

SECTORS

TREE LEVEL DIRECTORY (CWD= /ACCT/GROUP/d0)

BELOW

64 + 0 ./d1/

96 32 ./d2/d4/

64 0 ./d2/d5/d8/

128 64 ./d2/d5/

112 48 ./d2/d6/

448 + 240 ./d2/

208

0 ./d3/d7/d9/

144 ./d3/d7/

336 + 128 ./d3/

848 ./@

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

The last line of output contains the directory name and the total number of sectors (under the

TREE

column). The final

TREE

number always equals the sum of all other

TREE numbers for directories with the same number of components as contained in the user-specified name that are designated with a plus sign (+) in the

TREE

column. For example, if you specified a pathname with three components, then the sum of the

TREE field for all directory names with exactly three components equals the final total value.

Related Information

Commands

LISTFILE

REPORT

Manuals None.

Chapter 3 197

Command Definitions C-E

DISMOUNT

DISMOUNT

Releases a volume set that was explicitly reserved by the user with a

MOUNT

VSRESERVE command. The equivalent native mode command is

VSRELEASE

. (Native Mode)

Syntax

DISMOUNT

[ { *

volumesetname

} ] [ .

groupname

[ .

acctname

] ]

Parameters

* or <blank> Specifies the home volume set for the group and account specified, or for the logon group and account if

groupname

groupname.acctname

is not specified.

volumesetname

An artificial component of a volume set name used to maintain backward compatibility with MPE V/E. The

volumesetname

can be a maximum of 8 characters.

groupname acctname

Used only for compatibility with MPE V/E. The

groupname

can be a maximum of 8 characters.

Used only for compatibility with MPE V/E. The

acctname

can be a maximum of 8 characters.

Operation Notes

The

DISMOUNT

command allows you to release a volume set that you explicitly reserved using the

MOUNT

VSRESERVE

command. You can request a release only for a volume set that you have reserved; you cannot alter the status of the volume set for other users.

Volume sets in MPE/iX are not tied to groups and accounts (this differs from the MPE V/E scheme of disk partitioning).

The naming convention for MPE/iX volume sets differs from the naming convention for

MPE V/E private volumes. MPE/iX volume set names may consist of any combination of alphanumeric characters, including the period (

) and the underbar (

). The name must begin with an alphabetic character and consist of no more than 32 characters.

Table 3-3 is a comparison of naming conventions between the MPE/iX VSxxxxxx and MPE

V/E xxxMOUNT commands

198 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DISMOUNT

Table 3-3 Command Acceptance of Naming Conventions - DISMOUNT Command

Specify MPE V/E xxxMOUNT Command Accesses

MPE/iX VSxxxxxx

Command Accesses

myset.grp.

acct myset

The volume set named myset.grp.acct

The volume set named myset

logongrp.logon acct

The volume set myset

*.grp.acct

The home volume set of the group grp

in account acct

Causes an error.

myset_grp_ acct m_g_a

Error (name component longer than eight characters).

The volume set named myset_grp_acct

The volume set named m_g_a.logongrp.logonacct,

provided it exists. If it does not exist, an error is reported.

The volume set named m_g_a

In MPE V/E, the name

V.G.A

indicates that

is the name of a volume set, that

is the name of a group, and that

is the name of an account.

MPE/iX accepts the

V.G.A.

name in that form, but no interpretation is made as to the referencing of

and

. Instead, MPE/iX treats

V.G.A

as a single, long string name, just as it would treat

A_VERY_LONG_NAME_FOR_SOMETHING

As a convenience to established HP users, MPE/iX accepts the naming convention that was used for MPE V/E private volumes.

DISMOUNT V.G.A

will succeed.

DISMOUNT V

will access the same volume set, provided you are logged on to account

, group

. The MPE

V/E commands are able to default the logon account and group.

However,

VSRELEASE V

succeeds only if a volume set

exists. The MPE/iX commands do not call up any default specifications for group and account.

VSRELEASE V.G.A

succeeds only if a volumeset

V.G.A

is on line. With all

VSxxxxxx

commands, the

.G.A

component of this name is interpreted as a string, neither more nor less specific than

_G _A

If a volume set is named according to the MPE V/E naming convention (

V.G.A

), you must use an unambiguous reference when using the MPE/iX volume set commands.

We recommend that you do no use the MPE V/E naming convention and the xxxMOUNT commands. Instead use the MPE/iX naming convention and the

VSxxxxxx

commands.

Alternating between MPE V/E and MPE/iX commands may lead to confusion and, in some cases, may lead to errors. For example,

MOUNT X

used in a job stream attempts to access a volume set named

X.logongrp.logonacct

, which may or may not be your intention.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. Use volumes (UV) or create volumes (CV) capability is required to use this command.

Chapter 3 199

Command Definitions C-E

DISMOUNT

Examples

To release the volume set

MYSET.B.C

, that was previously reserved with a

MOUNT

VSRESERVE

command, enter:

DISMOUNT MYSET.B.C

You may also use the

VSRELEASE

command:

VSRELEASE MYSET.B.C

Related Information

Commands

MOUNT

LMOUNT

DSTAT

VSRESERVE

VSRELEASE

Manuals

Volume Management Reference Manual

200 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DO

Allows the user to reexecute any command still retained in the command line history stack. It also permits the user to edit the command before reexecuting it, but without having to use the interactive mode of the

REDO

command. (Native Mode)

Syntax

[ CMD=

cmdid

] [ ;EDIT=

editstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

cmdid

The command to reexecute. The command may be specified by its relative or absolute order in the command line history stack, or by name (as a string), in whole or in part. The default is -1, the most recent command.

MPE/iX detects an error if

cmdid

does not exist in the command line history stack. Table 3-4 defines the

command directives.

Table 3-4 DO Command - Reexecute Directives

cmdid

(omitted)

n m string

Executes

Previous command.

The

th command before the most recent one, where

is a number in the command line stack relative to the most recent command, which is -1.

Command number

in the command line stack. The number

is absolute (not relative).

The most recent command beginning with

string

editstring

String specifying the edit to be performed on

cmdid

before it is reexecuted.

If you omit

editstring

, the command is reexecuted immediately, with no editing performed.

If you specify

editstring

, it must appear, character for character, and space for space, exactly as it would if you were using the

REDO

command in interactive mode.

The editing directives used in

editstring

are defined in Table 3-5

Chapter 3 201

Command Definitions C-E

Table 3-5 Editing Directives for the DO Command

Directive

i r d dw d d>

^> v

delim delim

Effect

INSERT

. If text follows the i

, the text following i

is inserted in the current line at the position after the i

REPLACE

. If text follows the r

, the text following r

replaces the same number of characters in the current line, beginning at the position of r

DELETE

. Deletes a character from the current line for each specified in the edit line.

Note that

"d d"

does not specify a range but simply deletes one character from the position above each d

. Multiple d

's may be followed by an insert or replace operation.

DELETE WORD

. Deletes a word starting at the letter d

. A word is defined as all characters except a space, comma, or semicolon. If you place the d

directly beneath a word delimiter, then the word and the delimiter characters are deleted. If no word exists on the command line, no delete occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DELETE TO DELIMITER

. Deletes all characters starting at the position of the d

and ending at, but not including, the specified delimiter. If

delim

is not found, no delete occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DELETE TO EOL

. Deletes to the end of the current line from the position specified by d>

. It may be followed by an

INSERT

REPLACE

operation.

UPSHIFT

. Upshifts the character positioned at the ^. You may specify multiple

^ characters to upshift a series of characters. Or, you may type multiple

characters, followed by spaces, then followed by more

's to upshift some characters while skipping others. You may follow this directive with other edits.

UPSHIFT WORD

. Upshifts the word starting at the position specified by

. A word is defined as all characters except a space, comma, or semicolon. If you place the

^ directly beneath a word delimiter, the delimiter is skipped and only the word is upshifted. If no word exists on the command line, no upshift occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

UPSHIFT TO DELIMITER

. Upshifts all characters starting at the position specified by the

and ending at, but not including, the specified delimiter. If

delim

is not found, no upshift occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

UPSHIFT TO EOL

. Upshifts all characters starting from the position specified by the

to the end of the current line. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DOWNSHIFT

. Downshifts the character positioned at the v

. You may specify multiple v

's to downshift a series of characters. Or, you may type multiple v

's, followed by spaces, then followed by more v

's to downshift some characters while skipping others. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DOWNSHIFT WORD

. Downshifts the word starting at the position specified by v

. A word is defined as all characters except a space, comma, or semicolon. If you place the v

directly beneath a word delimiter, the delimiter is skipped and only the word is downshifted. If no word exists on the command line, no downshift occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

202 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

Directive

delim

text

>dw

delim

>^w

delim

>vw

delim text

Effect

DOWNSHIFT TO DELIMITER

. Downshifts all characters starting at the position of the v

and ending at, but not including, the specified delimiter. If

delim

is not found, no downshift occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DOWNSHIFT TO EOL

. Downshifts all characters starting from the position specified by the v

to the end of the current line. You may follow this directive with other edits.

APPEND

. The

followed by text appends the text to the end of the current line. If

> is positioned beyond the end of the current line, then a replacement is performed instead.

DELETE FROM EOL

. Deletes from the end of the current line, right-to-left. Multiple d

's may be specified after

, as well as

INSERT

and

REPLACE

strings.

DELETE WORD FROM EOL

. Deletes the last word in the command line. To find the last word, trailing word delimiters are skipped. If no word exists in the command line, then none is deleted. If you follow

>dw

with additional editing directives, each edit is performed recursively. That is, the first edit is performed (updating the current EOL), then the next edit is performed (again updating the current EOL), and so on.

DELETE TO DELIMITER FROM EOL

. Starting at the end of the current line, deletes all characters right-to-left up to, but not including,

delim

. If the delimiter is not found, no delete occurs. If you follow this directive with additional editing directives, each edit is performed recursively. That is, the first edit is performed

(updating the current EOL), then the next edit is performed (again updating the current EOL), and so on.

UPSHIFT FROM EOL

. Upshifts the character at the current EOL. You may specify multiple

's to upshift a series of characters (read right-to-left) from the EOL. Also, you may follow this directive with other edits.

UPSHIFT WORD FROM EOL

. Upshifts the last word in the command line. You may follow this directive with other edits.

UPSHIFT TO DELIMITER FROM EOL

. Starting at the end of the current line, upshifts all characters right-to-left up to, but not including,

delim

. If the delimiter is not found, no upshift occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DOWNSHIFT FROM EOL

. Downshifts the character at the current EOL. You may specify multiple v

's to downshift a series of characters (read right-to-left) from the

EOL, and you may follow this directive with other edits.

DOWNSHIFT WORD FROM EOL

. Downshifts the last word in the command line. You may follow this directive with other edits.

DOWNSHIFT TO DELIMITER FROM EOL

. Starting at the end of the current line, downshifts all characters right-to-left up to, but not including,

delim

. If the delimiter is not found, no downshift occurs. You may follow this directive with other edits.

REPLACE

. Replaces characters at the end of the command line. The replacement is done so that the last (rightmost) character of the replacement string is at the end of the line.

Chapter 3 203

Command Definitions C-E

Directive

c u other

Effect

CHANGE

. Changes all occurrences of one string to another in the current line when the search string and replace string are properly delimited. A proper delimiter is a nonalphabetic character (such as ',

). The substitution is specified as: c

<delim> search-string<delim> [replace-string [<delim>]]. Omitting the

replace-string causes occurrences of search-string to be deleted, with no substitution.

UNDO

. A single u

in column one cancels the most recent edit of the current line.

Using the

UNDO

command twice in a row cancels all edits for the current line and reestablishes the original, unedited line. If u

is placed anywhere other than column one of the current line, then a simple replacement is performed.

UNDO

makes sense only if you have a line on which you have performed some editing that can be

"undone."

Simple replacement. Any other character (not i

, r

, d

, d>

, c

, or u

) causes that character to be replaced in the current line at the position indicated by the character. In fact, simple replacement also occurs for the editing characters i

, r

, c

, or

if they are not followed by text; or if

appears at or beyond the current end of line.

NOTE

A word is defined as a grouping of characters delimited by a space, comma, semicolon, =, (, ),

“

, ‘, tab.

Operation Notes

Reexecutes the command specified by

cmdid

. The user may specify an optional edit string to edit the command before it is reexecuted. This command is a companion to the enhanced

MPE/iX version of the

REDO

command. Unlike

REDO

, the

command does not permit interactive editing.

editstring

is specified, the edit is performed on

cmdid

before the command is reexecuted.

The

editstring

must appear exactly as it would if you were using the

REDO

command.

Both

cmdid

and

editstring

must be surrounded by quotation marks (either " or ') if they contain any delimiters such as

; " ' [, ], =,

or a space.

Use

This command is available in a session or in BREAK. It is not available in a job or from a program. Pressing

Break

terminates recursive command executions from the history/redo stack.

Editing Samples

Practical uses of the editing commands listed above are shown in Table 3-6.

204 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

Table 3-6 Editing Samples for the DO Command

Edit

rxyz

xyz

ixyz

ddd

d xyz

ddixyz

d d

d d>xyz

>xyz

>ddxyz

>rxyz

>ixyz

c/ab/def

c"ab"

cxyz dw

>dw

> w

Action

First occurrence undoes the previous edits. The u

must be in column one.

Second occurrence undoes all edits on the current line. The u

must be in column one.

Replaces the current text with xyz

starting at the position of r

Replaces the current text with xyz

starting at the position of x

Inserts xyz

into the current line, starting at the position immediately before the i

Deletes three characters, one above each d

Deletes a single character above the d

, skips one space, then replaces the current text with xyz

starting at the position of x

Deletes two characters, then inserts xyz

in the current line in the position before the i

Deletes one character above the first d

, skips two spaces and deletes a second character above the second d

. It does not delete a range of characters.

Deletes a single character above the first d

, skips two spaces and deletes to the end of the line beginning at the second d

, and then appends xyz

to the end of line.

Appends xyz

to the end of the current line.

Deletes the last two characters from the end of the current line and then appends xyz

to the end of the line.

Replaces the last three characters in the current line with xyz

Appends xyz

to the end of the line. In this case, the i

command is superfluous, because

accomplishes the same result. Using

>xyz

would be sufficient.

Changes all occurrences of ab

to def

, starting at c

Deletes all occurrences of

"ab"

starting at c

Replace the current text with cxyz

, starting at c

. Because delimiters have been specified (as they were in the previous two examples), this is a simple replacement.

delete the word starting at the d delete the last word upshift the word starting at the

downshift the last word

Chapter 3 205

Command Definitions C-E

Examples

DO PAS

DO 10

Reexecutes the most recent command beginning with the string

PAS

Reexecutes command number 10 (absolute) on the command history stack.

DO -2

Reexecutes the second-to-last command on the stack (one command before the most recent).

DO -2, c/5A/5B

Change all occurrences of

in the command preceding the most recent one before reexecuting it. The default is -1.

do ,c/5A/5B

Change all occurrences of

in the most recent command before reexecuting it.

DO RUN, ">;DEBUG"

Append

;DEBUG

to the most recent

RUN

command and then reexecute it.

DO 'RUN MYP', '>;LIB=G

' Find the most recent command beginning with

RUN MYP

and append

;LIB=G

before reexecuting it.

Related Information

Commands

REDO

LISTREDO

WORD

evaluator function

Manuals

Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Advanced Skills

206 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DOIONOW

DOIONOW

Executes the changes to the I/O configuration made with the SYSGEN utility, while the system remains online.

Syntax

DOIONOW

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

Use the

DOIONOW

command to start the online reconfiguration of your I/O devices.

Use

This command is available from a job, session, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

After you have made changes to the system I/O configuration with SYSGEN's I/O

Configurator, enter:

:DOIONOW

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

SYSGEN

Performing System Management Tasks System Startup, Configuration, and Shutdown

Chapter 3 207

Command Definitions C-E

DOWN

DOWN

Removes a device from normal system use. This command does not apply to the system console or to disk drives.

Syntax

DOWN

ldev

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the device being taken offline.

Operation Notes

When the

DOWN

command is issued for a device that is in use, the request is responded to when the process currently accessing it releases the device.

The system console cannot be taken down. Any attempt to do so results in the following error message:

DOWN NOT PERFORMED ON CONSOLE DEVICE (CIERR 3150)

CAUTION

When any device is powered down without the use of the

DOWN

command, subsequent access to that device can result in indefinite waiting, erroneous transfers, or other incorrect operation. Often these failures occur with no indication to the system operator or to the user. For this reason, it is very important that every device that is not fully operational (especially those that are powered down) be taken down with the

DOWN

command. A device that will be inoperable for more than a few hours can be temporarily removed from the

I/O configuration at system startup.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be used only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

Example

To take logical device number 7 offline, enter:

DOWN 7

To take logical device number 10 (an input-spooled, job-accepting magnetic tape) offline, enter:

DOWN 10

STOPSPOOL 10

11:16/31/SP#10/STOPPED

11:16/31/LDEV#10 NOT READY

208 Chapter 3

Related Information

Commands

SHOWDEV

ABORTIO

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

Command Definitions C-E

DOWN

Chapter 3 209

Command Definitions C-E

DOWNLOAD

DOWNLOAD

Downloads format information to a line printer.

Syntax

DOWNLOAD

ldev

[ ,

filename

,MARGIN=

] [ ,...]

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the output device. This device must be an HP

2608 or HP 2563 Line Printer.

filename nn

The fully qualified name of a file containing the download control information.

The print position that the first byte of data assumes. This number can be between 1 and 16, inclusive. Note that the HP 2608 hardware documentation discusses a margin offset which varies from 0-15. This offset is not relevant to the margin parameter of the

DOWNLOAD

command, as the software compensates for the hardware offset of

-1.

Operation Notes

The operator uses the

DOWNLOAD

command to transmit format information to system printers only. It cannot be used with remote printers.

The vertical format control (VFC) image file (

filename

) can define the margin setting as well as the VFC image on an HP 2608A or HP 2608S Line Printer. The number of print lines per form is limited to 127. Although the HP 2608S printer recognizes the

DOWNLOAD command, Hewlett-Packard recommends controlling the HP 2608S with an environment file rather than the

DOWNLOAD

command. You cannot download a VFC file to an HP 2631B printer, only the

MARGIN=

is allowed.

If the

MARGIN=

parameter is specified on an HP 2608A or HP 2608S, and a

MARGIN record has also been specified in the VFC file, the

MARGIN

record in the VFC file overrides the

MARGIN

parameter of the

DOWNLOAD

command. This parameter should only be used in cases where there is no

MARGIN

record in the VFC file.

When a particular print job has requirements for forms and/or a VFC file, the user indicates this need by way of a FORMS message. Refer to "Examples."

CAUTION

Do not issue a

DOWNLOAD

command to an HP 2608S while a spoolfile is

ACTIVE. This makes the device UNAVAILABLE, and it remains so until the system is restarted with a

START RECOVERY

210 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DOWNLOAD

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be issued only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

Examples

To respond to a forms message such as the following:

IO/15:46/22/FORMS: PLEASE MOUNT PAYCHECK FORMS. USE VFC=VFCPAY

IO/15:46/22/SP#11/LDEV# FOR #S93;OUTFILE ON HP 2608 (1) enter:

DOWNLOAD 11,VFCPAY

To reset the VFC to its original state, you must reference a file that contains default specifications (such as

VFC6

in this example) by entering:

DOWNLOAD 11,VFC6.PUB.SYS

To set the left margin print position to column 4 (the installation defined default) enter:

DOWNLOAD 11,MARGIN=4

Related Information

Commands

SHOWDEV

ABORTIO

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

Chapter 3 211

Command Definitions C-E

DSTAT

DSTAT

Displays the current status of the disk drives on the system. (Native Mode).

Syntax

DSTAT

[

ldev

ALL ]

Parameters

ldev

An integer specifying the logical device number of the disk drive whose status is requested.

ALL

Displays the status of all disk drives, both system and nonsystem. The default is that if no parameter is included, only the status of nonsystem disks is displayed.

Operation Notes

The

DSTAT

command is used to display the current status of one or more disk drives on the system. For example:

DSTAT ALL

LDEV-TYPE STATUS VOLUME (VOLUME SET-GEN)

1- 07935 MASTER MEMBER1 (MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET-0)

2- 07935 MEMBER MEMBER2 (MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET-0)

3- 07935 MEMBER MEMBER3 (MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET-0)

4- 07935 MEMBER MEMBER4 (MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET-0)

15- 07935 MASTER MEMBER1 (USER_VOLUME_SET-0)

16- 07935 MEMBER MEMBER2 (USER_VOLUME_SET-0)

17- 07935 UNKNOWN

Table 3-7 defines the various status responses.

Table 3-7 Disk Drive Status

Status

UNKNOWN

SCRATCH

Meaning

A volume in the

UNKNOWN

state does not have a label that the system can recognize. The volume may be from another system, it may be a new disk pack, or it may be a volume that has been formatted. An

UNKNOWN

volume is available for initialization.

A volume in the

SCRATCH

state can be initialized. It may contain data, but by scratching the volume, the user has indicated that the data is no longer needed.

212 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

DSTAT

Status

LONER

MASTER

MEMBER

Meaning

The volume is in the

LONER

state when its master is not mounted or when the volume set is closed by the

VSCLOSE

command.

A volume in this state is the master volume of a volume set. In order for the system to recognize the volume set, the master volume must be mounted.

A volume in this state belongs to a volume set whose master is mounted. If the master is not mounted, the volume is in the

LONER

state.

If you have purchased Mirrored Disk/XL, you may see

PENDING

DISABLED

as well.

PENDING

indicates the partner disk failed to mount;

DISABLED

indicates the volume is not abailable to the system due to a disk failure. If you have Mirrored Disk/XL you also may see the following suffixes in the status portion of the display:

-MD

-SU

-SB

Mirrored disk

Split user volume

Split backup volume

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To display the status of LDEV 1, enter:

:DSTAT 1

LDEV-TYPE STATUS VOLUME (VOLUME SET-GEN)

1- 079371 MASTER MEMBER1 (MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET-0)

Related Information

Commands

SYSGEN

LMOUNT

LDISMOUNT

MOUNT

DISMOUNT

VSRESERVE

VSRELEASE

, VOLUTIL Utility

Manuals

Volume Management Reference Manual

Chapter 3 213

Command Definitions C-E

ECHO

ECHO

Displays a message on the standard list device. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ECHO

[

message

]

Parameters

message

The message to be displayed to the

$STDLIST

Operation Notes

Displays its argument,

message

, on the standard list device (

$STDLIST

). The command ignores delimiters. Quotation marks are not required around

message

. The

ECHO

command does not perform dereferencing of any kind. If you want variable dereferencing you must use explicit dereferencing (

) in the argument. A null message (

Return

) displays a linefeed.

The

ECHO

command is not suppressed by

OPTION NOLIST

in a UDC or command file, or by any setting of the

HPMSGLEVEL

variable.

Use

This command is available in a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Examples

In the following example, although there is a variable named a

that has a string value,

ECHO

simply displays the character a

because no dereferencing has been specified.

SETVAR a, 'hi there'

ECHO a

This time

ECHO

is given the value of the variable a

argument. Explicit dereferencing has been specified and the dereferencing is done before

ECHO

is executed.

ECHO !a

hi there

Two exclamation points are resolved to one exclamation point by string substitution, and

MPE/iX is prohibited from making the value substitution (even number rule).

ECHO a

Triple (or any odd number of) exclamation points treat the argument as

, which resolves to

and

, giving

!hi there

(odd number rule).

214 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ECHO

ECHO !a

!hi there

If you entered the following command line in a user command, you would see a message when an error occurred:

IF CIERROR <> 0 THEN

ECHO ** A CIERROR OCCURRED!: (CIERR !CIERROR) **

The first instance of

CIERROR

has no dereferencing, and so

ECHO

treats it literally. The second instance,

!CIERROR

, contains explicit dereferencing, and so MPE/iX substitutes a value for the system variable

CIERROR

before the message is displayed to

$STDLIST

. So, for example, if the program generated error

975

, you would see this message:

** A CIERROR OCCURRED!: (CIERR 975) **

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

CALC

SET

SETVAR

COMMENT

TELL

WARN

Appendix A, "Predefined Variables in MPE/iX"

Chapter 3 215

Command Definitions C-E

EDITOR

EDITOR

Starts the EDIT/3000 subsystem, which is used to create and manipulate ASCII text or program files.

Syntax

EDITOR

[

listfile

]

Parameters

listfile

Actual file designator of file to receive any output resulting from

EDIT/3000

LIST

and

XPLAIN

commands when the

OFFLINE

option is specified. It can be any ASCII output file. The formal file designator and default is

EDTLIST

. If specified with no device parameter, default device is

You cannot backreference the formal file designator

EDTLIST

as an actual file designator in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

EDITOR

command starts the EDIT/3000 subsystem.

Use

This command may be issued from a session or job. It may not be used from a program unless the user or the program has process handling (PH) capability. It may not be used from BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Example

To run EDIT/3000 during a session and specify a line printer (device class

) as the list device for offline output, enter:

FILE LISTFILE;DEV=LP

EDITOR *LISTFILE

Because the

listfile

is often a line printer, it is often defined with the

FILE

command and backreferenced as in the preceding example.

Related Information

Commands

BUILD

LISTF

LISTFILE

LISTEQ

FILE

Manuals

EDIT/3000 Reference Manual

216 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ELSE

ELSE

Provides an alternate execution sequence within an IF statement. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ELSE

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

The

ELSE

command is used only in conjunction with the

and

ELSEIF

commands. The

command is used with the

ENDIF

command, and optionally with the

ELSE

command, to control the execution of a job. The

ENDIF

, and optional

ELSE

commands constitute an

IF block. A logical expression is evaluated, and if true, the IF block is executed; if false, the

ELSE block (if one exists) is executed.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

The following job listing illustrates using the

ELSE

command:

!CONTINUE

!PASXL MYPROG,MYUSL

!IF JCW>=FATAL THEN

! TELL USER.TECHPUBS;COMPILE FAILED

!ELSEIF JCW>=WARN THEN

! TELL USER.TECHPUBS;COMPILE COMPLETED WITH WARNINGS

!ELSE

! TELL USER.TECHPUBS;COMPILE COMPLETE WITH NO WARNINGS

!ENDIF

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

DELETEVAR

ELSEIF

ENDIF

SETJCW

SETVAR

SHOWJCW

SHOWVAR

None

Chapter 3 217

Command Definitions C-E

ELSEIF

ELSEIF

Provides an alternate execution sequence within an IF statement. Native Mode

Syntax

ELSEIF

expression

[ THEN]

Parameters

expression

Logical expression, consisting of operands and relational operators. The

THEN

keyword is optional. It may be used or omitted and has no effect on the results. The operators listed in Table 3-8 may be incorporated in

expression

Table 3-8 Logical Operators - The ELSEIF Command

Logical operators: AND, OR, XOR, NOT

Boolean functions and values: BOUND, TRUE, FALSE, ALPHA, ALPHANUM, NUMERIC,

ODD

Comparison operators:

Bit manipulation operators:

Arithmetic operators:

Functions returning strings:

=, <>, <, >, <=, >=

LSL, LSR, CSR, CSL, BAND, BOR, BXOR, BNOT

MOD, ABS, * , / , + , -, ^ (exponentiation)

CHR, DWNS, UPS, HEX, OCTAL, INPUT, LFT, RHT, RPT,

LTRIM, RTRIM, STR

Functions returning integers: ABS, LEN, MAX, MIN, ORD, POS, TYPEOF

Other functions: FINFO, SETVAR

Operation Notes

The

ELSEIF

command is used only in conjunction with the

command. The

ELSEIF command provides a way of avoiding nested IF statements.

ELSEIF

has meaning only when used after an IF construct.

Any number of

ELSEIF

commands may follow an

command. In contrast, only one

ELSE command may follow an

ELSEIF

command. Refer to the

ELSE

and

commands.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect unless expression contains the INPUT evaluator function.

218 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ELSEIF

Example

The following example illustrates using the

ELSE

command with the

command:

IF EXPN1 THEN

...

ELSE

IF EXPN2 THEN

...

ELSE

IF EXPN3 THEN

...

ELSE

...

ENDIF

The same result can be accomplished more efficiently by using the

ELSEIF

command:

IF EXPN1 THEN

...

ELSEIF EXPN2 THEN

...

ELSEIF EXPN3 THEN

...

ELSE

...

ENDIF

Notice that only one

ELSE

may follow an

ELSEIF

, while any number of

ELSEIF

commands may follow an

Related Information

Commands

CALC

DELETEVAR

ELSE

ENDIF

SETJCW

SETVAR

SHOWJCW

SHOWVAR

Manuals None

Chapter 3 219

Command Definitions C-E

ENDIF

ENDIF

Terminates an IF block. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ENDIF

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

The

ENDIF

command is used to terminate an IF block. The

command, the optional

ELSE and

ELSEIF

commands, and the

ENDIF

command constitute an IF block. A logical expression is evaluated, and if true, the IF block is executed; if false, the ELSE block (if one exists) is executed. If false and no

ELSE

exists, then execution continues following the

ENDIF

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

The following examples show the IF block ending with the

ENDIF

command:

logical_expression

ELSE

logical_expression

ENDIF

logical_expression

ELSEIF

logical_expression

ENDIF

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

ELSE

ELSEIF

None

220 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ENDWHILE

ENDWHILE

Terminates a WHILE block. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ENDWHILE

Parameters

None

Operation Notes

This command terminates a conditional block that begins with a

WHILE

command. The

WHILE

and

ENDWHILE

commands constitute a WHILE block. The

WHILE

command evaluates an expression, and so long as that expression evaluates as true, the command(s) between

WHILE

and

ENDWHILE

are executed. If the expression evaluates as false, execution of the WHILE block ceases and execution passes to the command following

ENDWHILE

Execution terminates if any command not protected by a preceding

CONTINUE

causes an error.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

terminates the

WHILE

command loop.

Example

The following is an example of a simple

WHILE

block:

WHILE

logical_expression

ENDWHILE

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

WHILE

None

Chapter 3 221

Command Definitions C-E

EOD

EOD

Denotes end-of-data on input stream from a job file (from an input other than

$STDIN

). It also terminates data initialized by the

DATA

command. The colon (

) is a required part of this command. (Native Mode)

Syntax

EOD

NOTE

The "&" symbol has no meaning to the input spooler when it reads records because the CI is not involved at that point.

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

The

EOD

command is used to signify the end of data whose beginning was signified by a

DATA

command. It is also used to signify the end of a data set that was read from the standard input device.

Although in most cases programmers use

EOD

for delimiting data, any record beginning with a colon may delimit the data. Using a record other than

EOD

for this purpose, however, depends upon whether the standard input file is opened with the file name

$STDIN

$STDINX

When using a compiler language that does not provide a convention for terminating compilation (such as

END.

in SPL), you must enter

EOD

after the last record of your source program to ensure proper delimiting of your input. (

EOD

is not required when using the

BASIC interpreter since the subsystem provides different conventions for delimiting data.)

EOD

causes the read of the

FREAD

intrinsic to return the CCG condition code to the calling program. This condition code indicates the end-of-file condition on the terminal.

Table 3-9 defines the various end-of-file indicators.

Table 3-9 End-of-File Indicators

Type of File

DATA

file from standard input device (for jobs and sessions)

DATA

files

Indicators

EOD

- terminates

$STDIN

and

$STDINX

. : followed by any other character - terminates

$STDIN

EOD

JOB

DATA

222 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

EOD

Use

EOD

is available only in a job or a session that is submitted with the

STREAM

command. It cannot be used directly from

$STDIN

or from a program.

Examples

To terminate a data file entered by using the

STREAM

command for a session identified as

SESS1,BLACK.ACCTSP

, your data file would contain

EOD

as its last record, as follows:

DATA SESS1,BLACK.ACCTSP

data

EOD

The following program is an example of how

EOD

is used to terminate a set of data entered through a standard input device:

FORTRAN

PAGE 0001 HP32102B.01.12 (C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1986

>$CONTROL USLINIT

> PROGRAM MONEY

> INTEGER QUARTERS,DIMES,NICKELS,PENNIES

> DISPLAY "INPUT MONEY AMOUNT IN DECIMAL FORM"

> ACCEPT DECIMALFORM

> CALL CHANGER(DECIMALFORM,QUARTERS,DIMES,NICKELS,PENNIES)

> DISPLAY QUARTERS," QUARTERS"

> DISPLAY DIMES," DIMES"

> DISPLAY NICKELS," NICKELS"

> DISPLAY PENNIES," PENNIES"

> STOP

> END

PROGRAM UNIT MONEY COMPILED

> SUBROUTINE CHANGER(DECIMALFORM,QUARTERS,DIMES,NICKELS,PENNIES

> INTEGER QUARTERS,DIMES,NICKELS,PENNIES

> DECIMALFORM = DECIMALFORM*100

> QUARTERS = DECIMALFORM/25

> REMAINDER = DECIMALFORM-(QUARTERS*25)

> DIMES=REMAINDER/10

> REMAINDER=REMAINDER-(DIMES*10)

> NICKELS=REMAINDER/5

> PENNIES=REMAINDER-(NICKELS*5)

> RETURN

> END

PROGRAM UNIT CHANGER COMPILED

> EOD

**** GLOBAL STATISTICS ****

**** NO ERRORS, NO WARNINGS ****

TOTAL COMPILATION TIME 0:00:01

TOTAL ELAPSED TIME 0:01:29

END OF COMPILE

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

DATA

None

Chapter 3 223

Command Definitions C-E

EOJ

EOJ

Ends a batch job. (Native Mode)

Syntax

EOJ

NOTE

The "&" symbol has no meaning to the input spooler when it reads records because the CI is not involved at that point.

Parameters

None.

Operation Notes

The

EOJ

command terminates a batch job and displays the CPU-time (in seconds) and the elapsed time since the beginning of the job (rounded to the nearest minute). MPE/iX also adds the central processor time and file space used by your job to the resource usage counters maintained for your logon account and group.

If you omit the

EOJ

command from a job, the next

JOB

command terminates the current job and starts a new one. The end of the first job is indicated by the standard end-of-job display, and the beginning of the next job is denoted by the normal job initiation display.

Use

This command may be issued from a job. It may not be used from a session, program, or in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

The following example shows how

EOJ

is used within a job file to terminate a batch job:

!JOB USER.PUBS

!RUN MYPROG1

!RUN MYPROG2

!EOJ

Related Information

Commands

JOB

Manuals

Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Advanced Skills

224 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ERRCLEAR

ERRCLEAR

Zeros out all HP predefined error-related variables. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ERRCLEAR

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

None

Operation Notes

This command is equivalent to the following:

•

SETVAR CIERROR 0

•

SETVAR HPCIERR 0

•

SETVAR HPCIERRCOL 0

•

SETVAR HPFSERR 0

Use

This command is available from a job or session. It is not available from a program or in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example errclear continue run database if hpcierr < 0 then echo database warning ![abs(hpcierr)] detected, proceeding...

elseif hpcierr > 0 then echo FATAL database error !hpcierr detected, halting...

escape endif

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

ESCAPE

RETURN

None

Chapter 3 225

Command Definitions C-E

ERRDUMP

ERRDUMP

Allows a user to dump either the process or system error stack to a specified depth. (Native

Mode)

Syntax

ERRDUMP

[

errorstackdepth

] [ ;SYS]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

errorstackdepth

The number of error stack messages to be printed. If the actual error stack size is less than the

errorstackdepth

then all messages on the error stack are printed with no warnings or errors.

The process error stack currently runs from zero to sixteen. The system error stack currently runs from zero to one hundred and twenty-seven. If the

errorstackdepth

specified is beyond the boundaries of the process error stack, the process error stack is not dumped, and

CIERR 9155

is displayed, as follows:

SYS

INVALID PROCESS STACK DEPTH;

EXPECTED A VALUE 0 - 16 (CIERR 9155)

If the

errorstackdepth

specified is beyond the boundaries of the system error stack, (specified with

SYS

) the system error stack is not dumped, and

CIERR 9156

is displayed, as follows:

INVALID SYSTEM STACK DEPTH;

EXPECTED A VALUE 0 - 127 (CIERR 9156)

errorstackdepth

value of 0 dumps the entire error stack. The default value is 0.

The

SYS

option specifies that the system error stack is to be dumped. If the

SYS

option is not used, then the process error stack is dumped.

Operation Notes

The

ERRDUMP

command allows the user to dump either the process or the system error stack to a specified depth. If the depth specified is greater than the number of errors on the error stack, then all errors on the error stack are dumped without any warnings or errors.

If the user specifies an

errorstackdepth

outside of the boundaries of the error stack, an error message is displayed and the error stack is not dumped.

226 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ERRDUMP

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Examples

To obtain an error stack dump, enter:

ERRDUMP

A sample system response is:

TYPE MANAGER; THE END-OF-FILE HAS BEEN DETECTED.

FILE SYSTEM MESSAGE 1023.

Another example specifies that the system error stack be dumped:

ERRDUMP 1;SYS

A sample system response is:

THE STATUS OF THE TIME ENTRY IS NON-ACTIVE.

TUE, FEB 9, 1988, 12:18

Chapter 3 227

Command Definitions C-E

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

Allows the CI programmer to simulate all aspects of CI error handling. (Native Mode)

Syntax

ESCAPE

[ [ CIERR=]

errnum

]

Parameters

ERRNUM

Sets the CIERROR variable to the absolute value of errnum

and the

HPCIERR variable is set to errnum

Operation Notes

The

ESCAPE

command causes control to leave all user commands (regardless of nesting levels) and return to the CI. Batch jobs terminate (unless a

CONTINUE

is in effect) and sessions issue the prompt.

If no

CONTINUE

is active,

ESCAPE

causes the CI to act as it would for any error: for sessions the user command environment is cleared and the prompt is displayed; jobs terminate.

CONTINUE

is active , then

ESCAPE

causes the CI to execute the second command after the

CONTINUE

. In the following example, the CI will execute cmd2

after the

ESCAPE

cmd1

CONTINUE udc1

ucmdA

ucmdB

ESCAPE

cmd2

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

BREAK

has no effect on this command.

Example errclear continue run database if hpcierr < 0 then echo database warning ![abs(hpcierr)] detected, proceeding...

elseif hpcierr > 0 then echo FATAL database error !hpcierr detected, halting...

escape else

endif

228 Chapter 3

Command Definitions C-E

ESCAPE

Related Information

Commands

ERRCLEAR

RETURN

Manuals

MPE/iX Commands Reference Manual Volumes I and II

Command Interpreter Access and Variables Programmer's Guide

Chapter 3 229

Command Definitions C-E

EXIT

EXIT

Terminates the command interpreter. (Native Mode)

Syntax

EXIT

Parameters

None

Operation Notes

When you are using MPE/iX you can start another Command Interpreter by running it as a program. To do so, you enter

CI.PUB.SYS

, or simply

. If you enter this command more than once, you will create levels of the CI program.

To determine what level of the command interpreter you are in, use the

SHOWVAR

HPCIDEPTH

command. Then, to back out from the CI, enter the

EXIT

command. If the command interpreter is the root CI,

EXIT

is equivalent to

BYE

and ends the session.

Otherwise,

EXIT

returns to the previous process. To go beyond

HPCIDEPTH=2

requires process handling (PH) capability. To end a session without backing out of the CI level-by-level with the

EXIT

command, enter

BYE

Use

This command is available from a job or session. It is not available from a program or in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

The following example shows how to determine what level of the CI you are in, and then, using the

EXIT

command, to back out to the root CI:

SHOWVAR HPCIDEPTH

HPCIDEPTH=2

EXIT

SHOWVAR HPCIDEPTH

HPCIDEPTH=1

To back out from the second level to the first, use the

EXIT

command. To back out from the session from any level, use the

BYE

command.

Related Information

Commands

BYE

HELLO

RUN

XEQ

SHOWVAR

Manuals Appendix A, "Predefined Variables in MPE/iX"

230 Chapter 3

Command Definition F-K

Chapter 4 231

Command Definition F-K

FCOPY

FCOPY

Invokes the FCOPY subsystem.

Syntax

FCOPY

[

fcopycommand

]

Parameters

fcopycommand

An FCOPY subsystem command. The FCOPY subsystem enables you to copy files or selected portions of files from any supported input device to any supported output device. There are many commands; only the most common examples are found in the "Examples" section of this command.

Refer to the FCOPY Reference Manual (32212-90003) for more information.

Operation Notes

This command runs the FCOPY subsystem from MPE/iX. If the command is entered with no parameters,

FCOPY

prompts (

) the user for subsystem commands until an

EXIT command is entered. If the fcopycommand parameter is used,

FCOPY

executes the FCOPY subsystem command and then returns control to MPE/iX.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or in BREAK. To use this command from a program, the user or the program must have process handling (PH) capability. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

To access FCOPY to execute multiple commands, enter:

FCOPY

HP32212A.03.24

FILE COPIER (C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1984

To access FCOPY to execute a single command and return control to MPE/iX, enter the command as follows:

FCOPY FROM=UDC.TECHPUBS;TO=TEMP;NEW

HP32212A.03.24 FILE COPIER (C) HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1984

EOF FOUND IN FROMFILE AFTER RECORD 23

END OF SUBSYSTEM

232 Chapter 4

Related Information

Commands

COPY

Manuals

FCOPY Reference Manual

Command Definition F-K

FCOPY

Chapter 4 233

Command Definition F-K

FILE

FILE

Declares the file attributes to be used when a file is opened. This declaration, informally known as a file equation, may be used to override programmatic or system default file specifications. With the addition of shared parameters from the NS3000/XL AdvanceNet subsystem, the declaration may specify a formal file designator that may be used to access a remote file or device in a subsequent command or intrinsic. NS3000/XL AdvanceNet is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating System and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

FILE

formaldisgnator

=[ *

formaldisgnator

| $NULL $NEWPASS $OLDPASS $STDIN $STDINX $STDLIST

filereference

]

[ :

nodespec

filedomain

]

[ :DEV=[ [

envname

] #] [ device] [ ,[ outpri] [ ,numcopies]]]

[ ;VTERM] [ ;ENV=envfile[ :nodespec]]

[ ;option] [ ;access][ ; disposition]

[ ;DEFBLK | ;OPTMBLK]

Parameters

formaldesignator

A formal file designator in the format:

filename

groupname

accountname

]][:

nodespec

]

The

filename

groupname

, and

accountname

are the identifiers that form a fully qualified file name. Each identifier may contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. This file name may be used to identify the file in subsequent commands or intrinsic calls.

The

nodespec

extension of the formal file designator, explained below, is a parameter shared with the NS3000/XL AdvanceNet subsystem. It is not part of the fundamental operating system. MPE/iX accepts this extended formal file designator, with a node specification following a colon (

), in the

FILE

and

RESET

commands and in the

FOPEN

and

HPFOPEN

intrinsics.

formaldesignator

is not equated to another file designation, the parameter specifies the name of an actual file. Placing an asterisk ahead of the parameter (

*formaldesignator

) establishes a backreference to a formal file designator defined in a

FILE

command.

The backreferenced form, *

formaldesignator

, is valid only if it appears on the right side of the equal sign (

234 Chapter 4

$NULL

$NEWPASS

$OLDPASS

$STDIN

$STDINX

$STDLIST

filereference

Command Definition F-K

FILE

Actual file designator of a system-wide file that is always treated as an empty file. When

$NULL

is accessed by a program for input, that program receives only an end-of-file indication. When it is accessed by a program for output, the associated write request is accepted by MPE/iX, but no physical output is actually performed.

Do not specify parameters or options for

$NULL

files; if you do, you will receive an error.

The system-wide name of the temporary job file. When

$NEWPASS

is closed, it is referenced by the name

$OLDPASS

. Opening

$NEWPASS destroys any previous

$OLDPASS

temporary file.

The system-wide name of the last temporary file that was closed as

$NEWPASS

The system-wide name of the standard job input device. A colon (

) as the first character read on this file indicates end-of-file. You will receive an error if you specify the

DEV=

option,

VTERM

parameter, or any of the

option

parameters or options with

$STDIN

; there are restrictions on the

disposition

parameters and options as well.

The same as

$STDIN

except that a colon can be read as the first character and received as data. An

EOD

produces an end-of-file on

$STDINX

You will receive an error if you specify the

VTERM

parameter or any of the

option

parameters or options with

$STDINX

; there are restrictions on the

disposition

parameters and options as well.

The system-wide name for the standard job or session list device. You will receive an error if you specify the

VTERM

parameter or any of the

option

parameters or options with

$STDLIST

; there are restrictions on the

disposition

parameters and options as well.

The actual file designator of the file. If the name does not begin with a dot

(.) or slash (/), the name is considered to follow standard MPE file naming syntax rules. File names will be in the following format:

filename

lockword

][.

groupname

accountname

]]

Each identifier may contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The file name resolution is as follows:

• if

filename

= FN

, look for file

in the CWD (current working directory)

• if

filename

= FN.GP

, look for file

in group

of the logon account

(regardless of the current working directory)

• if

filename

= FN.GP.AC

, look for file

in group

of account

In a batch job, the file fails to open if the file has a lockword that is not specified in

filereference

. In a session, MPE/iX prompts you for a lockword if one exists.

Chapter 4 235

Command Definition F-K

FILE

nodespec

NOTE

If the name begins with a dot (.) or a slash (/), the name is considered to follow the HFS file naming syntax rules:

• File names are not upshifted.

• File names can be up to 255 characters in length for absolute pathnames and 253 characters for relative pathnames.

• File names can begin with, and contain, any of the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _, -, .

File names are of the form

path/filename

where the

path/filename

combination may have a maximum of 255 characters. The expected behavior of the

path/filename

resolution is as follows:

• if

filename

= ..fn

, look for file

..fn

in the CWD (current working directory)

• if

filename

= /fn

, look for file fn

in root directory (/)

• if

filename

= ./fn

, look for file fn

in the CWD

• if

filename

= ../fn

, look for file fn

in parent directory

• if

filename

= .fn

, look for file

.fn

in the CWD

If a file has a lockword, attempts to open the file with the HFS naming syntax fail unless the file also has an ACD which defeats the lockword. It is recommended that all lockwords be removed in favor of ACDs.

An extension of the formal file reference. It may be an environment identification (specified in a previous

DSLINE

REMOTE

command), or it may be

$BACK

. It may appear in the formal file designator of the file or as an extension of an actual file reference.

The

nodespec

parameter does not function when used with HFS naming syntax.

If an environment identification appears in a file designation and in the

DEV=

option, an attempt to open the file (with the

FOPEN

HPFOPEN intrinsic, for example) produces an error.

$BACK

instructs MPE/iX to "hop backward" one node toward your local system to find the specified file. This works only if the

FILE

command is issued in a remote session. If the systems involved are connected in a local area network (LAN), one "hop backward" always means returning to your local system. The

$BACK

specification is the same as

DEV=#

without an environment name.

The

nodespec

parameter and

REMOTE

command are not part of the HP 3000

Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating System. The

NS3000/XL AdvanceNet subsystem must be purchased separately. The

236 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FILE

filedomain envname

NOTE

DEV=

device nodespec

parameter is optional; if you do not have NS3000/XL AdvanceNet, omitting the

nodespec

parameter makes no difference in the performance of the

FILE

command.

However, specifying

nodespec

on a system that does not have NS3000/XL produces an error. The

nodespec

parameter is controlled by the NS3000/XL subsystem. Refer to the NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference Manual

(36920-90001).

The domain of the file, which may be

NEW

OLD

, or

OLDTEMP

NEW

Creates a new file, which is the default. The

NEW

file may be permanent or temporary, depending on how the file was created. You must use either the

BUILD

command or the

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

intrinsic to create the file. Refer to the

BUILD

command in this chapter.

OLD

An existing permanent file that was saved in the system or in a movable volume set domain. The file continues to exist after the current job or session ends. Use this parameter when you are creating a file equation that back references a device link file.

OLDTEMP

A temporary file that already exists in the temporary session or job file domain. The file is deleted at the end of the current job or session.

This may be a

nodespec

, logical device number, or an X.25 node name. The parameter

envname

may consist of as many as eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

The

envname

parameter is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer

System Fundamental Operating System. The NS3000/XL AdvanceNet subsystem must be purchased separately. The

envname

parameter is optional: if you do not have NS3000/XL AdvanceNet, omitting the

envname

parameter makes no difference in the performance of the

FILE

command.

However, specifying

envname

on a system that does not have NS3000/XL produces an error. The

envname

parameter is controlled by the NS3000/XL subsystem. Refer to the NS3000/XL User/Programmer Reference Manual

(36920-90001).

If you choose the

DEV=

option, it must be followed by at least one parameter (the parameter can be simply

). The

DEV=

parameter does not accept device names, volume classes, or volume names. The default device class is

DISC

. A previously defined environment identifier is permitted in the

DEV=

option, but the domain and organization qualifiers are not permitted.

The logical device class name or logical device number of a device, such as a disk, tape, printer, or a terminal. The default is

DISC

Chapter 4 237

Command Definition F-K

FILE

outpri numcopies

VTERM

envfile

If you are opening a file that is to reside on a movable volume set, you must specify a device class that includes the drives upon which the home volume set is mounted. The file is then allocated to any of the volume set's volumes that fall within that device class.

The output priority requested for an output spool file. This may have a value of 1 (the lowest priority) to 13 (the highest).

The number of copies requested for an output spool file. The maximum number is 127.

Instructs MPE/iX to use reverse virtual terminal service instead of remote file access. Use

VTERM

only if the designated device is a remote terminal.

Using

VTERM

allows a local application program to perform I/O to remote terminals located on systems that support reverse virtual terminal. Refer to

Communicator 3000, Volume 2, Issue 6

(version G.02.00 of MPE V/E U-MIT).

The name of a file containing printer environment information, which controls the print output formats on the printer. Not all printers support this feature/capability to accept environment information.

This name may be an actual file designator, or it may be a formal file designator preceded by an asterisk (

The information in this file may contain specifications for page size, character fonts, forms, and other printer requirements to be used with the

HP laser printing system. The file must be in a form suitable for downloading to the printer.

For example, to specify the environment file

ACCTENV.HPENV.SYS

to be used when printing, enter:

FILE ACCTLIST;DEV=ACCTPP;ENV=ACCTENV.HPENV.SYS

For information on creating an environment file for your specific printer, refer to the documentation that came with your printer.

The

ENV=

parameter in a

FILE

command overrides the environment specified in the

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

intrinsic.

If the

ENV=

parameter is used and the

*formaldesignator

filereference

is omitted the parameter is ignored. Only a fully specified environment option overrides the environment option supplied by programmatic open.

Any environment file specification for a subsequent

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

of the device file is ignored.

Any valid option for the

FILE

command.

option

Syntax for Option

[ ;REC=[

recsize

] [ ,[

blockfactor

] [ ,[ F U V B ] [ ,BINARY ,ASCII ] ] ] ] [ ;DE

N=[

density

] ] [ ;DISC=[

numrec

] [ ,[

numextents

] [ ,

initialloc

] ] ] [ ;CODE=

filecode

] [ ;RI

O ;NORIO ] [ ;STD ;MSG ;CIR ;KSAMXL ;SPOOL ] [ ;ULABEL=numlabels] [

;KEY={ ^filereference keyinfo } ] [ ;FIRSTREC=

recnum

] [ ;REUSE ;NOREUSE ]

238 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FILE

Parameters for Option

recsize

Record size. A positive number indicates words; a negative number indicates bytes for new files only. For fixed-length files, this is the logical record size. For undefined length files, this is the maximum record size.

For variable-length files, this is the maximum logical record size if

blockfactor

is 1. If not, this is used to calculate the maximum logical record size and physical record size.

For byte-stream files,

recsize

is assigned a length of 1 byte.

Records always begin on word boundaries. Therefore, the record size is rounded up to the nearest word boundary for block size calculations. For a binary file or a variable-length ASCII file, odd byte lengths are rounded up and the extra byte is available for data.

However, if an odd-byte-length record size is specified for a fixed or undefined length record file, the extra byte is not available for data.

Default is the configured physical record width of the associated device. If you do not use the

DEV=

parameter, the default is

DISC

with 1023 records.

For example, a fixed-length ASCII file with a record size specified as 11 bytes has only 11 bytes available for data in each logical record. However, to determine actual block size, 12 bytes are used for the record size (block size = 12 bytes multiplied by the

blockfactor

). If the file is specified as a binary file, the 11 bytes are rounded up to 12 bytes (6 words), all of which are available for each logical record.

This is the only option parameter that applies to

$STDIN, $STDINX

, or

$STDLIST

; if you specify other option parameters for these files,

FILE returns an error.

blockfactor

Number of logical records per physical block, for new files only. Default is calculated by dividing the specified

recsize

into the configured block size; this value is rounded downward to an integer that is never less than 1. For variable-length record files,

blockfactor

is set to 1 after using the original value along with

recsize

to calculate maximum logical record size and physical record size. (This does not apply to message files.) The

blockfactor

is ignored for undefined-length records. Maximum size is 255.

For byte-stream files,

blockfactor

is set to 1.

F, U, V

Defines the format of the records of the file. A file may contain fixed-length records (

), undefined-length records (

), variable-length records (

), or byte-stream format (

). Default is

for disk files.

BINARY

ASCII

Indicates the type of records.

BINARY

indicates binary-coded records and is the default.

ASCII

indicates ASCII-coded records.

Byte stream files are ASCII coded.

density

Corresponds to tape densities in BPI (bytes-per-inch) for new files only.

This parameter is only applicable when writing to a tape mounted on the

HP 7976A, HP 7978A, or HP 7980 variable-density tape drive.

Chapter 4 239

Command Definition F-K

FILE

numrec

NOTE

The density value from a file equation takes precedence over the density specified in

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

. The supported densities are 800, 1600, and

6250. For details on the operation of density selection, refer to the

FOPEN and

HPFOPEN

intrinsics in the MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

(32650-90028).

Maximum number of logical records, for new files only. For fixed-length and undefined-length files, the maximum value allowed for this field is

2,147,483,647. Default is 1023.

The file system uses these values to compute other characteristics of the file as well. Therefore, the values (or default values) specified in the

FILE command may be valid within their respective fields, but may cause overflow errors in the computation of internally needed file specifications.

numextents initialloc

Maximum number of disk extents. This is a value from 1 to 32.

Number of extents to be initially allocated to the file at the time it is opened. This is a value from 1 to 32. Default is 0.

filecode

Code indicating a specially formatted file. This code is recorded in the file label and is available to processes accessing the file through the

FGETINFO or

FLABELINFO

intrinsic. For this parameter, any user can specify a positive integer ranging from 0 to 32,767 or a mnemonic name. Certain integers and mnemonics have been reserved for particular

Hewlett-Packard defined meanings. Default is the unreserved file code of

RIO

NORIO

Creates a relative or nonrelative I/O file.

RIO

creates a relative I/O file.

The record length parameter is implicitly changed to fixed-length record.

RIO

is a special file access method primarily intended for use by COBOLII programs; however, you can access these files by programs written in any language.

NORIO

creates a nonrelative I/O file. Default is

NORIO

RIO

and

NORIO

specifications affect only the physical characteristics of the file. If

NOBUF

is specified in the

FILE

command, the file is accessed in non-

RIO

mode; otherwise,

RIO

access is used with

RIO

files.

NOBUF

access is provided for special operations on

RIO

files such as replicating a

RIO

file.

NOBUF

is not normally used by the

RIO

user. Refer to the MPE/iX

Intrinsics Reference Manual (32650-90028) for a discussion of relative I/O.

STD

MSG

CIR

KSAMXL

, or

SPOOL

Defines the type of file. The default is

STD

(standard

MPE/iX disk file).

MSG

(message file) allows communication between any set of processes.

MSG

acts like a FIFO (first in, first out) queue, where records are read from the start of the file and logically deleted and/or are appended to the end of file.

CIR

(circular file) acts as normal sequential file until full. When full, the first physical block is deleted when the next record is written, and remaining blocks are logically shifted to front of file.

CIR

cannot be simultaneously accessed by readers and writers.

240 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FILE

KSAMXL

specifies a native mode KSAM file (KSAM XL file).

SPOOL

specifies an output spool file. No spooling attributes are initialized.

PRI is set to 8 and number of copies to 1. No output device is set.

This spool file will not be linked to the spool file directory (SPFDIR) and, therefore, will not be printed unless it is subsequently linked to the

SPFDIR with the

SPOOLF;PRINT

command. At that time, the target output device must be set according to the rules of that command. Use of the

SPOOL

option forces the

SAVE

disposition, overriding any user-specified disposition.

The characteristics of a file created with the

;SPOOL

keyword are:

• variable length records of 1008 bytes each

• a blocking factor of 1

• ASCII format

• permanent file

numlabels

• a record limit of 1023

• undefined maximum number of extents, with 0 extents initially allocated

These characteristics override any other characteristics, such as binary format, which may be specified.

The number of user label records to be created for the new file. You can specify as many as 255 labels. This parameter applies to any type of file.

^filereference

keyinfo

Information about KSAM XL key.

keyinfo

is the information,

^filereference

is a file containing

keyinfo

; the caret (^) means the contents of the file will be used.

keytype keylocation

Use the following format for

keyinfo

;KEY= (

keyspec;keyspec

...) Where:

keyspec

::=

keytype,keylocation,keysize

[ ,DUP ,RDUP ]

You must specify one

keyspec

for each key in the KSAM file. First, describe the primary key, followed by as many as 15 subsequent

keyspec

s, each describing an alternate key.

KSAM key type, specified as BYTE, INTEGER, REAL, IEEEREAL,

NUMERIC PACKED, OR *PACKED. Specify with the whole word, or initial: B, I, R, E, N, P, or *. If more than one is specified, spell the word out correctly. See

keysize

parameter.

Location of the first byte of the KSAM key within the data record counting from the first byte in the record. The first byte in the data record is always numbered 1. Only one key can start at each location. This parameter applies only to KSAM files.

Chapter 4 241

Command Definition F-K

FILE

keysize

Length of the KSAM key, in bytes. This parameter is required for all key types. Different

keytypes

have different lengths, as described below:

BYTE

INTEGER

REAL

IEEEREAL

NUMERIC

PACKED

*PACKED

1 to 255 bytes

4, 8, or 16 bytes

1 to 28 bytes

1 to 14 bytes (odd number of digits)

2 to 14 bytes (even number of digits)

DUP

RDUP

These two options apply only to KSAM files. Specify the

DUP

option if you want duplicate key values to be permitted. If you don't specify

DUP

, records with duplicate key values are rejected and an error message issued when such records are written to the file. When the

DUP

option is used, each new duplicate key is inserted at the end of the duplicate key chain. This maintains the chronological order of duplicate.

If you specify

RDUP

, duplicate keys are allowed; they are inserted randomly in the duplicate key chain. This method makes insertion of such keys faster, but does not maintain the chronological order of the duplicate key chain.

The default is that duplicate keys are not allowed.

recnum

If you specify 1, record numbers in the new KSAM data file are numbered starting with 1. Otherwise, by default, record numbers start with 0. (Only

1 and 0 are acceptable.)

REUSE

NOREUSE

This option is used only for new KSAM files.

If you specify the

REUSE

option, KSAM files are compacted by reusing deleted record space. If you also specify the

DUP

option for a key, duplicate records are placed chronologically at the tail of the file, and all nonduplicate records are assigned to the first available space.

Deleted record space will not be reused with the

NOREUSE

option, which is the default.

Syntax for Access

[ ;NOCCTL ;CCTL ] [ ;NOMULTI ;MULTI ;GMULTI ] [ ;NOMR ;MR ] [ ;W

AIT ;NOWAIT ] [ ;ACC=

[ IN OUT UPDATE OUTKEEP APPEND INOUT ] ] [ ;BUF=[

numbuffers

] ;

NOBUF ] [ ;LOCK ;NOLOCK ] [ ;COPY ;NOCOPY ] [ ;FORMS=

formsmsg

] [ ;EX

C ;SHR ;EAR ;SEMI ] [ ;NOLABEL ;LABEL= [ [

volid

] [ ,[ IBM ANS ] [ ,[

e xpdate

] [ ,

seq

] ] ] ] ] [ ;FORMID=

formid

] [ ;PRIVATE]

242 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FILE

Parameters for Access

NOCCTL

CCTL

Indicates whether or not carriage-control characters are specified.

NOCCTL

indicates that carriage-control characters are not being specified in writes to the file.

CCTL

indicates that carriage-control characters are being supplied in writes to the file. Default is

NOCCTL

NOMULTI, MULTI,

GMULTI

Indicates if the sharing of files in jobs and sessions is allowed.

NOMULTI

prohibits sharing files in

MULTI

mode and is the default.

MULTI

allows concurrent accesses of the file and may regard the file as if no buffering is taking place. Access control information can be shared by the processes of the same CI process tree (that is parent-to-child processes) with

MULTI

GMULTI

is the same as

MULTI

except it allows accesses to be in different jobs/sessions.

NOMR

Indicates if multirecord access is permitted.

NOMR

specifies that no multirecord access is permitted.

allows multirecord access to the file.

Default is

NOMR

WAIT

NOWAIT

Indicates if I/O requests are to be completed or queued before control returns to the program.

WAIT

completes I/O requests to the file before control is returned to the program.

NOWAIT

returns control to the program as soon as I/O requests are queued by MPE/iX; only privileged mode programs are allowed. In this way, the program does not have to wait for the physical I/O to be complete before resuming execution, and it also implies

NOBUF

Only

MSG

files may be opened in

NOWAIT

mode without privileged mode.

IN, OUT, UPDATE, OUTKEEP,

APPEND,

INOUT

Defines the type of file access.

only permits READ access to the file and is the default for all input devices.

OUT

only permits WRITE access to the file and is the default for output devices.

UPDATE

permits any type of access to the file.

OUTKEEP

only permits WRITE access to the file, except previous data is not deleted.

APPEND

only permits APPEND access to any file.

INOUT

only permits INPUT/OUTPUT access; any file intrinsic except

FUPDATE

can be issued against the file.

BUF=

numbuffers

NOBUF

Specifies whether buffers are to be allocated to the file. The

numbuffers

parameter is the number of buffers (1 to 16) to be allocated for the file. The

numbuffers

parameter is ignored for terminals. The default is

BUF=2

buffers.

NOBUF

specifies that no buffers are allocated for the file.

This parameter has no meaning for NM files.

NOLOCK

LOCK

Indicates if dynamic locking and unlocking is to be permitted.

NOLOCK prohibits dynamic locking/unlocking of file through the

FLOCK

and

FUNLOCK

intrinsics.

LOCK

allows dynamic locking and unlocking through

FLOCK

and

FUNLOCK

intrinsics. Default is

NOLOCK

COPY

NOCOPY

Indicates if files can be copied.

COPY

allows

MSG, KSAM

CIR

, and

SPOOL files to be either copied (logical data record read) or replicated (block read and write completely duplicating file) to another file.

NOCOPY

accesses the file in its natural mode, that is, as a

MSG

file. Default is

NOCOPY

Chapter 4 243

Command Definition F-K

FILE

formsmsg

A message to the operator requesting that certain forms be mounted. The message must be displayed and verified before the output data can be printed on a line printer. The message is a string of no more than 49 ASCII characters terminated by a period. Control characters for bells and inverse video may be sent to the system console using this parameter. Attempts to send other control characters, however, results in a display of blanks and the associated control character letter when the forms message appears on the system console. Default is that no forms message is sent.

EXC, SHR, EAR, SEMI

Indicates if shared or exclusive file access is allowed.

EXC

is exclusive access; after the file is opened, no other accesses are permitted.

For message files,

EXC

means one writer and one reader. For circular files

EXC

means one reader

one writer.

SHR

is share access; after the file is opened other accesses are permitted.

EAR

is exclusive access for one writer; it allows multiple readers.

SEMI

is intended for use with message files; it allows one exclusive reader, multiple writers; if the file is not a message file,

SEMI

acts like

EAR

(one exclusive writer, multiple readers). Default is

EXC

except with read only file access (

NOLABEL

LABEL

Indicates if this tape is labeled or unlabeled.

NOLABEL

specifies an unlabeled tape.

LABEL

specifies a labeled tape. Default is

NOLABEL

volid

ANS

IBM

Up to six alphanumeric characters identifying a labeled magnetic tape volume. If a special character, such as

is specified,

volid

must be surrounded by quotation marks (for example,

FILE LT;DEV=TAPE;

LABEL="#12345",ANS

Type of standard label.

ANS

is ANSI-standard label.

IBM

is IBM-standard label. Default is

ANS

expdate

Month, day, year, written in the format

mm/dd/yy

. This specifies the expiration date of the file, or the date after which information contained in the file is no longer useful. The file can be overwritten without operator reconfirmation after this date. Default is

00/00/00

; the file can be overwritten immediately.

seq

Either an absolute file number between 1 and 9999 (inclusive), or one of the following, which specifies the position of the file relative to other files on the tape:

Causes a search of all volumes until the file is found.

ADDF

positions the tape to add a new file on the end of the volume (or last volume in a multivolume set). Note that

ADDF

should not be used to add to a new labeled tape volume.

positions the tape at the next file on the tape. If this is the first

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

, then

causes the tape to be positioned to the first file on the tape. If the previous

FCLOSE

specified

REWIND

, the tape backspaces to the last file, and the position is as it was on the previous file. This is the default.

244 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FILE

formid

PRIVATE

Applies only to output spoolfiles. A string of up to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter, which uniquely identifies a special form that is to be mounted. A message displaying this

formid

is printed on the system console or

$STDLIST

of the associated user of the spooled device. The spooler process then awaits verification that the special forms have been mounted before printing the file for which the

formid

was specified. The default is that no

formid

or message is displayed.

The

PRIVATE

option generates a spool file that may be accessed in privileged mode only. This means that the file is not accessible to normal users on the system. Private spoolfiles may not be saved or copied. They may only be purged, printed, or (within limits) altered by using the

SPOOLF

command instead of using the

PURGE

COPY

commands.

Syntax for Disposition

[ ;DEL ;TEMP ;SAVE ;SPSAVE ]

Options for Disposition

DEL

The file is deleted when closed.

TEMP

SAVE

SPSAVE

The file is saved in the job/session temporary domain when closed.

The file is saved in the permanent file domain when closed.

If this parameter is used, the resulting spool file is created with SPSAVE disposition. This means the spool file is not to be purged after the last copy of it has been printed, but is instead retained in the OUT.HPSPOOL

group.

This option is only valid for output spoolfiles. Private spoolfiles cannot be saved with the

SPSAVE

parameter.

If none of these parameters are supplied, the disposition of the file is as it was when opened, or as specified by the

FCLOSE

intrinsic call issued by the user program.

DEFBLK or OPTMBLK

These two options apply only to KSAM files. DEFBLK specifies that the data block size will be the default data block size of 4096 bytes.

OPTMBLK specifies that KSAMXL will select the optional data block size based on the record size. The default is DEFBLK.

Operation Notes

This command allows you to change the specifications for files at run time, including the devices on which they reside, overriding specifications supplied through the

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

intrinsic. The

FILE

command remains in effect for the entire job or session unless revoked by the

RESET

command or superseded by another

FILE

command.

Chapter 4 245

Command Definition F-K

FILE

To use the

FILE

command for a file, you must have a valid, formal file designator (the name by which your program recognizes the file). The formal file designator provides a way for commands and code outside your program to reference the file. The

FILE

command is the only way you can control or change the programmatic file specifications without changing the code which calls

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

Use

This command may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Examples

To run the program

MYPROG

, which references two files by the file names (

formaldesignators

)

SOURCE

and

DEST

, but to use two existing disk files

INX

and

OUTX

as the actual files for the program, enter:

FILE SOURCE=INX

FILE DEST=OUTX

RUN MYPROG

Enter the following command to send the output to a new file

FILEX

. The parameters entered on the command line define

FILEX

as having 64-word fixed-length records, blocked two records per block in ASCII code; it is limited to 800 records among 10 extents, two of which are to be immediately allocated. When

MYPROG

closes the file, it will be permaently saved.

FILE DEST=FILEX,NEW;REC=64,2,F,ASCII;DISC=800,10,2;SAVE

RUN MYPROG

Note that the file equation only modifies those items specified. All other attributes used come from the parameters specified in the

FOPEN

HPFOPEN

call (or the defaults where parameters are omitted) for the file

DEST

Implicit File Commands for Subsystems

When an actual file designator appears as a command parameter, it is automatically equated to a formal file designator. This is then used within the subsystem by an implicit

FILE

command issued by the command executor. For instance, within the FORTRAN

77/XL compiler the formal file designator for the text file input is

FTNTEXT

. Suppose you specify a file named

ALSFILE

for text file input as shown below:

FTNXL ALSFILE

MPE/iX implicitly issues the following

FILE

command, invisible to you:

FILE FTNTEXT=ALSFILE

You cannot backreference any of the formal file designators associated with the command as actual file designators. Therefore, do not use the formal file designators

FTNTEXT

FTNUSL

, or

FTNLIST

as actual file names. The use of

FTNTEXT

as a file name, as in the following example, is invalid because the implicit

FILE

command issued by the FORTRAN compiler then backreferences itself:

FTNXL *FTNTEXT

FILE FTNTEXT=*FTNTEXT

246 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FILE

The following is an example of using the

*formaldesignator

, in this case, specifying a file on magnetic tape used as a source file during FORTRAN compilation:

FILE SOURCE=TAPE1,OLD;DEV=TAPE;REC=-80

FTNXL *SOURCE

Implicitly, the command executor issues the following

FILE

command, backreferencing your previous

FILE

command:

FILE FTNTEXT=*SOURCE

Implicit

FILE

commands, like explicit

FILE

commands, cancel any previous

FILE commands that reference the same formal file designators. Formal file designators are described in each compiler command description.

The following example uses NMS file option

SPOOL

FILE MYSPOOL;DISC=3000,1,1;SPOOL

PRINT DOCFILE.MYGROUP.MYACCT,*MYSPOOL

Because the

DEV

= parameter of the

FILE

command is defaulted to disk, the result is an unlinked output spool file. To send this file to a printer, use the following command:

SPOOLF MYSPOOL;PRINT;DEV=LP

This links MYSPOOL to the SPFDIR using the default PRI (8) and number of copies (1).

Note that the

DEV

= parameter is required with the

SPOOLF;PRINT

command to link the spool file to a target device. Failure to specify

DEV

= (or specifying an inappropriate

DEV such as

disk

) results in an error message.

HFS Examples

FILE X=./my_file;SAVE

PURGE *X

To reference the device link file TAPE7 in a file equation, enter:

FILE T=TAPE7,OLD

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

BUILD

LISTEQ

LISTFILE

RESET

MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

Chapter 4 247

Command Definition F-K

FINDDIR (UDC)

FINDDIR (UDC)

The

FINDDIR

UDC executes the

LISTFILE

command to search for a directory.

NOTE

System-defined UDCs are not automatically available. Your System Manager must use the

SETCATALOG

command to make these UDCs available for your use. For example:

SETCATALOG HPPXUDC.PUB.SYS;SYSTEM;APPEND

Syntax

FINDDIR

[ [ DIR=]

dir_name

] [ [ START=]

start_dir

]

Parameters

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command for a complete explanation of the parameters used with the

FINDDIR

UDC. The following parameters are supported with the

FINDDIR

UDC.

dir_name start_dir

A simple directory name, including wildcards. The

dir_name

is case insensitive. It cannot be a pathname. For example, abc

@bc

, and

[A-M]_@ are valid

dir_names

; while

/ABC/

./Mydir

, and

ABC.GRP

are not valid

dir_names

. The

dir_name

is optional and defaults to

The name of the directory where the search is to begin. For example,

/SYS/PUB

. The default starting directory is the root directory (/).

Operation Notes

The

FINDDIR

UDC finds all directories matching

dir_name

, with the search beginning at

start_dir

The UDC executes the following form of the

LISTFILE

command:

LISTFILE

start_dir

,6 ;SELEQ=[OBJECT=DIR] ;NAME=

dir_name

;TREE

Use

This UDC may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts execution.

Examples

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command later in this chapter for examples.

Related Information

Commands

LISTFILE

FINDFILE

(UDC),

LISTDIR

(UDC)

Manuals None

248 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FINDFILE (UDC)

FINDFILE (UDC)

The

FINDFILE

UDC executes the

LISTFILE

command to search for a file.

NOTE

System-defined UDCs are not automatically available. Your System Manager must use the

SETCATALOG

command to make these UDCs available for your use. For example:

SETCATALOG HPPXUDC.PUB.SYS;SYSTEM;APPEND

Syntax

FINDFILE

[ FILE=]

filename

[ [ START=]

start_dir

]

Parameters

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command for a complete explanation of the parameters used with the

FINDFILE

UDC. The following parameters are supported with the

FINDFILE

UDC.

filename start_dir

A simple file name, including wildcards. The

filename

is case insensitive. It cannot be a pathname. For example, abc

@bc

, and

[A-M]_@

are valid

filenames

; while

/ABC/

./Mydir

, and

ABC.GRP

are not valid

filenames

. The

filename

is required.

The name of the directory where the search is to begin; for example,

/SYS/PUB

. The default starting directory is the root directory (/).

Operation Notes

The

FINDFILE

UDC searches for all files matching

filename

, with the search beginning at

start_dir

The UDC runs the the following form of the

LISTFILE

command:

LISTFILE

start_dir

,6 ;SELEQ=[OBJECT=FILE] ;NAME=

filename

;TREE

Use

This UDC may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts execution.

Examples

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command later in this chapter for examples.

Related Information

Commands

LISTFILE

FINDDIR

(UDC)

Manuals None

Chapter 4 249

Command Definition F-K

FORMSALIGN

FORMSALIGN

Configures one spooled printer or a group of spooled printers related by device class, to conditionally enter into a forms message dialog with its operator (s) when the current spoolfile includes a forms message.

Syntax

FORMSALIGN[DEV=]{ldev | devclass | devname }

[;[DIALOG=]{{EACHCHANGE | EACHFILE | EACHCOPY }[,{FORMIDOVERRIDE |

NOFORMIDOVERRIDE}]}]

[ ;SHOW]

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of a printer. The printer must be configured as an MPE Type 32 device.

devclass devname

The device class name of a class of printers. Each printer in the class must be configured as an MPE Type 32 device. The device class must begin with a letter and consist of eight or fewer alphanumeric characters.

The device name of a printer. The device name must begin with a letter and consist of eight or fewer alphanumeric characters. Users should note that it is not possible to have a device class name and a device name

(which are the same). If you enter an alphanumeric character string, the command will search the device class list first, and then the device name list.

EACHCHANGE

The spooler process conducts the forms message dialog only when the

(case-insensitive) forms message of the current spoolfile differs from that of the previous spoolfile printed by that process when an overriding formid specification is not in effect. Two different spoolfiles with the same forms message will print without the forms message dialog if they are printed consecutively.

EACHFILE

The spooler process conducts the forms message dialog whenever the spoolid of the current spoolfile differs from that of the previous spoolfile printed by that process, the current spoolfile contains a forms message and an overriding formid specification is not in effect. Two copies of the same spoolfile will print without the forms message dialog if they are printed consecutively.

EACHCOPY

The spooler process conducts the forms message dialog for every copy of every spoolfile which contains a forms message if an overriding formid specification is not in effect.

FORMIDOVERRIDE

This is a sub-parameter of the chosen

EACHxxx

keyvalue. With this feature selected, the Native Mode Spooler first checks its current and previous spoolfiles for the same non-blank, case-insensitive formid. If the

250 Chapter 4

Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FORMSALIGN

formids match, both the

DIALOG

option for the spooler process and any forms message in the current spoolfile are ignored, and the forms message dialog is not activated. Identical formids override all other considerations.

Note that the

DIALOG

option is not changed. It is ignored as long as the two formids match.

If the two formids do not match, and the formid of the current spoolfile is not empty, then the spooler conducts the forms message dialog using the forms message of the current spoolfile.

If the current spoolfile has no forms message (even though it has a forms identification), the spooler:

• Conducts no dialog if standard forms are already mounted.

• Displays the

STANDARD FORMS

message if special forms are mounted.

If the two formids do not match because the current spoolfile has no formid and the previous spoolfile did, the spooler will always conduct a forms message dialog, again ignoring any setting of

DIALOG

. If the current spoolfile has a non-empty forms message, the spooler conducts a normal forms message dialog with the device operator. If the forms message is empty, and the device has special forms mounted, the spooler prompts the device operator to mount standard forms.

Once both the previous spoolfile and the current spoolfile have no formids, the spooler operates in accordance with the selected

DIALOG

option once more.

251

Command Definition F-K

FORMSALIGN

NOFORMIDOVERRIDE

This is a sub-parameter of the chosen

EACHxxx

keyvalue. With this feature selected, the Native Mode Spooler ignores any and all formids associated with the current spoolfile or the previous spoolfile. The setting of the

DIALOG

option always determines the conditions under which the spooler process conducts the forms message dialog. The formid is then useful only as an item in a selection equation.

NOTE

The setting of

(NO)FORMIDOVERRIDE

only affects the spooler's function during the forms message dialog. It has no effect on the use of the

FORMID keyword in a selection equation of either the

SPOOLF

LISTSPF

command.

It is still possible to select a subset of all spoolfiles to alter, delete, or display on

FORMID=

, regardless of the setting

(NO)FORMIDOVERRIDE

for a given device. They are totally independent of each other.

If the current spoolfile has no forms message but special forms are mounted on the device, the spooler always conducts the

STANDARD FORMS

dialog.

SHOW

Specifying this option causes the configuration for the specified devices to be displayed. If no other parameters are used, the current configuration is displayed. If other parameters are used, the configuration is first updated and then displayed. If a device class is specified, the configuration for each device in the class is displayed.

If this option is omitted, there is no display.

Operation Notes

The

FORMSALIGN

command can be used on a spooled or an unspooled printer, or on a device class containing any mixture of spooled and unspooled printers. When used on a spooled printer, the specified options become effective on the next copy selected for printing on that device. The choices are retained until changed by another

FORMSALIGN

command, even if the printer should become unspooled and a new spooler process started for it.

When used on an unspooled printer, it presently has no effect but will be retained (unless changed by another

FORMSALIGN

command) and will become effective immediately upon spooling the printer. Files which include a forms message, and which are directed to an unspooled printer, always trigger a forms message dialog with the printer's operator. Any formid accompanying the file is irrelevant when the file is directed to an unspooled printer.

252 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FORMSALIGN

NOTE

This command effects more than one device (if applied to all devices in a class). You may get warning messages for some devices and not others. A warning message on one or more devices affects only that device. The command will continue to execute until all selected devices have been configured or shown, or an error is detected. An error terminates the command.

The options specified in the

FORMSALIGN

command are stored in the appropriate device files. For example, options for

LDEV 6

are stored in file

00000006.DEVICES.3000devs

This is why the options are retained even when no spooler process exists for

LDEV 6

However, these device files are reconstructed at each system startup. The

FORMSALIGN options set at that time are

EACHCHANGE, FORMIDOVERRIDE

. Your SYSSTART file should include one

FORMSALIGN

command per device or class for which you want to set options other than the default.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Any user may execute this command with only the

;SHOW

option to display current configuration. When changing configuration, this command may be executed only from the console or by any user who has been allowed the

FORMSALIGN

command with the

ALLOW

command. You can also execute this command by assigning a user the

ASSOCIATE

command and specifying the device.

Examples

To display the current configuration, enter:

FORMSALIGN LP;SHOW

A sample of the output might look like the following:

FORMID

LDEV DEVNAME DIALOG OVERRIDE

6 LDEV6 EACHCHANGE

14 LDEV14 EACHCOPY

15 LDEV15 EACHFILE

19 LDEV19 EACHCHANGE

YES

To conduct a forms message dialog for each copy of each file printed, enter:

FORMSALIGN 6;DIALOG=EACHCOPY,NOFORMIDOVERRIDE

You may also specify the system startup options, for example:

FORMSALIGN 6;DIALOG=EACHCHANGE,FORMIDOVERRIDE

Related Information

Commands

SPOOLER

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

Manuals Performing System Operation Tasks (32650-90137)

Chapter 4 253

Command Definition F-K

FORTGO

FORTGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program.

FORTRAN 66/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental

Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

FORTGO

[

textfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,[

newfile

] ] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

. Default is

$STDIN

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. The formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

Actual file designator of the master file with which

textfile

is merged to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal file designator is

FTNMAST

. Default is that the file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the file resulting from merging

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any ASCII output file. The formal file designator is

FTNNEW

. Default is that the file is not written.

A sequence of characters between two single quotation marks

(apostrophes) or between two double quotation marks. You may use the delimiter as part of the string so long as the delimiter appears twice. Any occurrence of two single or two double quotation marks in a row, is considered part of the string, and, therefore, not the terminating delimiter.

INFO=

quotedstring

is used to pass initial compiler options to a program.

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

FTNLIST

FTNMAST

, and

FTNNEW

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit

FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

FORTGO

command compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode FORTRAN

66/V program. If you do not specify a source file, MPE/iX expects input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX writes the listing to your standard output device.

254 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FORTGO

The USL file created during the compilation is a system-defined temporary file

$OLDPASS

, which is passed directly to the MPE segmenter, and cannot be accessed.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile, prepare, and execute a FORTRAN 66/V program entered from the disk file

SOURCE

and transmit the resulting program listing to the disk file

LISTFL

, enter:

FORTGO SOURCE,LISTFL

To enter your source input from a device other than your standard input device, and/or direct the listing to a device other than your standard list device, simply name the input and listing files as command parameters. In the example below, the source listing is read from magnetic tape, formally identified by the file name

MTAPE

. Output is sent to the printer, identified by the file name

PRTR

FILE MTAPE;DEV=TAPE

FILE PRTR;DEV=FASTLP

MTAPE

and

PRTR

are then backreferenced in the

FORTGO

command, as shown here:

FORTGO *MTAPE,*PRTR

Related Information

Commands

FORTPREP

FORTRAN

RUN

XEQ

PREP

SEGMENTER

Manuals

HP FORTRAN/3000 Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

Chapter 4 255

Command Definition F-K

FORTPREP

FORTPREP

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program. FORTRAN 66/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

FORTPREP

[

textfile

] [ ,[

progfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,[

newfile

] ] ] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quo tedstring

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

. Default is

$STDIN

progfile

Actual file designator of the program file to which the prepared program segments are written. When you omit

progfile

, the MPE segmenter creates the program file, which resides in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

To create your own program file, you must do so in one of two ways:

listfile masterfile newfile quotedstring

• By using the MPE/iX

BUILD

command, and specifying a file code of

1029

PROG

, and a

numextents

value of 1. This file is then used by the

PREP

command.

• By specifying a nonexistent file in the

progfile

parameter, resulting in the creation of job/session temporary file of the correct type.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. The formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

Actual file designator of the master file with which

textfile

is merged to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal file designator is

FTNMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the file resulting from the merger of

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any ASCII output file. The formal file designator is

FTNNEW

. Default is that the file is not written.

A sequence of characters between two single quotation marks

INFO=

quotedstring

is used to pass initial compiler options to a program.

256 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FORTPREP

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

FTNLIST

FTNMAST

, and

FTNNEW

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit

FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

This command compiles and prepares a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program into a program file stored on disk. If you do not specify a source file, MPE/iX expects the input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the output to your standard list device.

The USL file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file

$OLDPASS

, which is passed directly to the MPE segmenter. The segmenter also uses the file

$OLDPASS

. The prepared program segments are written to it, thus overwriting any existing temporary file of that name.

If you have no need to examine the USL file, use the default for

progfile

. This way, MPE/iX creates a program file for you, ensuring the best results. If, on the other hand, you want to store the USL file and the program file as separate entities, specify

progfile

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile and prepare a FORTRAN 66/V program entered from your standard input device, into the standard default file

$OLDPASS,

with the listing printed on your standard list device, enter:

FORTPREP

To compile and prepare a FORTRAN 66/V source program from a text file named

TEXTX into a program file named

PROGX

, with the listing sent to the list file

LISTX

, enter:

FORTPREP TEXTX,PROGX,LISTX

The

FORTPREP

command combines the compilation and preparation steps. The compiled program segments, stored in the file

$OLDPASS

, are prepared and stored in the program file

PROGX

. Therefore, it is equivalent to:

FORTRAN TEXTX, LISTX

PREP $OLDPASS,PROGX

Related Information

Commands

FORTGO

FORTRAN

RUN

XEQ

PREP

SEGMENTER

Manuals HP FORTRAN/3000 Reference Manual (30000-90040)

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual (32650-60026)

Chapter 4 257

Command Definition F-K

FORTRAN

FORTRAN

Compiles a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program. FORTRAN 66/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately.

Syntax

FORTRAN

[

textfile

] [ ,[

uslfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] [ ,[

masterfile

] [ ,[

newfile

] ] ] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quoted string

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. The formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

. Default is

$STDIN

uslfile

Actual file designator of the user subprogram library (USL) file to which the object program is written, which can be any binary output file with file code of

USL

1024

. The formal file designator is

FTNUSL

. If the

uslfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

. If entered, this parameter indicates that the USL file was created in one of four ways:

listfile masterfile newfile

• By using the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to save default USL file

$OLDPASS

created during a previous compilation.

• By building the USL with the MPE segmenter

-BUILDUSL

command.

Refer to the MPE Segmenter Reference Manual (30000-90011).

• By creating a new USL file with the MPE/iX

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

USL

1024

• By specifying a nonexistent

uslfile

parameter, thereby creating a permanent file of the correct size and type.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

Actual file designator of the master file with which

textfile

is merged to produce a composite source. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNMAST

. Default is that the master file is not read; input is read from

textfile

, or from

$STDIN

textfile

is not specified.

Actual file designator of the merged

textfile

and

masterfile

. This can be any

ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNNEW

. Default is that no file is written.

258 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FORTRAN

quotedstring

NOTE

A sequence of characters between two single quotation marks

INFO=

quotedstring

is used to pass initial compiler options to a program.

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

FTNUSL

FTNLIST

FTNMAST

, and

FTNNEW

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE command.

Operation Notes

This command compiles a compatibility mode FORTRAN 66/V program into a USL file on disk. If you do not specify

textfile

, MPE/iX expects input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the listing to your standard list device.

If you create the USL file (using the MPE/iX

BUILD

command) before compiling the program, you must assign it a file code of

USL

1024

. If you omit this parameter, the compiled program segments are stored in the temporary file

$OLDPASS

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile a FORTRAN 66/V program entered from your standard input device into an object program in the USL file

$OLDPASS

, and write the listing to your standard list device, enter:

FORTRAN

The following example compiles a program from the source file

MYSOURCE

and stores the object code into the USL file

MYUSL

. The program listing is stored in the disk file

MYLIST

FORTRAN MYSOURCE,MYUSL,MYLIST;INFO= "$CONTROL BOUNDS"

Chapter 4 259

Command Definition F-K

FORTRAN

To compile a FORTRAN 66/V program and store the object code into a USL file you create with the

BUILD

command, enter:

BUILD OBJECT;CODE=USL

FORTRAN SOURCE,OBJECT,LISTFL

To create a USL file with the

BUILD

command, the code must be specified.

Related Information

Commands

FORTGO

FORTPREP

RUN

XEQ

PREP

SEGMENTER

Manuals

HP FORTRAN/3000 Reference Manual

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

260 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FREERIN

FREERIN

Releases a global resource identification number (RIN).

Syntax

FREERIN

rin

Parameters

rin

The resource identification number (RIN) to be released. It must be a number from one to the configured maximum.

Operation Notes

A resource identification number is used to manage a resource shared by two or more jobs or sessions so that only one job or session at a time can access that resource.

The user acquires a RIN from the system by entering the

GETRIN

command. When all users are finished with the RIN, the user who acquired it returns it to the system by entering the

FREERIN

command. To free a RIN, you must be the original owner of that

RIN, that is, the user who actually issued the

GETRIN

command that allocated the RIN and assigned it a password.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To release RIN 1, enter:

FREERIN 1

Related Information

Commands

GETRIN

Manuals

MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

Resource Management Programmer's Guide

Chapter 4 261

Command Definition F-K

FTN

FTN

Compiles a compatibility mode FORTRAN 77/V program. FORTRAN 77/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. The native mode equivalent of this command is

FTNXL

Syntax

FTN

[

textfile

] [ ,[

uslfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

uslfile

Actual file designator of the USL file to which the object code is stored, which can be any binary output file with a file code of

USL

1024

. Its formal file designator is

FTNUSL

. If the

uslfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

. If entered, this parameter indicates that the USL file was created in one of four ways:

listfile quotedstring

• By using the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to save the default USL file

$OLDPASS

, created during a previous compilation.

• By building the USL with the segmenter

-BUILDUSL

command. Refer to the MPE Segmenter Reference Manual (30000-90011).

• By creating a new USL file with the MPE/iX

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

USL

1024

• By specifying a nonexistent

uslfile

parameter, thereby creating a permanent file of the correct size and type.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

A sequence of characters between two single quotation marks or between two double quotation marks that specify compiler options. You may use the delimiter as part of the string so long as the delimiter appears twice. Any occurrence of two single or two double quotation marks in a row, is considered part of the string, and, therefore, not the terminating delimiter.

Operation Notes

The

FTN

command compiles a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN 77/V program and stores the object code in a user subprogram library (USL) file on disk. If

textfile

is not specified,

MPE/iX expects the source program to be entered from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the program listing to your standard list device and identifies it by the formal file designator,

FTNLIST

262 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FTN

If you create the USL prior to compilation, you must specify a file code of

USL

1024

. If you omit the

uslfile

parameter, the object code is saved in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

. To keep it as a permanent file, you must save

$OLDPASS

under another name.

You cannot backreference the formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

FTNUSL

, and

FTNLIST

) as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

The following example compiles an HP FORTRAN 77/V program entered from your standard input device and stores the object program in the USL file

$OLDPASS

. The listing is then sent to your standard list device.

FTN

The next example compiles an HP FORTRAN 77 program contained in the disk file

FORTSRC

, and stores the object program in the USL file

FORTOBJ

. The program listing is stored in the disk file

LISTFILE

BUILD FORTOBJ;CODE=USL

FTN FORTSRC,FORTOBJ,LISTFILE

Related Information

Commands

FTNGO

FTNPREP

Manuals

HP FORTRAN 77/iX Reference

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

Chapter 4 263

Command Definition F-K

FTNGO

FTNGO

Compiles, prepares, and executes a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN 77/V program. HP

FORTRAN 77/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental

Operating Software and must be purchased separately. The native mode equivalent of this command is the

FTNXLGO

command.

Syntax

FTNGO

[

textfile

] [ ,

listfile

] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

Default is

$STDLIST

listfile

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

quotedstring

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

and

FTNLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

A sequence of characters between two single quotation marks

INFO=

quotedstring

is used in the HP FORTRAN 77/V programming language to pass initial compiler options to a program.

Operation Notes

The

FTNGO

command compiles, prepares, and executes an HP FORTRAN 77/V program. If

textfile

is omitted, MPE/iX expects input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the program listing to the formal file designator

FTNLIST

(default is

$STDLIST

The USL file created during the compilation is the system-defined temporary file

$OLDPASS

, which is passed directly to the MPE segmenter. It cannot be accessed because the segmenter also uses

$OLDPASS

to store the prepared program segments, overwriting any existing temporary file of the same name.

264 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FTNGO

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

To compile, prepare, and execute an HP FORTRAN 77/V program entered from your standard input device, with the program listing sent to your standard list device, enter:

FTNGO

To compile, prepare, and execute an HP FORTRAN 77/V program from the disk file

FORTSRC

and send the program listing to the file

LISTFILE

, enter:

FTNGO FORTSRC,LISTFILE

Related Information

Commands

FTN

FTNPREP

RUN

XEQ

PREP

SEGMENTER

Manuals

HP FORTRAN 77/iX Reference

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

Chapter 4 265

Command Definition F-K

FTNPREP

FTNPREP

Compiles and prepares a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN 77/V program. HP FORTRAN

77/V is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating

Software and must be purchased separately. The native mode equivalent of this command is the

FTNXLLK

command.

Syntax

FTNPREP

[

textfile

] , [

progfile

] [ ,

listfile

] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

progfile

Actual file designator of the program file to which the prepared program segments are written. When you omit

progfile

, the MPE segmenter creates the program file, which is stored in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

. If you do create your own program file, you must do so in one of two ways:

listfile

• By using the MPE/iX

BUILD

command and specifying a file code of

1029

, or

PROG

, and a

numextents

value of 1. This file is then used by the

PREP

command.

• By specifying a nonexistent file in the

progfile

parameter, in which case a job/session temporary file of the correct size and type is created.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

NOTE

quotedstring

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

and

FTNLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

A sequence of characters between two single quotation marks

INFO=

quotedstring

is used in the HP FORTRAN 77/V programming language to pass initial compiler options to a program.

266 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FTNPREP

Operation Notes

The

FTNPREP

command compiles and prepares a compatibility mode HP FORTRAN 77/V program into a program file on disk. If you do not specify

textfile

, MPE/iX expects input from the current input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the listing output to the formal file designator

FTNLIST

(default

$STDLIST

). The USL file

$OLDPASS

, created during compilation, is a temporary file passed directly to the MPE segmenter. You may access it only if you do not use the default for

progfile

. This is because the segmenter also uses

$OLDPASS

to store the prepared program segments, overwriting any existing temporary file of the same name.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

The following example compiles and prepares an HP FORTRAN 77/V program entered through your standard input device and stores the prepared program segments in the file

$OLDPASS

. The listing is printed on your standard list device.

FTNPREP

To compile and prepare an HP FORTRAN 77/V source program from the source file

FORTSRC

, store it in

FORTPROG

, and send the listing to your standard list device, enter:

FTNPREP FORTSRC,FORTPROG

Related Information

Commands

FTN

FTNGO

RUN

XEQ

PREP

SEGMENTER

Manuals

HP FORTRAN 77/iX Reference

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

Chapter 4 267

Command Definition F-K

FTNXL

FTNXL

Compiles an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program. HP FORTRAN 77/iX is not part of the HP 3000

Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP FORTRAN 77/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

FTNXL

[

textfile

] [ ,[

objectfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

objectfile listfile quotedstring

Actual file designator of the object file, which is the output of the compiler.

This file is stored in binary form and has a file code of either

NMOBJ

(

1461

) or

NMRL

(

1033

). Its formal file designator is

FTNOBJ

. If the

objectfile

parameter is omitted, the object code is saved to the temporary file

$OLDPASS

if it exists, or to

$NEWPASS

which then becomes

$OLDPASS

If you specify

objectfile

, the compiler stores the object file in a permanent file of the correct size, type, and name you specified.

If either a file of the same name or the default file

$OLDPASS

already exists, the new object code overwrites the old if the file code is

NMOBJ

or is appended to the old if the file code is

NMRL

. If the file code is

NMRL

, any existing version of the code module is first purged.

NMRL

. You may then recompile to the new file.

You may use the MPE/iX

SAVE

command to store

$OLDPASS

as a permanent file under another name.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

A string of no more than 255 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it).

268 Chapter 4

NOTE

Command Definition F-K

FTNXL

The

info

string used in the HP FORTRAN 77/iX programming language to pass initial compiler options to the HP FORTRAN 77/iX compiler. HP

FORTRAN 77/iX places a single dollar sign (

) before the

info

string and places the string before the first line of source code in the text file.

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

FTNOBJ

, and

FTNLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Operation Notes

The

FTNXL

command compiles an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program and stores the object code in a source file on disk. If

textfile

is not specified, MPE/iX expects the source program to be entered from your standard input (

$STDIN

). If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the listing to your standard list device (

$STDLIST

) and identifies it by the formal file designator,

FTNLIST

. If you omit the

objectfile

parameter, the object code is saved in the file domain as

$OLDPASS

. To keep it as a permanent file, you save

$OLDPASS

under another name.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

The following example compiles an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program entered from your standard input device and stores the object program in the object file

$OLDPASS

. The listing is then sent to your standard list device.

FTNXL

The next example compiles an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program contained in the disk file

FORTSRC

, and stores the object program in the object file

FORTOBJ

. The program listing is stored in the disk file

LISTFILE

FTNXL FORTSRC,FORTOBJ,LISTFILE

NOTE

Program development in native mode uses the MPE/iX

LINK

command not the MPE V/E

PREP

command. This produces a significant change in the method of linking code.

If you have created a program called

MAIN

and a subprogram called

SUB

, each contained in a separate file, you might choose to handle it this way in MPE V/E:

Chapter 4 269

Command Definition F-K

FTNXL

FTN MAIN, SOMEUSL

FTN SUB, SOMEUSL

PREP SOMEUSL, SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

The second command appends the code from

SUB

SOMEUSL

However,

LINK

(in MPE/iX native mode) does not append

SUB

. On MPE/iX, you must compile the source files into separate object files and then use the Link Editor to link the two object files into the program file, as in this example:

FTNXL MAIN, OBJMAIN

FTNXL SUB, OBJSUB

LINK FROM=OBJMAIN,OBJSUB;TO=SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

On the other hand, if an

NMRL

is used instead of an

NMOBJ

, the above can be simplified to the following:

BUILD RLFILE;DISC=10000;CODE=NMRL

FTNXL MAIN, RLFILE

FTNXL SUB, RLFILE

LINK RLFILE,SOMEPROG

RUN SOMEPROG

Related Information

Commands

FTNXLGO

FTNXLLK

RUN

XEQ

PREP

SEGMENTER

Manuals

HP FORTRAN 77/iX Reference

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

270 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FTNXLGO

FTNXLGO

Compiles, links, and executes an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program. HP FORTRAN 77/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP FORTRAN 77/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

FTNXLGO

[

textfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

Default is

$STDLIST

listfile quotedstring

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

A run-time parameter for the compiler. It is a quoted string of no more than 255 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it). The

info

string is used in the HP FORTRAN 77/iX programming language to pass initial compiler options to the HP

FORTRAN 77/iX compiler. HP FORTRAN 77/iX places a single dollar sign

(

) before the

info

string and places the string before the first line of source code in the text file.

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

and

FTNLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Chapter 4 271

Command Definition F-K

FTNXLGO

Operation Notes

The

FTNXLGO

command compiles, links, and executes an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program. If

textfile

is omitted, MPE/iX expects input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, MPE/iX sends the program listing to the formal file designator

FTNLIST

(default is

$STDLIST

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor purges the object file and writes the linked program to

$OLDPASS

, which is then executed and may be executed repeatedly.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Example

To compile, link, and execute an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program entered from your standard input device, with the program listing sent to your standard list device, enter:

FTNXLGO

To compile, link, and execute an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program from the disk file

FORTSRC and send the program listing to the file

LISTFILE

, enter:

FTNXLGO FORTSRC,LISTFILE

Related Information

Commands

FTNXL

FTNXLLK

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP FORTRAN 77/iX Reference

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

272 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

FTNXLLK

FTNXLLK

Compiles and links an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program. HP FORTRAN 77/iX is not part of the HP 3000 Series 900 Computer System Fundamental Operating Software and must be purchased separately. This command is recognized only if HP FORTRAN 77/iX is installed on your system. (Native Mode)

Syntax

FTNXLLK

[

textfile

] [ ,[

progfile

] [ ,[

listfile

] ] ] [ ;INFO=

quotedstring

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

textfile

Actual file designator of the input file from which the source program is read. This can be any ASCII input file. Formal file designator is

FTNTEXT

Default is

$STDIN

progfile listfile quotedstring

Actual file designator of the program file to which the linked program is written. When you omit

progfile

, the MPE/iX Link Editor creates the program file, which is stored in the temporary file domain as

$OLDPASS

. If you do create your own program file, you do so by specifying a nonexistent file in the

progfile

parameter, in which case a job/session permanent file of the correct size and type is created.

Actual file designator of the file to which the program listing is written.

This can be any ASCII output file. Formal file designator is

FTNLIST

Default is

$STDLIST

A run-time parameter for the compiler. It is a quoted string of no more than 255 characters (including the single or double quotation marks that enclose it). The

info

string is used in the HP FORTRAN 77/iX programming language to pass initial compiler options to the HP

FORTRAN 77/iX compiler. HP FORTRAN 77/iX places a single dollar sign

(

) before the

info

string and places the string before the first line of source code in the text file.

NOTE

The formal file designators used in this command (

FTNTEXT

FTNOBJ

, and

FTNLIST

) cannot be backreferenced as actual file designators in the command parameter list. For further information, refer to the "Implicit FILE

Commands for Subsystems" discussion of the

FILE

command.

Chapter 4 273

Command Definition F-K

FTNXLLK

Operation Notes

The

FTNXLLK

command compiles and links an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program into a disk file. If you do not specify

textfile

, HP FORTRAN 77/iX expects your input from your standard input device. If you do not specify

listfile

, HP FORTRAN 77/iX sends the listing output to your current list device.

The object file created during compilation is a system-defined temporary file,

$NEWPASS

, which is passed directly to the Link Editor as

$OLDPASS

. The Link Editor overwrites

progfile

and writes the linked program to

$OLDPASS

, if

progfile

is omitted, which can then be executed.

NOTE

This command is implemented as a command file. If you set the

HPPATH variable to null (

SETVAR HPPATH ""

), the command file is not executed, and the command fails.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program. It may not be used in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME command continues the execution.

Examples

The following example compiles and links an HP FORTRAN 77/iX program entered through your standard input device and stores the linked program in the file

$OLDPASS

The listing is printed on your standard list device.

FTNXLLK

To compile and link an HP FORTRAN 77/iX source program from the source file

FORTSRC

, store it in

FORTPROG

, and send the listing to your standard list device, enter:

FTNXLLK FORTSRC,FORTPROG

Related Information

Commands

FTNXL

FTNXLGO

LINK

RUN

XEQ

, LINKEDIT Utility

Manuals

HP FORTRAN 77/iX Reference

MPE Segmenter Reference Manual

274 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

GETLOG

GETLOG

Establishes a logging identifier on the system.

Syntax

GETLOG

logid

;LOG=

logfile

{ ,DISC ,TAPE ,SDISC ,CTAPE } [ ;PASS=

password

] [ { ;AUTO

;NOAUTO } ]

Parameters

logid

The logging identifier to be established. This must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character.

logfile password

AUTO

NOAUTO

The name of the file to receive data from the logging procedure. It must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. You must also specify the device class on which the log file resides,

DISC

TAPE

SDISC

(serial disk) or

CTAPE

(cartridge tape).

Logging identifier password, assigned by the creator for protection against illegal use of a particular identifier. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

The password is optional. if

;PASS=

is entered without a password none is assigned.

Initiates an automatic

CHANGELOG

if the log file becomes full. This option is ignored if

TAPE

is specified.

Prevents initiation of an automatic

CHANGELOG

. A

CHANGELOG

is not performed if the log file becomes full.

Operation Notes

The

GETLOG

command specifies a logging identifier to be used each time a particular logging process is used. Frequently the

GETLOG

command is used with databases, so that each test task that runs writes to a logging file. This makes data recovery easier because you know where the task failed.

The creator of the logging identifier must have user logging (LG) or system supervisor (OP) capability to execute this command. Other users can be allowed access to this logging identifier by notifying them of the identifier and password. If a password is specified, it is required whenever the logging process is accessed. Users accessing the logging system with this identifier must supply the identifier and password in the

OPENLOG

intrinsic.

To use the

AUTO

parameter, the log process for

logid

must be enabled for changing. You may do this by ending the log file name with the numeric characters 001 (for example

fname001

This naming convention works in conjunction with the file set number to generate sequential file names automatically.

Chapter 4 275

Command Definition F-K

GETLOG

If a log file is restricted to a single volume or volume class when it is created with the

BUILD

command, then successive log files created by User Logging will have the same restriction.

If a new log file name is specified with the

ALTLOG

command, the links with any previous log file are broken.

There cannot be two logging identifiers with the same name on the system at the same time. The

LISTLOG

command can be used to determine what logging identifiers currently exist.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. User logging (LG) capability is required to use this command.

Example

To create the logging identifier

FINANCE

and associate it with the disk log file

, enter:

GETLOG FINANCE;LOG=A,DISC

Related Information

Commands

ALTLOG

CHANGELOG

LISTLOG

OPENLOG

RELLOG

LOG

SHOWLOG

SHOWLOGSTATUS

Manuals

System Startup, Configuration, and Shutdown Reference Manual

User Logging Programmer's Guide

276 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

GETRIN

GETRIN

Acquires a global resource identification number (RIN) and assigns a password to it.

Syntax

GETRIN

rinpassword

Parameters

rinpassword

Password of the intrinsic that locks the RIN. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

Operation Notes

The

GETRIN

command acquires a global RIN from the MPE/iX RIN pool, typically during a session. You must assign an arbitrary password for the RIN, which aids in restricting its use to authorized users. You can then give this RIN and the associated password to cooperating users so that it can be locked and unlocked by them. For instructions on how to lock and unlock a RIN, and how to pass a RIN and its password as intrinsic parameters, refer to the MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual (32650-90028).

Users who know the RIN and its password can use it in their programs (in jobs or sessions) until the user who acquired the RIN releases it with the

FREERIN

command. The RIN acquired is always a unique, positive integer. The total number of RINs MPE/iX can allocate is specified when the system is configured, but cannot exceed 1024. If all currently available RINs have been acquired by other users, MPE/iX rejects your request and issues the message:

RIN TABLE FULL

In this case, you must wait until one of the RINs becomes available, or request that your system manager raise the maximum number of RINs that can be assigned.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

To acquire a global RIN and assign to it the password

MYRIN

, enter:

GETRIN MYRIN

MPE/iX responds with the RIN number assigned, for example:

RIN: 1

Chapter 4 277

Command Definition F-K

GETRIN

Related Information

Commands

FREERIN

Manuals

Resource Management Programmer's Guide

278 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HEADOFF

HEADOFF

Stops header/trailer output to a device. (Native Mode)

Syntax

HEADOFF

ldev

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the printer affected by the command.

Operation Notes

Header and trailer information appears before and after a file when it is printed. This information is not a part of the file's text. This information identifies the file by session number, output spoolfile number, session name (if any), user, and account. It also lists the date and time the file was printed.

If output is directed to a line printer, MPE/iX automatically prints header and trailer pages identifying the job that produced the file.

If the device is in use and a header has already been printed when you issue the

HEADOFF command, your request to suppress header/trailer output takes effect after the corresponding trailer is printed.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be executed only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

Example

To stop header/trailer output to logical device number 6, enter:

HEADOFF 6

Related Information

Commands

HEADON

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

Chapter 4 279

Command Definition F-K

HEADON

HEADON

Resumes header/trailer output to a device. (Native Mode)

Syntax

HEADON

ldev

Parameters

ldev

The logical device number of the printer affected by the command.

Operation Notes

When the header/trailer facility is enabled, output is directed to a line printer, and MPE/iX automatically prints header and trailer pages identifying the job that produced the file.

If the device is in use, your request to resume header/trailer output takes effect after the current output is complete.

The header/trailer facility is always enabled at system startup.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be executed only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

ASSOCIATE

command.

Example

To resume header/trailer output to logical device number 6 enter:

HEADON 6

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

HEADOFF

Performing System Operation Tasks

280 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HELLO

HELLO

Initiates an interactive session. (Native Mode)

Syntax

HELLO

[

sessionname

username

[ /

userpass

] .

acctname

[ /

acctpass

] [ ,

groupname

[ /

grouppass

] ] [ ;TERM={

termtype termname

} ] [ ;TIME=

cpusecs

] [ ;PRI={ BS CS DS ES }

] [ { ;INPRI=

inputpriority

;HIPRI } ] [ ;INFO=

ciinfo

] [ ;PARM=

ciparm

]

Parameters

sessionname

Arbitrary name used in conjunction with

username

and

acctname

parameters to form a fully qualified session identity. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. Default is that no session is assigned.

username userpass acctname acctpass

User name, established by the account manager, that allows you to log on to this account. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

User password, optionally assigned by the account manager. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The user password must be preceded by a slash

(

Account name as established by the system manager. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The

acctname

parameter must be preceded by a period (

Account password, optionally assigned by the system manager. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The account password must be preceded by a slash (

groupname grouppass

Group name to be used for the local file domain and the CPU and connect-time charges as established by the account manager. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. Default is your home group if you are assigned one by the account manager. (Required if a home group is not assigned.)

Group password optionally assigned by the account manager. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character. The

grouppass

parameter is not needed to log on to your home group. The group password must be preceded by a slash (

termtype

termname

Determines terminal type characteristics. The

termtype

parameter determines the type of terminal used for input. MPE/iX uses this parameter to determine device-dependent characteristics such as delay

Chapter 4 281

Command Definition F-K

HELLO

cpusecs

factors for carriage returns. It must be 10 or 18. The default value for

termtype

is assigned by the system supervisor during system configuration.

This is a required parameter to ensure correct listings if your terminal is not the default

termtype

The

termname

parameter is the name of the file containing the desired terminal-type characteristics. The file cannot have a lockword or reside on a user volume.

Users of the workstation configurator are allowed to create terminal-type files. The proper and efficient operation of a specific device by a user-created terminal type is the responsibility of the user. The workstation configurator utility allows the user to specify characteristics of the terminal, including data flow control, block mode, read trigger, special characteristics, echo, line feed, parity, and printer control.

Maximum CPU-time that a session can use, entered in seconds. When the limit is reached, the session is aborted. It must be a value from 1 to 32767.

To specify no limit, enter a question mark (

UNLIMITED

, or omit the parameter. Default is no limit.

, or

The execution priority queue that MPE/iX uses for your session, and also the default priority for all programs executed within the session. BS is the highest priority, ES is the lowest. If you specify a priority that exceeds the highest priority permitted for your account or user name by the system,

MPE/iX assigns the highest priority possible below BS. DS and ES are intended primarily for batch jobs; their use for sessions is generally discouraged. For information on the guidelines for these priority queues, refer to the

TUNE

command. Default is CS.

CAUTION

Use care in assigning the BS queue. Processes in this priority class can lock out other processes.

inputpriority

HIPRI

Determines the input priority of the job. The

inputpriority

option is the relative input priority used in checking against access restrictions imposed by the jobfence. The

inputpriority

option takes effect at logon time and must be from 1 (lowest priority) to 13 (highest priority). If you supply a value less than or equal to the current jobfence set by the system operator, the session is denied access. Default is 8.

When logging on, the

HIPRI

option is used to either override the system jobfence or to override the session limit. When using the

HIPRI

option to override the jobfence, the system first checks to see if you have system manager (SM) or system operator (OP) capability. If you have either of these capabilities, you are logged on and your

INPRI

defaults to the system's jobfence and execution limit. If you do not have either of these capabilities, the system attempts to log you on using

INPRI=13

and succeeds if the jobfence is 12 or less, and if the session limit is not exceeded. Only users with SM or OP capability can use the

HIPRI

option to override the session limit to log on. Use of the

HIPRI

option without SM or OP capability causes the following warning to be displayed:

282 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HELLO

ciinfo ciparm

MUST HAVE 'SM' OR 'OP' CAP. TO SPECIFY HIPRI,

MAXIMUM INPRI OF 13 IS USED (CIWARN 1460)

INFO

string to be passed to the command interpreter. For the MPE/iX

CI, it is the first command to be executed by the command interpreter.

This parameter replaces the

( ) COMMAND

LOGON

command and approximates its function. The

( ) COMMAND

LOGON

command caused the session to terminate after executing the specified command. In contrast, the

ciinfo

parameter does not terminate the session unless

ciparm

is set to 1, 3, or 5.

Running the CI as a child process in this way restricts the flexibility of

ciparm

. More flexibility is available by running the CI as a standalone program.

The command interpreter parameter number you wish to use. The MPE/iX command interpreter accepts the numbers listed below. If you enter any other value, it is treated as zero (0).

0, 2, 4 Executes logon UDCs and displays the CI banner and the welcome message. This is the default.

1, 3, 5

-1

Same as 0, but the CI terminates after processing the

INFO=

string. If the

INFO=

string is not specified, the CI terminates after executing the first user-supplied command.

Prohibits cataloging of UDCs and suppress the display of the CI banner and the welcome message. Invoking this level requires system manager (SM) capability.

-2 Same as -1, but the CI terminates after processing the

info=

command. Invoking this level requires system manager (SM) capability.

The MPE/iX CI distinguishes between

ciparm

s 1, 3, 5 and 0, 2, 4 when it is run from within the CI, that is, after the session has logged on.

If a user

without

SM capability uses -1 or -2, the system substitutes a parameter value of 0 and does NOT display an error message.

Operation Notes

The

HELLO

command initiates an interactive session and must be entered from a terminal; no other device can be used for this command. You must supply both a valid

username

and

acctname

in your logon command or MPE/iX rejects your logon attempt and displays an error message. If your logon attempt is accepted, MPE/iX displays specific logon information and prompts you for your next MPE/iX command. In the following example, a user has logged on under the

username

USER

and the

acctname

TECHPUBS

MPE XL:HELLO USER.TECHPUBS

HP3000 Release: X.50.40 User Version : X.50.40 THU, DEC 8, 1994, 1:15 PM

Chapter 4 283

Command Definition F-K

HELLO

When you first access an MPE/iX system to log on, the

MPE iX:

prompt is displayed. When you log off using the

BYE

command, the following message is displayed:

CPU=1. CONNECT=1. THU, DEC 8, 1994, 1:50 PM

The

RELEASE: V.UU.FF

number in the logon banner is determined by Hewlett-Packard at operating system build time and provides an identity for software releases (also known as the MIT). This number may not be changed. (Prior to MPE/iX release A.11.70, this was referred to as

BASE

The

USER VERSION: V.UU.FF

can be assigned a value during a SYSGEN and allows you to identify any changes to your total software package such as patch level, third party software, or other specifics. Any ASCII character can be used. In prior releases, this number was printed out immediately after the MPE/iX product number HP31900.

The

PRODUCT V.UU.FF

, which now immediately follows the product number HP31900, is determined by Hewlett-Packard when a new version of MPE/iX is compiled. This

V.UU.FF

number cannot be changed and is used when entering a service request (SR) against the

MPE/iX operating system product for that particular release.

If the system operator has set up a welcome message, it is displayed after the MPE/iX verification of your logon.

The session number assigned by MPE/iX uniquely identifies your session to MPE/iX and to other users. MPE/iX assigns such numbers to sessions in sequential order as they are logged on. If you are on a modem and do not log on within the system-configured time, the line is dropped. You must redial and press

Return

again. If you are already logged on and you issue the

HELLO

command, you will be logged off your current session and logged on to a new session.

In certain instances, you may be required to furnish information in addition to the user and account names in your

HELLO

command. This information includes:

• Group name

• One or more passwords

• Terminal type code

Use

This command may be issued from a session. It may not be used from a job, program, or in

BREAK. Pressing

Break

does not abort the execution of this command, but may prematurely terminate the printing of the welcome message or the execution of any logon

UDCs. If you are already in a session,

HELLO

terminates that session before beginning a new one.

Group Name

The group you select at logon for your local file domain is known as your logon group. If your account manager has associated a home group with your

username

, and if you want this group as a logon group, you need not specify it. MPE/iX automatically assigns the

284 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HELLO

home group as your logon group when you log on. But if you want to use some other group as your logon group, you must specify that group's name in your logon command in this way:

MPE iX:HELLO USER.TECHPUBS,MYGROUP

If your user name is not related to a home group, you must enter a group name in your

HELLO

command, or your logon attempt is rejected.

Once you log on, if the normal (default) file security provisions of MPE/iX are in force, you have unlimited access to all files in your logon and home groups. Furthermore, you can read files and execute programs stored in the

PUB

(public) group of your account and the

PUB

(public) group of the

SYS

(system) account. You cannot, however, access any other files in any way. Further information about files and file security can be found in the Accessing

Files Programmer's Guide (32650-60010).

Passwords

To enhance the security of an account, and to prevent unauthorized accumulation of charges against the account, the system manager may assign a password. Similarly, an account manager may associate passwords with the user names and groups belonging to his account. If you are using an account, user name, or group (other than your home group) that has a password, you must furnish that password when you log on. Include the password after the name of the protected entity, separated from that name by a slash mark

(

). (In MPE/iX, the slash denotes security.)

For instance, if the group

XGROUP

requires a password, and if you use this group as your logon group, you could enter the password in this fashion:

MPE iX:HELLO USER.TECHPUBS,XGROUP/XPASS

Note that when you specify your home group as your logon group, you need not enter a password, even if that group has such a password.

Sometimes, when logging on to the system, it is more convenient to have MPE/iX prompt you for any required passwords. You do this by omitting the passwords from the logon command. When you log on, the command is printed in the normal way; MPE/iX prompts you for the password, then turns echo off so that the password is not printed. If you enter the password incorrectly, the prompt reappears and you have two more chances to enter the password correctly. After the third incorrect entry, the message

INCORRECT PASSWORD

(CIERR 1441)

is displayed. You must then press

Return

to receive a new prompt and then enter the

HELLO

command to start a new logon process. Echo is turned on after all passwords are read.

Terminal Types

MPE/iX must be able to determine certain characteristics about your terminal, such as input and output speed, in order to conduct a session. If you log on using a different type of terminal than the type the system manager has configured, you must specify your terminal type when you log on. Refer to appendix C, "Terminal and Printer Types."

MPE iX:HELLO USER.TECHPUBS;TERM=10

Chapter 4 285

Command Definition F-K

HELLO

Example

When you initially log on to access MPE/iX, the system prompt appears as:

MPE iX:

When you subsequently log on to another account or group, the system prompt by default is a colon (unless you have altered it with the

SETVAR HPPROMPT

command) and appears as:

To start a session named

ALPHA

, with the user

USER

, the account

TECHPUBS

, the group

XGROUP

, and the group password

XPASS

, enter:

MPE iX:HELLO ALPHA,USER.TECHPUBS,XGROUP/XPASS

HP3000 Release: X.50.40 User Version : X.50.40 MON, DEC 12, 1994, 7:15 AM

Related Information

Commands

BYE

Manuals None

286 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HELP

HELP

Accesses the help subsystem (Native Mode)

Syntax

Direct access:

HELP

[ {

udcname commandname

[ {

keyword

,ALL } ]

commandfilename errormessage programfilename function name variable name

SUMMARY CLASS HELPSTUDY

EXPRESSIONS| VARIABLES | OPERATORS | FUNCTIONS } ]

Interactive (subsystem) access:

commandname

{ space or comma} [ {

keyword

,ALL } ]

HELPMENU

SUMMARY

CLASS

HELP

HELPSTUDY

Parameters

<omitted> If you specify the

HELP

command with no parameters, you enter the help facility subsystem in interactive mode. To return to the CI, enter

EXIT

. Refer to "Operation Notes."

udcname

Any existing UDC. To display all UDCs within a UDC file, specify the

command. Refer to

commandname

Any MPE/iX command. MPE/iX displays the command name and syntax.

In addition, a list of keywords for that command is displayed.

The

HELP

command also provides help on UDCs, command files, or program files. The search order is UDCs, built-in commands (MPE/iX), command files, and then program files. The search order for UDC's is user level, account level, and system level. The search order for command files and program files is determined by the contents of the CI variable

HPPATH

If the user's

HPPATH

does not contain the name of the current group, the user can print a command file from the current group, but cannot get help information.

For UDCs and command files, help displays the text of the user command, unless the file contains the

NOHELP

option. In those cases, the display is suppressed. In the case of program files, help displays a header identifying it as a program file and the fully qualified file name of the program file.

function name

Any CI evaluator function, eg: FINFO

keyword

One of the keywords described under the command parameter. All commands have the following keywords:

Chapter 4 287

Command Definition F-K

HELP

PARMS

OPERATION

EXAMPLE

PARMS

is short for parameter. Lists all parameters of the specified command.

Describes the use of the specified command.

Displays an example showing usage of the specified command.

ALL

Displays all parameters, operation information, and an example of the command.

variable name

Any CI predefined variable, eg: HPLASTJOB

commandfilename

Any existing command file. Refer to

commandname

, "Operation Notes," and

"Examples."

errrormessage

Any MPE/iX error message. The keywords are:

CIERR

nn programfilename

Any existing program file. Refer to

commandname

"Operation Notes," and "Examples."

SUMMARY

CLASS

A brief summary of changes found in MPE/iX, including a quick overview of the operation of the help facility.

A list of MPE/iX commands by functional class.

HELPSTUDY

A beginner's guide designed to familiarize novice users with the fundamentals of MPE/iX commands and command syntax.

EXPRESSIONS

A description of CI expresssions

FUNCTIONS

A list of all CI evaluator functions

VARIABLES

OPERATORS

HELP

ALL

EXIT

A list of all CI predefined variables

A list of expression operators, like +, -, etc.

The help facility entry on the

HELP

command.

Displays the entire table of contents and the contents of each

keyword

for the

HELP

command.

Exits the help subsystem. Help for the CI

EXIT

command is not available in interactive mode. To get help for the CI

EXIT

command, specify the direct mode in the form

HELP

EXIT ALL

Operation Notes

You use the

HELP

command to display information about MPE/iX in one of two ways: by omitting command parameters to enter the Help subsystem or by getting information about a single command from the colon prompt.

Using HELP as a subsystem

288 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HELP

Enter the

HELP

command without specifying any parameters to invoke

HELP

as a subsystem. You will see the first screen of Help, called HELPMENU. It lists the choices available to you so that you can review the operation of Help and get a brief overview of the changes found in the MPE/iX operating system.

Once you are in the Help Subsystem, you display information by entering the name of the command, UDC, error message, variable, expression, function or other item that you want at the greater-than (

) prompt. For example:

:HELP

>FINFO

Syntax: FINFO(filename, option)

Defn: A CI evaluator function that returns information about

the specified file.

Type: String, integer, or Boolean depending upon option.

Example: FINFO('x.pub',"EXISTS")

Result: TRUE

Example: FINFO('jeff',"eof")

Result: 71495

The following table summarizes the options of the FINFO function.

The description includes the option number, one or more aliases, the data type, and a brief description of the option.

Num Alias Data Type Option Description

- - -

0 EXIST Boolean Existence of file

1 FILENAME ONLY String File name

(24/225) Continue?

To display information up to the next keyword or command, press

Return

. HELP provides a page break for every 23 lines of output and pressing

Return

allows you to continue.

Chapter 4 289

Command Definition F-K

HELP

not

precede the command or item name with

HELP

, or you will get an error message. For example:

:HELP

>HELP FINFO

Can't find this keyword.

To exit the Help Subsystem, enter

EXIT

' or press

Break

. To stop the display and return to a system prompt, enter

CTRL Y

. temporarily stops the display, enter

CTRL S

. Use

CTRL Q

to resume.

Using HELP in direct mode

Enter

HELP

followed by the name of the command, UDC, error number or other keyword to display the information you need without entering the Help Subsystem. Entering any command name produces the syntax for that command and a list of the

keywords

. Entering a keyword such as

PARMS

produces a listing of all the items for that

keyword

For example:

HELP ABORT

ABORT

Aborts current program or operation.

Syntax

ABORT

KEYWORDS: PARMS,OPERATION,EXAMPLE

Notice that in direct mode, MPE/iX displays the CI prompt (

) once it has displayed the information you wanted.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command.

Examples

To see the parameters for the

LISTFILE

command, enter:

:HELP LISTFILE PARMS

To see examples of the

STORE

command, enter:

:HELP STORE EXAMPLES

To see the same information from within the Help subsystem, enter:

:HELP

>STORE EXAMPLES

To see a list of predefined variables in MPE/iX, at the colon prompt enter:

:HELP VARIABLES

Several global variables have been pre-assigned by the command

interpreter. They may be used anywhere you would use your own

variables.

All global variables are listed in the table below. To get help

with a specific variable, at the colon (:) prompt type "HELP"

followed by the variable name, for example, "HELP HPCIDEPTH".

290 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

HELP

At the Help facility prompt (>), simply type the variable name,

for example, "HPCIDEPTH".

Global Variable Types

=================================================================

R READ ONLY variable (cannot be modified).

W READ/WRITE variable (can be modified).

JCW A standard MPE/iX JCW.

I Integer format.

B Boolean format (TRUE/FALSE).

(24/225) Continue?

LINKALL

is a command file,

HELP

displays the file as follows:

HELP LINKALL.TEST.UI

User-Defined Command File:LINKALL.TEST.UI

Parm streamflag=...

....

VERSION.PUB.SYS

is a program file,

HELP

displays:

HELP VERSION.PUB

program file: VERSION.PUB.SYS

If the UDC

LISTF

contains the

NOHELP

option (as shown in the sample below) the

HELP command will suppress the listing of this UDC, and displays the text for the built-in command

LISTF

instead.

listf

option NOHELP

showme

*****

If the UDC

MYUDC

(which is not the name of any MPE/iX command) contains the

NOHELP option, then the Help facility displays an error.

Related Information

Commands None

Manuals

System Startup, Configuration, and Shutdown Reference Manual

Chapter 4 291

Command Definition F-K

IF

Used to control the execution sequence of a job, UDC, or command file. (Native Mode)

Syntax

expression

[ THEN]

Parameters

expression

Logical expression, consisting of operands and relational operators. The operators listed in Table 4-1 may be incorporated in

expression

Table 4-1 Logical Operators - The IF Command

Logical operators:

Boolean functions and values:

Comparison operators:

Bit manipulation operators:

Arithmetic operators:

Functions returning strings:

Functions returning integers:

Other functions:

AND, OR, XOR, NOT

BOUND, TRUE, FALSE, ALPHA, ALPHANUM,

NUMERIC, ODD

=, <>, <, >, <=, >=

LSL, LSR, CSR, CSL, BAND, BOR, BXOR, BNOT

MOD, ABS, * , / , + , -, ^ (exponentiation)

CHR, DWNS, UPS, HEX, OCTAL, INPUT, LFT, RHT, RPT,

LTRIM, RTRIM, STS

ABS, LEN, MAX, MIN, ORD, POS, TYPEOF

FINFO, SETVAR

The allowed operands are any variable, integer, string, or Boolean constants, and the

MPE/iX reserved words are

WARN

FATAL

SYSTEM,

and

Compound logical expressions can be formed using the AND, NOT, XOR, and OR logical operators, and nested within parentheses.

The

THEN

keyword is optional. It may be used or omitted and has no effect on the results.

292 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

Operation Notes

This command begins an IF block consisting of all the commands after the

command up to, but not including, the next ELSE. ELSEIF, or ENDIF statement. The ELSE, ELSEIF, or ENDIF must have the same nesting level as the IF statement. Another similar block can follow the ELSE statement.

Nesting of the blocks is allowed to 30 levels so long as IF is used alone. In a case where IF is used with WHILE the total nesting of IF and WHILE blocks cannot exceed 30 levels.

Each IF or WHILE block read by the Command Interpreter increments the nesting count even if it resides within a

different

UDC or COMMAND file.

The ENDIF statement ends the IF block. The logical expression is evaluated and, if the expression evaluates to TRUE, the IF block is executed; if FALSE, the ELSE or ELSEIF block (if one exists) is executed.

NOTE

You may not write an IF construct in such a way that it physically crosses from one user command (UDCs or command files) to another.

Use

This command may be issued from a job, session, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect unless

expression

contains the INPUT evaluator function.

Example

The following job listing illustrates the use of an IF statement with ELSE and ENDIF statements:

!CONTINUE

!PASXL MYPROG,MYUSL

!IF JCW>=FATAL THEN

! TELL USER.TECHPUBS;COMPILE FAILED

!ELSE

! TELL USER.TECHPUBS;COMPILE COMPLETED

!ENDIF

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

CALC

ELSE

ELSEIF

ENDIF

WHILE

ENDWHILE

ESCAPE

RETURN

Appendix B, "Expression Evaluator Functions"

Chapter 4 293

Command Definition F-K

INPUT

INPUT

Permits the user to assign a value interactively to any variable that could otherwise be set with the

SETVAR

command. The user may also create an optional prompt string and have it displayed on

$STDLIST

before the value is read. (Native Mode)

Syntax

INPUT

[ NAME=]

varname

[ ;PROMPT=

prompt

] [ ;WAIT=

seconds

] [ ;READCNT=

chars

]

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

varname

Any variable (that can be set with

SETVAR

) in which the input string from

$STDIN

is stored. If

varname

does not already exist,

INPUT

creates it.

prompt seconds chars

The prompt string that is to be displayed on the standard listing device. If

prompt

is omitted, nothing displays, but

INPUT

then waits for an input value to store in

varname

. To include delimiters, for example, a comma (

) or semicolon (

;

) as part of the prompt string, you must surround the entire prompt string with quotation marks (“ or ”).

A positive value specifying the number of seconds for a timed read. If a value is assigned to

seconds

, the prompt waits

seconds

for input and then terminates the command. The default is zero, no time limit.

The number of characters you want read from $STDIN. If chars is specified as a negative number, INPUT uses the absolute integer value. The maximum allowed (and the default) is the maximum size of a CI variable, which is currently 1024 characters.

Operation Notes

This command allows the user to assign a value interactively to a variable. It also allows the user to create an optional prompt message that is displayed on the standard list device

(

$STDLIST

) before the value is read. This command provides a way to establish an interactive dialog with an executing UDC or command file. If it does not already exist, the variable

varname

is always created by

INPUT

. If you want to delete

varname

before ending a session, job, or program, use

DELETEVAR

varname

. Refer to the

DELETEVAR

command.

CI input redirection can be used to set

varname

to a record in a file.

NOTE

If a colon (

) is read by the

INPUT

command at any level other than the root level CI, the error message

END OF FILE ON INPUT.

(CIERR 900)

is returned.

294 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

INPUT

INPUT

reads a value from the standard input device (

$STDIN

) and stores it as a string in the variable named

varname

. If

varname

does not exist,

INPUT

creates it. If

prompt

is omitted, nothing is displayed, and

INPUT

waits for an input value to store in

varname

. The variable

varname

can be used as you would use any other MPE/iX string variable.

CI input redirection can be used to set varname to a record in a file.

NOTE

The

INPUT

command does not evaluate an expression before assigning its value to

varname

. The command recognizes only strings. Expressions such as 9

+ 3 are treated as strings, even though they are not surrounded by quotation marks (“ or ”).

The user may optionally specify a timed read by creating a value for

seconds

. The pending read prompt is canceled after

seconds

. The

INPUT

command recognizes the

HPTIMEOUT variable. The length of the timed read is

seconds

HPTIMEOUT

(in minutes), whichever is smaller. If a timed read (using

seconds

HPTIMEOUT

) expires, then the pending read terminates.

• If

varname

already exists and you enter a null (a

Return

), then the value of

varname

remains unchanged.

• The same thing happens if

varname

exists and

seconds

HPTIMEOUT

expires before a value for

varname

is entered. In this case, however, a warning occurs, and

CIERROR

is set to 9003.

• If

varname

does not exist and a null (a

Return

) is entered for the variable value, then

varname

is created and set to null (““).

• If

varname

does not exist and

seconds

HPTIMEOUT

expires, then

varname

is created and set to null (““), and

CIERROR

is set to 9003.

• If the timed read expires due to the value of the

HPTIMEOUT

variable, for example,

HPTIMEOUT=1

(in minutes) and the user executes

INPUT bleep,,65

, then the session is logged off.

Use

This command is available in a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command, without creating or modifying

varname

Examples

The

INPUT

command does not evaluate expressions, it stores them as a string. For example, the command

INPUT bleep

accepts and stores input (

somevalue

). If you want

somevalue

treated as an expression and evaluated and the result assigned to bleep

(as opposed to assigning the string representation of

somevalue

), use the

SETVAR

command after using the

INPUT

command:

INPUT bleep

SETVAR bleep !bleep

Chapter 4 295

Command Definition F-K

INPUT

The first command reads whatever value you enter and sets bleep

to the string representation of that input. The second command assigns bleep

the (evaluated) value that you entered.

INPUT MYVAR <FILEONE

The above example reads the first record in FILEONE into the CI variable named MYVAR.

In order to read the entire contents of a file INPUT must be in a WHILE loop and the while loop must have its $STDIN redirected to the file. Eg: READFILE <FILENAME , where

READFILE looks like:

SETVAR EOF FINFO(HPSTDIN, ‘EOF’)

WHILE SETVAR (EOF, EOF-1) >=0 DO

INPUT MYVAR

...

ENDWHILE

Table 4-2 illustrates how the INPUT command functions.

Table 4-2 INPUT Command Function

INPUT bleep

and the user responds with:

001

“001“

TRUE

9+3

Return

What is stored in bleep

001

“001“

TRUE

9+3

(null) or bleep

is not modified if it already exists

Value* of bleep after

SETVAR bleep !bleep

1 (integer)

001 (string)

TRUE (Boolean)

12 (integer)

<<error from the parser>>

* The result is an error if the user responds with an

unquoted

string:

INPUT BLEEP,>

>ABC

Return

SETVAR BLEEP !BLEEP

ABC

is not a number. And, without quotes around it,

ABC

is not a string, either. If

ABC

is not a defined variable, it has no value to extract. So, the attempt to evaluate the result of explicitly dereferencing,

!BLEEP

produces an error. Refer to the

SETVAR

command.

Related Information

Commands

DELETEVAR

SETVAR

SHOWVAR

INPUT( )

function

Manuals Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Advanced Skills (31126A Opt. 002)

296 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

JOB

JOB

Defines a job to be activated with the

STREAM

command or an input spooled device to run in batch mode. (Native Mode)

Syntax

JOB[

jobname

username

[ /

userpass

]

.acctname

[ /

acctpass

] [ ,

groupname

[ /

grouppass

]]

[TIME=

cpusecs

] [;PRI= BS | CS | DS | ES]

[;INPRI=

inputpriority

;HIPRI] [ ;RESTART] [;JOBQ=

queuename

]

[;OUTCLASS=[[DEVICE][,[OUTPUTPRIORITY][ ,NUMCOPIES]]]]

[;TERM={

termtype

}][ ;PRIVATE][ ;SPSAVE]

Parameters

jobname username userpass

Arbitrary name used with

username

and

acctname

parameters to form a job identity. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. Default is that no job name is assigned.

User name, established by the account manager, that allows you to log on to this account. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

User password, optionally assigned by account manager. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. If a password exists, but is

not

supplied in the command syntax, the

STREAM

command will prompt you for it if:

acctname acctpass

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

JOB

command is a first level

JOB

command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

If the password is supplied in the command syntax it must be preceded by a slash (

Account name as established by the system manager. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The

acctname

parameter must be preceded by a period (

Account password, optionally assigned by the system manager. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. If a password exists, but is

not

supplied in the command syntax, the

STREAM

command will prompt you for it if:

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

Chapter 4 297

Command Definition F-K

JOB

queuename groupname grouppass

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

JOB

command is a first level

JOB

command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

If the password is supplied in the command syntax it must be preceded by a slash (

The name of the job queue the job will execute in. The default job queue is

HPSYSJQ, which is a global queue for all jobs not associated with an individual job queue

Group name to be used for the local file domain and for CPU-time charges, as established by the account manager. The name must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.

Default is home group if one is assigned. (Required if a home group is not assigned.)

Group password, optionally assigned by the account manager. The password must contain from one to eight alphanumeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character. The group password is not needed when you log on to your home group. It is needed when you log on under any other group for which a password exists. If a password is needed, but is

not

supplied in the command syntax, the

STREAM

command will prompt you for it if:

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

JOB

command is a first level

JOB

command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

If the password is supplied in the command syntax it must be preceded by a slash (

cpusecs

Maximum CPU time allowed job, in seconds. When this limit is reached, the job is aborted. This must be a value from 1 to 32,767. To specify no limit, enter a question mark or

UNLIM

, or omit this parameter. Default is a system-configured job limit.

, or

The execution priority queue that the command interpreter uses for your session. This is also the default priority for all programs executed within the session. BS is the highest priority; ES is the lowest. If you specify a priority that exceeds the highest priority permitted for your account or user name by the system, MPE/iX assigns the highest priority possible below BS. DS and ES are intended primarily for batch jobs; their use for sessions is generally discouraged. DS is the default and the maximum priority, unless modified by system management.

NOTE

Use care in assigning the BS queue. Processes in this priority class can lock out other processes.

298 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

JOB

For information on the guidelines for these priority queues, refer to the

TUNE command in this chapter.

inputpriority

HIPRI

Determines the input priority of the job. The

inputpriority

parameter is the relative input priority used in checking against access restrictions imposed by the jobfence. The

inputpriority

parameter takes effect at logon time and must be from 1 (lowest priority) to 13 (highest priority). If you supply a value less than or equal to the current jobfence set by the system operator, the job is denied access. Default is 8.

The

HIPRI

option is used for two different purposes when logging on. It can be used to override the system jobfence, or it can be used to override the job limit. When using the

HIPRI

INPRI

defaults to the system's jobfence and execution limit. If you do not have either of these capabilities, the system attempts to log you on using

INPRI=13

and succeeds if the jobfence is 12 or less, and if the job limit is not exceeded. In attempting to override the job limit (to log on after the maximum number of jobs set by the operator has been reached), you can specify

HIPRI

, but to do so you must have either SM or

OP capability. The system does not override the job limit automatically.

Use of the

HIPRI

option without SM or OP capability causes the following warning to be displayed:

RESTART

device

MUST HAVE 'SM' OR 'OP' CAP. TO SPECIFY HIPRI,

MAXIMUM INPRI OF 13 IS USED (CIWARN 1460)

Request to restart a spooled job that has been interrupted by the system termination/restart. This parameter takes effect automatically when the system is subsequently restarted with the

START RECOVERY

option. The effect is to resubmit the job in its original form.

This parameter applies only to jobs initiated on spooled input devices. It is ignored for other jobs. Default is that spooled jobs are not restarted after system termination/restart.

Class name or logical device number (

ldev

) of the device to receive listing output. You cannot specify a magnetic tape unit. If the parameter is not a valid LDEV or class name, an error is generated. Default is defined in the system configuration.

NOTE

Nonshareable device (ND) file access capability is required in order to use this parameter.

outputpriority

The output priority for job list file, if destined for spooled line printer. This parameter is used to select the next spooled device file (on disk) for output, from among all those contending for a specific printer. Must be a value from 1 (lowest priority) to 13 (highest priority). When

outputpriority

is 1, output is always deferred. To have output printed from disk, use an

outputpriority

of 2 or greater.

Chapter 4 299

Command Definition F-K

JOB

numcopies termtype

PRIVATE

SPSAVE

NOTE

This parameter applies only to output destined for spooled output devices, and is ignored for other output. Default is 8.

Number of copies of job listing to be produced. This parameter applies only when listing is directed to a spooled device, and is ignored in other cases. If the number of copies is less than 1, a warning is issued. The command still executes with the default value of 1. If the number of copies is greater than

127, an error message is printed, and 127 copies are printed. Default is 1.

The

TERM=

option is obsolete now that the

JOB

command cannot be used interactively. In order to maintain backward compatability, the

termtype

parameter is still parsed, but it is not used. If the

TERM=

option is used, a warning message will be displayed.

The

PRIVATE

option forces the job output

$STDLIST

to be a private spoolfile. The spoolfile is only accessible to privileged users on the system.

Private spoolfiles may not be saved or copied. They may only be purged, printed, or (within limits) altered.

If this option is used, the resulting job output

$STDLIST

spoolfile is created with an

SPSAVE

disposition. This means that the spoolfile is not to be purged after the last copy of it has been printed, but is instead retained in the

OUT.HPSPOOL

group.

SPSAVE

may not be used if

PRIVATE

has been specified.

The "&" symbol has no meaning to the input spooler when it reads records because the CI is not involved at that point.

Operation Notes

The

JOB

command is not used at the colon prompt (

). Rather, it is used in interactive mode with the

STREAM

command at the

prompt, or within an input jobfile, created to define a batch job. The job defined with this command is then activated (executed) with the

STREAM

command.

The

JOB

command is preceded by an appropriate substitute prompt character for the colon prompt. By default, MPE/iX expects the exclamation point (

) to be used. The

JOB command must be terminated with an

EOJ

command. Refer to the

STREAM

command.

When MPE/iX begins the job, it displays the following information on the list device:

• Job number, as assigned by MPE/iX to identify the job.

• Date and time.

• “HP 3000,“ and the modified and base MPE/iX

version.update.fix

numbers.

In the

JOB

command, as in the

HELLO

command, you must always supply your

username

and

acctname

, which you obtain from your account manager. If you omit either of these parameters, or enter them incorrectly, MPE/iX rejects your job and prints error messages on the standard listing device and the console. If your job is accepted, MPE/iX begins job processing. The job is entered with the

STREAM

command or through a spooled input device. Then the job is copied to an input spoolfile. The job is initiated from that spoolfile

300 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

JOB

rather than the originating diskfile (in the case of the

STREAM

command) or device (in the case of the input spooled device). If the standard listing file is a line printer, MPE/iX prints a header page prior to listing the

JOB

command. (The system operator can disable the printing of this header page with the

HEADOFF

console command.)

The job number assigned by MPE/iX always uniquely identifies your job to MPE/iX and other users. MPE/iX assigns such numbers in sequential order as jobs are accepted.

Sometimes, the job acceptance information includes a message from the system operator following the standard display. When present, this is the same message output in the logon information for sessions.

The minimum information needed for job initiation is the user and account name.

However, the following also may be required:

• Logon group name.

• User, account, and/or group passwords.

The cases in which this information is required, and the rules for supplying it, are the same as those for the

HELLO

command for sessions, except that:

• When you enter the

JOB

command through a device other than a terminal, and the standard input device is different from the standard listing device, MPE/iX does not echo passwords.

• When the standard listing device is a line printer and you do not specify a file group name, central processor time limit, execution priority, and/or input priority in the

JOB command, the default values assigned by MPE/iX for the omitted parameters appear on the job listing.

The

STREAM

command prompts for any necessary passwords that are not supplied in the command syntax if:

• The

STREAM

command is invoked from a session.

• Neither $STDIN nor $STDLIST is redirected.

• The

JOB

command is a first level

JOB

command (it is not nested within a second level

STREAM

command).

All UDCs are available from a job. Any subsystem or UDC that expects input from

$STDIN requires that input within your job stream file.

Use

This command may be issued only from a job file. It may not be used from a session, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command.

Example

The following example illustrates creating and using an ASCII file to define a batch job and then executing it with the

STREAM

command:

Chapter 4 301

Command Definition F-K

JOB

RUN EDITOR.PUB.SYS

/ADD

1 !JOB WXYZ,WRITER.TEC

2 !EDITOR

3 TEXT ABC

4 LIST ALL,OFFLINE

5 EXIT

6 !EOJ

/KEEP MYJOB

/EXIT

STREAM MYJOB

The following example shows using the

JOB

command in interactive mode with the

STREAM

command:

STREAM

>!JOB USER.TECHPUBS;OUTCLASS=12

Related Information

Commands

ABORTJOB

ALTJOB

BREAKJOB

SUSPENDJOB

RESUMEJOB

JOBFENCE

JOBPRI

STREAM

STREAMS

SHOWDEV, NEWJOBQ, LISTJOBQ

Manuals

Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Advanced Skills

MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

302 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

JOBFENCE

JOBFENCE

Defines the minimum input priority that a job or session must have in order to execute.

(Native Mode)

Syntax

JOBFENCE

priorityfence

Parameters

priorityfence

A number between 0 and 14, inclusive. Within this range, smaller numbers are less limiting; larger numbers more limiting.

Operation Notes

MPE/iX does not dispatch jobs or sessions with an input priority less than or equal to the

priorityfence

until their input priority is raised with the

ALTJOB

command, or until the jobfence is lowered. System managers and system supervisors may override the jobfence setting by logging on with the

HIPRI

parameter of the

JOB

HELLO

commands. Or, they may log on with an input priority greater than the jobfence as reported by the

SHOWJOB command.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be issued only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Examples

To defer all non-

HIPRI

jobs and sessions, first set the jobfence to 14, as shown below:

JOBFENCE 14

16:18/#J7/34/DEFERRED JOB INTRODUCED ON LDEV #10

16:18/#J8/35/DEFERRED JOB INTRODUCED ON LDEV #10

Then enter the

SHOWJOB

command to display the effect of the new jobfence.

SHOWJOB

JOBNUM STATE IPRI JIN JLIST INTRODUCED JOB NAME

#S26 EXEC 20 20 THU 4:17P OPERATOR.SYS

#J7 WAIT D 8 10S 12 THU 4:18P JOB1,FIELD.SUPT

#J8 WAIT D 8 10S 12 THU 4:18P JOB2,FIELD.SUPT

3 JOBS:

0 INTRO

2 WAIT; INCL 2 DEFERRED

1 EXEC; INCL 1 SESSIONS

0 SUSP

JOBFENCE= 14; JLIMIT= 5; SLIMIT=16

Finally, reset the jobfence to 6 to allow waiting jobs to log on:

Chapter 4 303

Command Definition F-K

JOBFENCE

JOBFENCE 6

16:21/#J7/34/LOGON FOR: JOB1,FIELD.SUPT ON LDEV #10

16:21/#J8/35/LOGON FOR: JOB2,FIELD.SUPT ON LDEV #10

Related Information

Commands

ABORTJOB

ALTJOB

BREAKJOB

JOB

SUSPENDJOB

RESUMEJOB

JOBPRI

STREAM

STREAMS

SHOWDEV

Manuals

Using the HP 3000 Series 900: Advanced Skills

MPE/iX Intrinsics Reference Manual

304 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

JOBPRI

JOBPRI

Sets or changes the default execution priority for batch jobs and sets a maximum execution priority for batch jobs. (Native Mode)

Syntax

JOBPRI

[

maxsubqueue

] [ ,

defaultsubqueue

]

Parameters

maxsubqueue

The maximum priority at which batch jobs are allowed to run. This overrides any job priority a user may have requested with the

JOB command. This parameter may be ES, DS, CS, or zero. If zero is specified, no limit is imposed on batch jobs. Default is no change in maximum priority.

defaultsubqueue

The default execution priority for batch jobs, which may be ES, DS, or CS.

This takes effect if a user does not specify an execution priority in the

JOB command. Default is no change in execution priority.

Operation Notes

The

maxsubqueue

parameter specified in the

JOBPRI

command takes precedence over

defaultsubqueue

. Therefore, selecting a default parameter greater than the value of

maxsubqueue

parameter does not affect job execution. Jobs are still initiated with the maximum priority parameter.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. System supervisor (OP) capability is required to execute this command.

Example

To raise the maximum execution priority so that batch jobs can run in any subqueue requested, enter:

JOBPRI 0

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

TUNE

SHOWQ

ALTPROC

Performing System Operation Tasks

Chapter 4 305

Command Definition F-K

JOBSECURITY

JOBSECURITY

Designates what level of user may request resources and control the execution of jobs.

(Native Mode)

Syntax

JOBSECURITY

[ { HIGH LOW } { ;PASSEXEMPT=

{ NONE} ,{ USER} ,{ XACCESS} ,{ MAX} } ]

Parameters

HIGH

Permits only the operator logged on at the console and users with SM capability to use job control commands.

LOW

omitted

Allows individual users to exercise control over their own jobs.

If you do not specify

HIGH

LOW

, the current job security status is displayed (high or low).

NONE

USER

XACCESS

, or

MAX

The

PASSEXEMPT

option set by the system manager, which has the following meaning:

NONE

All users must specify the required passwords to stream a job.

USER

Allows certain users to omit a job's password. The system manager can omit the password when streaming any job, account managers can omit passwords when streaming jobs that log onto their account and to which they have access, and users can omit passwords for jobs that match their logon identity and to which they have access.

XACCESS

MAX

Allows users with execute access to the job file to omit passwords when the job file logs on with the same identity as its owner or creator.

Sets both the

USER

and the

XACCESS

options of the

PASSEXEMPT

parameter. Specifying

MAX

is the only way to set both options since

USER

and

XACCESS

are otherwise mutually exclusive.

Operation Notes

The HIGH and LOW parameters of the JOBSECURITY command determine what kind of user may execute the ABORTJOB, ALTJOB, BREAKJOB and RESUMEJOB commands.

When JOBSECURITY is set to HIGH, only the operator may issue these commands. When

306 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

JOBSECURITY

it is set to LOW, any user may issue these commands for their own jobs (i.e., those where the job's user name and account matches the user's) and Account Managers may control the execution of any job in their account.

System managers may use the PASSEXEMPT parameter of the JOBSECURITY command to control password validation when users stream a job. If you have never used the

PASSEXEMPT parameter and if the HP Security Monitor is not installed, the initial state is NONE, which means that job passwords are required. When you reboot the system with a START RECOVERY the last PASSEXEMPT state is preserved.

PASSEXEMPT provides some of the functionality of the HP Security Monitor. For example, PASSEXEMPT=USER is equivalent to the stream privilege feature.

PASSEXEMPT=XACCESS is similar to the stream authorize feature with one difference: you may set the USER XACCESS options independently, whereas HP Security Monitor requires you to enable stream privilege when you want to enable the stream authorize feature.

JOBSECURITY checks for the existence of HP Security Monitor and, if necessary, combines the settings to produce appropriate output. When the PASSEXEMPT parameter is issued and the interaction with the HP Security Monitor produces a different result, you will see a warning and a notification that the HP Security Monitor is installed. The resulting command output is also displayed with the warning.

Use

You may issue the

JOBSECURITY

command from a session, job, program, or in BREAK.

Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be executed only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Example

To allow any user to abort, alter, break, or resume their own jobs, enter:

JOBSECURITY LOW

To find out the current job security status, enter:

:JOBSECURITY

JOB SECURITY IS HIGH. PASSEXEMPT IS NONE.

To set the password exemption to

USER

and then check the current status, enter:

:JOBSECURITY ;PASSEXEMPT=USER

:JOBSECURITY

JOB SECURITY IS LOW. PASSEXEMPT IS USER.

Suppose

PASSEXEMPT

is currently set to

USER

and you want to change it to

XACCESS

. To do so, enter:

:JOBSECURITY ;PASSEXEMPT=XACCESS

Then check the current status by entering:

:JOBSECURITY

JOB SECURITY IS LOW. PASSEXEMPT IS XACCESS.

Chapter 4 307

Command Definition F-K

JOBSECURITY

If the HP Security Monitor is installed with both stream privilege and authorization turned on, the

JOBSECURITY

command will display a warning when the output produces a different result.

:JOBSECURITY ;PASSEXEMPT=USER

Security Monitor is installed. Passexempt is MAX. (CIWARN 3128)

Related Information

Commands

ABORTJOB

ALTJOB

BREAKJOB

RESUMEJOB

JOBFENCE

Manuals

Performing System Operation Tasks

308 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LDISMOUNT

LDISMOUNT

Cancels a previously issued

LMOUNT

VSRESERVE

command. This informs the system that the volume set is no longer reserved system-wide. The equivalent native mode command is

VSRELEASESYS

. (Native Mode)

Syntax

LDISMOUNT

[ { * | |

volumesetname

} ] [ ,

groupname

[ .

acctname

] ]

Parameters

* or <blank> Specifies the home volume set for the group and account specified, or for the logon group and account if

groupname

groupname.acctname

is not specified.

volumesetname

An artificial component of a volume set name used to maintain backward compatibility with MPE V/E. The

volumesetname

can be a maximum of 8 characters.

groupname acctname

Used only for compatibility with MPE V/E. The

groupname

can be a maximum of 8 characters.

Used only for compatibility with MPE V/E. The

acctname

can be a maximum of 8 characters.

Operation Notes

The

LDISMOUNT

command negates a previously issued

LMOUNT

VSRESERVE

command. It informs MPE/iX that the volume set is no longer reserved system-wide.

Volume sets in MPE/iX are not tied to groups and accounts. This is different from the MPE

V/E scheme of disk partitioning.

Table 4-3 is a comparison of naming conventions for MPE/iX volume sets and MPE V/E private volumes. MPE/iX volume set names may consist of any combination of alphanumeric characters, including the underbar (_) and the period (.). The name must begin with an alphabetic character and consist of no more than 32 characters.

Table 4-3 Command Acceptance of Naming Conventions - LDISMOUNT Command

Specify MPE V/E xxxMOUNT Command

Accesses

myset.grp.acct

The volume set named myset.grp.acct

myset

The volume set named myset

logongrp.logonacct

MPE/iX VSxxxxxx

Command Accesses

The volume set named myset.grp.acct

The volume set myset

Chapter 4 309

Command Definition F-K

LDISMOUNT

*.grp.acct

The home volume set of the group grp

in account acct

myset_grp_acct

Error (name component longer than eight characters).

m_g_a

The volume set named m_g_a.logongrp.logonacct

, provided it exists. If it does not exist, an error is reported.

Causes an error.

The volume set named myset_grp_acct

The volume set name m.g.a

In MPE V/E, the name

V.G.A

indicates that

is the name of a volume set, that

is the name of a group, and that

is the name of an account.

MPE/iX accepts that name in that form, but no interpretation is made as to the referencing of

and

. Instead, MPE/iX accepts that name in that form, but no interpretation is made as to the referencing of

and

. MPE/iX treats

V.G.A.

as a single, long string name, just as it would treat

A_VERY_LONG_NAME_FOR_SOMETHING

MPE/iX does, however, accept the naming convention that was used for MPE V/E private volumes. Therefore,

LDISMOUNT V.G.A

succeeds, and

LDISMOUNT V

accesses the same volume set, provided you are logged on to account

, group

. The MPE V/E commands are able to “default“ the logon account and group.

However,

VSRESERVE V

succeeds only if there is a volume set

in existence. The MPE/iX commands do not call up any default specifications for group and account.

VSRESERVE

V.G.A

succeeds only if a volumeset

V.G.A

is online. With MPE/iX

VSxxxxxx

commands, the

.G.A

component of this name is interpreted as a string, neither more nor less specific than

_G _A

If a volume set is named according to the MPE V/E naming convention (

V.G.A

), you must use an unambiguous reference when using the MPE/iX volume set commands.

It is recommended that you not use the MPE V/E naming convention and the xxxMOUNT commands. Instead use the MPE/iX naming convention and the

VSxxxxxx

commands.

Alternating between MPE V/E and MPE/iX commands may lead to errors. For example,

MOUNT X

used in a job stream attempts to access a volume set named

X.logongrp.logonacct

, which may or may not be your intention.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be executed only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Examples

To release a volume set named

DATABASE.PAYROLL.ACCTNG

, enter:

LDISMOUNT DATABASE.PAYROLL.ACCTNG

You may also use the

VSRELEASESYS

command:

VSRELEASESYS DATABASE.PAYROLL.ACCTNG

310 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LDISMOUNT

Related Information

Commands

MOUNT

, ,

LMOUNT

DISMOUNT

DSTAT

VSRESERVE

VSRELEASE

Manuals

Volume Management Reference Manual

Chapter 4 311

Command Definition F-K

LIMIT

LIMIT

Limits the number of concurrently running jobs/sessions. (Native Mode)

Syntax

LIMIT[ { [+ | - ]

numberjobs

[+ | - ] ,

numbersessions

numberjobs,numbersessions

]

[;JOBQ=queuename]

Parameters

numberjobs numbersessions

<omitted>

queuename

Increment the limit value

Decrement the limit value

The number of jobs.

The number of sessions.

If you specify no parameter, a message is displayed listing the current limits.

The name of the job queue whose limit is being changed or displayed.

Operation Notes

Maximum job and session limits are established by the system supervisor during system configuration. Within these limits, the operator may redefine the job and session limit with the

LIMIT

command. When the system is restarted from disk in a

START RECOVERY

, the operator defined limits are retained. When any other startup option is used, the values configured by the supervisor take effect.

If you enter one parameter and omit the other, the limit of the omitted parameter remains unchanged.

No new jobs or sessions are dispatched that would cause either of these limits to be exceeded, unless they are initiated with the

HIPRI

parameter of the

JOB

HELLO commands.

Jobs that belong to individual job queues cannot begin execution while the specific job queue limit is exceeded. Even if a specific job queue limit is not exceeded, the global system job limit must also not be exceeded in order for the job to begin execution.

Non-

HIPRI

jobs can still be introduced when the limit is achieved, but they do not execute.

If you attempt to log on to a non-

HIPRI

session after the limit has been reached, you receive the message:

CAN'T INITIATE NEW SESSIONS NOW

The specified limits may be exceeded at the time the command is issued. This does not cause jobs or sessions executing at the time to abort. They continue to execute, but no new jobs are allowed to enter the executing state, and no new sessions are initiated.

312 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LIMIT

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

has no effect on this command. It may be issued only from the console unless distributed to users with the

ALLOW

command.

Examples

To limit the number of jobs to 2 and the number of sessions to 15, enter:

LIMIT 2,15

SHOWJOB

JOBNUM STATE IPRI JIN JLIST INTRODUCED JOB NAME

#S24 EXEC 20 20 TUE 1:54A OPERATOR.SYS

#S26 EXEC 177 177 TUE 5:01A CHEWY,RSPOOL.S

#S96 EXEC QUIET 35 35 TUE 8:31A SLIDES.SIMON

3 JOBS:

0 INTRO

0 WAIT; INCL 0 DEFERRED

3 EXEC; INCL 3 SESSIONS

0 SUSP

JOBFENCE= 6; JLIMIT= 2; SLIMIT= 15

To limit the number of sessions to 13, but retain the current job limit, enter:

LIMIT,13

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

HELLO

JOB, SHOWJOB, LISTJOBQ

Performing System Operation Tasks

Chapter 4 313

Command Definition F-K

LINK

LINK

Creates an executable program file by merging the relocatable object modules from all the files in its

FROM=

parameter. Those files may correspond to object files, relocatable files, or a combination of them. It also searches any relocatable libraries mentioned in the

RL= parameter list and merges any modules within those libraries that resolve an external reference. (Native Mode)

Syntax

LINK[ FROM=file[ ,

file

...] [ ;TO=

destfile

] ]

[ ;RL=

rlfile

[

rlfile

...]...]

[ ;XL=

xlfile

[

xlfile

...

]

...

]

[ ;CAP=

caplist

]

[ ;NMSTACK=

nmstacksize

]

[ ;NMHEAP=

nmheapsize

]

[ ;UNSAT=

unsatname

]

[ ;PARMCHECK

=checklevel

]

[ ;ENTRY

=entryname

]

[ ;NODEBUG] [

;

MAP] [;SHOW] [ ;SHARE]

[ ;PRIVLEV=

priv_level

]

[ ;PRI=

pri_level

]

[ ;MAXPRI=

max_pri_level

NOTE

This command follows the optional MPE/iX command line syntax. Refer to

"Optional Format for MPE/iX Commands" at the beginning of this chapter.

Parameters

file destfile rlfile

The name of an object file or a relocatable library file. It may be any binary file of type

NMOBJ

NMRL

. All relocatable objects in the

FROM=

specified list are merged to form the program file specified by

destfile

. If you omit this parameter,

LINK

merges the object modules in the file

$OLDPASS

The

FROM=

RL=

, and

XL=

parameters allow a series of file names. You may name each file individually, or you may provide an indirect file by preceding that file's name with the caret symbol (

The name of the program file (type

NMPRG

) where

LINK

places the resulting executable object module. If

destfile

does not exist,

LINK

creates a new one for you. If

destfile

does exist, it is destroyed and replaced by the object module created by the current link operation.

The name of a relocatable library file (type

NMRL

) that resolves an external reference made by an object module in the

FROM=

file list.

LINK

searches the relocatable libraries in the

list in the order in which you list them.

314 Chapter 4

xlfile caplist nmstacksize nmheapsize unsatname checklevel

Command Definition F-K

LINK

If a module from one library calls a routine in another library and then that routine in turn refers to a module in the first library, you may need to include the first library twice so that

LINK

can resolve this “circular“ reference.

The

FROM=

RL=

, and

XL=

parameters allow a series of file names. You may name each file individually, or you may provide an indirect file by preceding that file's name with the caret symbol (

The name of an executable library (type

NMXL

). The loader searches every executable library in the

list in an attempt to resolve external references that remain in a program file.

The list of capability attributes to be assigned to the program file. The program runs only if the group and account have matching capabilities.

(The system manager or account manager assigns these capabilities to your group and account.) Permissible values are:

BA = Local Batch Access

IA = Interactive Access

PM = Privileged Mode

MR = Multiple RINs

DS = Extra Data Segments

PH = Process Handling

If you omit this parameter, the BA and IA capabilities are assigned to the program file by default.

The maximum size, in bytes, to which the NM stack may grow. This must be a decimal number. The default is zero, which instructs MPE/iX to assign a system-defined constant as the value of

nmstacksize

The maximum size, in bytes, to which the NM heap may grow. This must be a decimal number. The default is -1, which instructs the command to assign a system-defined constant as the value of

nmheapsize

The name of a procedure that the loader substitutes in place of any external reference that cannot be resolved in a program file. If you omit this parameter and any external references remain unresolved, the loader reports a load-time error.

An integer specifying the maximum level of checking that

LINK

performs in binding external references to procedures. All checking levels that are indicated in external references and procedure definitions are reduced (but never increased) to the specified level. If you omit this parameter,

LINK sets the value to 3.

Permissible values for

checklevel

are defined in Table 4-4.

If the checking level is restricted (reduced) and reportable type errors are detected, they are reported not as errors but as warnings.

Chapter 4 315

Command Definition F-K

LINK

Table 4-4 Checklevel Values

No parameter check.

Check of the symbol type descriptor.

Perform Level 1 checking, then check the number of arguments that the import procedure passed against the minimum and maximum range that were declared in the export procedure.

Perform Level 2 checking, then check the type of each argument that was passed.

entryname

NODEBUG

MAP

SHOW

priv_level

The name (label) of the point within a program where execution begins.

When you omit this parameter, the loader begins execution from the primary program entry point (which corresponds to a program's main procedure or outer block). However, by including the

ENTRY=

option, you may override this default value and begin execution from the specified entry point. If the loader fails to find a symbol that matches the entry point name, it reports a load-time error.

Strips all symbolic debugging information from the resulting program file.

If you omit this parameter, the file contains debugging information if the source file was compiled with this option.

Prints a symbol map to the list file,

LINKLIST

Displays the name of each object module as it is being merged into the program file. You may include this option to verify the order in which

LINK processes each module.

Determines the privilege level used by the executable program file. This parameter changes the privilege level of all procedures in the symbol and export tables (of the relocatable object file) that were set during compilation.

The values for priv_level are:

0 system level access

2 unused privileged level access

3 user level access

The default is that privilege levels are set during compilation.

pri_level

Specifies the execution priority that the program will have at run time.

The

pri_level

has to be one of BS, CS, DS, ES, or a number between 100 and

255 inclusive. This value can be overridden by the

PRI=

keyword on the

RUN

command.

max_pri_level

Specifies the maximum execution priority that the program can have at run time. The

max_pri_level

has to be one of BS, CS, DS, ES, or a number between 100 and 255 inclusive.

316 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LINK

Specifies that data symbols should be exportable and importable (shared) in the resulting executable library.

Operation Notes

The Link Editor uses

$STDINX

$STDIN

, and

$STDLIST

as standard files. The Link Editor reads its commands from

$STDINX

. For interactive sessions this is the terminal keyboard.

For a batch job, it is the job stream file.

You can redirect

$STDINX

to another file. The file must be an unnumbered ASCII file containing valid HP Link Editor/iX commands. Enter a

RUN

command with the

STDIN option. For example, to use the file

SCRIPT

as the standard input file, enter the command:

RUN LINKEDIT.PUB.SYS;STDIN=SCRIPT

If you start the Link Editor using the

LINK

command, or if you execute it by passing a command in the

INFO

string of the

RUN

command,

$STDINX

is not used. Instead, the single command is executed and the Link Editor terminates.

The Link Editor writes all prompts, error messages, and other information to

$STDLIST.

During an interactive session, this is your terminal. For a batch job, the output spoolfile is used.

You can use another device for

$STDLIST.

Use the

RUN

command with the

STDLIST option. Note that when you do this interactively, the command prompts do not appear on the screen. For example, to send the Link Editor output to the printer:

FILE LINKOUT;DEV=LP

RUN LINKEDIT.PUB.SYS;STDLIST=*LINKOUT

Link Editor listings and maps are sent to the file

LINKLIST

, not to

$STDLIST

. The listings and maps sent to

LINKLIST

are:

• The symbol map produced by the

MAP

option of the

LINK

command.

• The listing produced by the

LISTPROG

command.

• The listing produced by the

LISTOBJ

command.

• The listing produced by the

LISTRL

command.

• The listing produced by the

MAP

option of the

ADDXL

command.

• The listings produced by the

LISTXL

command.

LINKLIST

output goes to

$STDLIST.

But you can redirect it to another file or device by using the

FILE

command. To send the listing of the relocatable library

LIBRL

to the printer:

FILE LINKLIST;DEV=LP

LINKEDIT

LinkEd> LISTRL RL=LIBRL

LinkEd> EXIT

Chapter 4 317

Command Definition F-K

LINK

Use

This command may be issued from a session, job, or program, but not in BREAK. Pressing

Break

suspends the execution of this command. Entering the

RESUME

command continues the execution.

Examples

This command merges the object modules from the

OBJCODE

and places them into the program

EXECPROG

. It assigns a program stack of 50,000 bytes and requests

LINK

to build a map and display the name of each object module as it is being linked.

LINK FROM=OBJCODE;TO=EXECPROG;NMSTACK=50000;MAP;SHOW

The following command merges the object modules from the

OBJCODE

into program file

EXECPROG

and searches the relocatable libraries

LINEDRAW

and

ARCDRAW

to resolve external references. The resulting program file can be executed only in batch mode by anyone with user mode access.

LINK FROM=OBJCODE;TO=EXECPROG;RL=LINEDRAW,ARCDRAW;CAP=BA

To link module A and module MAIN and share data so that the data symbols in the program file myprog

can be exported and imported to and from the executable library

MYXL

, enter:

LINK FROM=A,MAIN; TO=MYPROG; SHARE; RL=LIBCSHR.LIB.SYS; XL=MYXL

Related Information

Commands

RUN

XEQ

LINKEDIT

Utility

Manuals

HP Link Editor/XL Reference Manual

HP Link Editor/iX Technical Addendum

318 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LISTACCT

LISTACCT

Displays information about one or more accounts.

Syntax

LISTACCT

[

acctset

] [ ,

listfile

] [ ;PASS] [ ;FORMAT={ SUMMARY|BRIEF|DETAIL} ]

Parameters

acctset

The accounts to be listed. The default is all accounts for system managers

(SM). For all other users, the default is their logon account. Use the

# symbol to specify a single numeric character. Use the

symbol to specify a single alphanumeric character. Use the

symbol to specify zero or more alphanumeric characters. By itself,

represents all the members of a set.

Each of these wildcard characters counts toward the eight character limit for group, account, and file names.

listfile

PASS

FORMAT

The name of the output file. The default is

$STDLIST

, a temporary file that cannot be overwritten by a

BUILD

command. It is automatically specified as a new ASCII file with variable-length records, closed in the temporary domain, and with user-supplied carriage-control characters (

CCTL

), OUT access mode, and EXC (EXCLUSIVE access) option. All other characteristics are the same as they would be with the

FILE

command default specifications.

Permits account managers and system managers to see the password.

Specifies one of several display formats, listed below.

SUMMARY

Provides a summary of the account information. If

FORMAT is not specified,

SUMMARY

is the default.

BRIEF

DETAIL

Generates a list of account names only.

Displays all information associated with the account.

Operation Notes

This command produces account information in an ASCII format.

Use

This command is available from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command. System managers (SM) can list any account on the system; account managers (AM) and general users can list only their own account.

Chapter 4 319

Command Definition F-K

LISTACCT

Examples

The presence of the password in the following display implies that the user has account manager (AM) capability and this is the user's account, or that the user has system manager (SM) capability and this is not the user's account.

LISTACCT HPXLII;PASS

...or...

LISTACCT HPXLII;PASS;FORMAT=SUMMARY

********************

ACCOUNT: HPXLII

DISC SPACE: 754115(SECTORS) PASSWORD: ACCTPASS

CPU TIME : 3330(SECONDS) LOC ATTR: $00000000

CONNECT TIME: 102(MINUTES) SECURITY READ : ANY

DISC LIMIT: UNLIMITED WRITE : AC

CPU LIMIT: UNLIMITED APPEND : AC

CONNECT TIME: UNLIMITED LOCK : ANY

MAX PRI: 150 EXECUTE : ANY

GRP UFID : $00D0001 $80001050 $00138A20 $00000008 $000001FA

USER UFID : $00D4001 $80001050 $00138C20 $00000008 $000001FB

CAP: AM,AL,GL,DI,CV,UV,LG,CS,ND,SF,IA,BA,PH,DS,MR,PM

LISTACCT @;FORMAT=BRIEF

ACCOUNT1

ACCOUNT2

BACCT1

POSIX

SYS

LISTACCT POSIX;FORMAT=DETAIL

********************

ACCOUNT : POSIX

PASSWORD : **

GID : 50

DISC SPACE : 1163440(SECTORS)

CPU TIME : 199798(SECONDS)

CONNECT TIME : 1116561(MINUTES)

DISC LIMIT : UNLIMITED

CPU LIMIT : UNLIMITED

CONNECT LIMIT: UNLIMITED

MAX PRI : 150

LOC ATTR : $00000000

SECURITY : R:ANY, W:ANY, A:ANY, L:ANY, X:ANY

GRP UFID : $055A0003 $48C0B6B8 $000066B4 $918008B5 $0077B2D9

USER UFID : $055A0004 $48C0B6B8 $000066B4 $918008B5 $0077B2DF

CAP : SM,AM,AL,GL,DI,OP,CV,UV,LG,PS,NA,NM,CS,ND,SF,BA,IA,PM,MR,DS,PH

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

LISTFILE

LISTGROUP

LISTUSER

NEWACCT

PURGEACCT

ALTACCT

Performing System Management Tasks

320 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LISTDIR (UDC)

LISTDIR (UDC)

The

LISTDIR

UDC executes the

LISTFILE

command to list all files that are directories.

System-defined UDCs are not automatically available. Your System Manager must use the

SETCATALOG

command to make these UDCs available for your use. For example,

SETCATALOG HPPXUDC.PUB.SYS;SYSTEM;APPEND

Syntax

LISTDIR

[ [ DIR=]

dir_name

] [ [ FORMAT=]

format_opt

]

Parameters

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command for a complete explanation of the parameters used with the

LISTDIR

UDC. The following parameters are supported with the

LISTDIR

UDC.

dir_name format_opt

The name of the directory to list. The

dir_name

can be in MPE or HFS syntax; wildcards may be used. For example,

/SYS/PUB

/SYS/PUB/dir@

./abc/mydir

, and

@abc

are valid examples of directory names. If

dir_name

is not specified, the default directory name is

./@

(all directories directly under your current working directory).

An output format option. The option may be specified as a number or mnemonic. For example,

FORMAT=2

FORMAT=DISC

If not specified, the default is

FORMAT=6

(qualify).

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command for a complete description of each available format option.

Operation Notes

The

LISTDIR

UDC lists all files that are directories. The UDC executes the following form of the

LISTFILE

command:

LISTFILE

dir_name

;FORMAT=

format_opt

;SELEQ=[OBJECT=DIR] ;TREE

Use

This UDC may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts execution.

Examples

Refer to the

LISTFILE

command later in this chapter for examples.

Chapter 4 321

Command Definition F-K

LISTDIR (UDC)

Related Information

Commands

LISTFILE

FINDDIR

(UDC)

Manuals None

322 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LISTEQ

LISTEQ

Displays all active file equations for a job or session.

Syntax

LISTEQ

[

listfile

]

Parameters

listfile

The name of the output file. The default is

$STDLIST

, a temporary file that cannot be overwritten by a

BUILD

command. It is automatically specified as a new ASCII file with variable-length records, closed in the temporary domain, and with user-supplied carriage-control characters (

CCTL

OUT access mode, and

EXC

(EXCLUSIVE access) option. All other characteristics are the same as they would be with the

FILE

command default specifications.

Operation Notes

The

LISTEQ

command displays all the active file equations for a job or session.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command.

Example

An example of

LISTEQ

is given below:

LISTEQ

FILE EQUATIONS

FILE TAPE1;DEV=ATAPE

FILE PP;ENV=LP2.ENV.OSE;DEV=EPOC

FILE MYFILE,NEW;REC=-80,3,F,ASCII;DISC=5000;SAVE

FILE POSIX=./mydir/myfile1

Related Information

Commands

FILE

RESET

Manuals None

Chapter 4 323

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

LISTF

Displays information about one or more permanent files. (CM)

Syntax

LISTF

[ fileset] [ ,listlevel] [ ;listfile]

Parameters

fileset

Specifies the set of files to be listed. The default is

, which lists all files in your logon group. You may select the file(s) to be listed by using the fully or partly qualified form for fileset:

filename.groupname.accountname

You may use the

to specify zero or more alphanumeric characters or, if used by itself, to denote all the members of a set. You may use the symbol

# to specify one numeric character and the symbol

to specify one alphanumeric character. The

and

wildcard characters count toward the eight character limit for group, account, and file names.

listlevel

Specifies the amount and format of information to display for the file(s) you select. The default is 0, which displays only the file name. The

listlevel

of the

LISTF

command is equivalent to the format option of the

LISTFILE command. The levels are described below in Table 4-5:

Table 4-5 Format Options

−

Listlevel

−

Displayed Information

Displays the file's ACD (access control definition). System

Managers can view the ACD for any file. Account Managers can view the ACD for files in that account. File creators can view the ACD for their files. Other users can view an ACD only if that ACD specifies that the user has RACD (read ACD) access.

Shows only the file label in hexadecimal. The hexadecimal display generated by this format option only serves a diagnostic purpose in MPE/iX and is subject to change.

For each directory, this option displays

PATH=

The name of the file is displayed in a multicolumn format. This is the default.

Displays the file name, file code, record size, record format, and other file characteristics such as ASCII or binary records, carriage-control option, file type, current end-of-file location, and the maximum number of records allowed in the file.

324 Chapter 4

Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

Listlevel

−

Displayed Information

Displays the file name, file code, record size, file type, current end-of-file location, and the maximum number of records allowed in the file. It also displays the blocking factor, number of sectors in use, number of extents currently allocated, and the maximum number of extents allowed.

Displays the file name, record size, extent size, number of records, user's access rights, and other file characteristics including the date created, modified, and last accessed. The same information for MPE and HFS files is displayed except for the following differences:

• Fully qualified MPE file name is replaced by an absolute pathname.

• Creator field displays the fully qualified user ID of the file owner.

• For MPE groups, the SECURITY field displays

SAVE

; for entries other than MPE groups it is blank. All file access matrix fields are blank for anything other than

MPE accounts, MPE groups, and files in an MPE group.

• The LOCKWORD field is omitted.

The creator, group id, and label address are omitted in

FORMAT=3

. These can be obtained by specifying -3 if you have sufficient capability (AM or SM)

Displays the security matrix for the file. This includes account, group and file-level security, and the access rights for the user.

For MPE groups and MPE accounts, the security matrix for group, account, and account-only are displayed. The rest of the fields of the file access matrix are blank.

For HFS directories, and files within HFS directories, all the fields of the file access matrix are blank. In addition,

LISTFILE displays the message

ACD EXISTS.

Shows

LISTFILE,3

data and all file-specific data in

LISTFILE,3

type format (KSAM, SPOOL, and symbolic links).

If a file has no unique data, only the option 3 data is shown.

Shows the absolute pathname of the file.

325

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

listfile

Listlevel Displayed Information

Shows all file specific data in

LISTFILE,5

type format, but does not show

LISTFILE,3

data. If a file has no unique data, only the file name is displayed.

Shows all accessors of the files listed. Restrictions apply

Shows level 8 information and details about processes accessing the files including file locking data. Restrictions apply.

The name of the output file to which the file information will be written. If you omit this parameter, the output appears on $STDLIST. If you specify

listfile

, the output is sent to a temporary file created for this purpose. The temporary file is a new ASCII file with variable length records, closed in the temporary domain, and with user supplied carriage control characters

(CCTL),

OUT

access mode, and

EXC

(exclusive access) option. All other characteristics are identical to the

FILE

command default specifications.

You may specify a different kind of file or backreference an existing file.

When you direct

LISTF

output to $STDLIST from a job, or when you direct the output to any non-disk device, a date and time stamp preceeds the data, and

listlevel

0 data appears as one file per record rather than in the standard multi-column format.

Operation

The

LISTF

command displays a description of the file(s) you specified in

fileset

. It only accepts MPE file name syntax, but it displays information in one of two formats, MPE or

POSIX, depending upon whether or not your current group differs from your logon group.

MPE format examples appear below. For examples of the POSIX format, see the

LISTFILE command.

You may list any file, but there are restrictions on the kinds of information available to various users. A standard user may specify a

listlevel

of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. If you have account manager capability (AM), you may request

listlevel

-1, -3 or -5, 8, 9 information about files in your own account. If you have System Manager capability (SM), you can specify any

listlevel

to view all information for all files on the system. List levels 8 and 9 are also available if you are the owner of the files.

For list levels 8 and 9 the IP address of remote accessors and the program name of the accessor process are restricted fields. PM, SM, OP, NA, or NM capabilities are needed to see the IP address. The rules defined by the

SHOWPROC

command are enforced before revealing the process name.

The

LISTF

command does not display

#SEG

STACK

MAXDATA

TOTAL

CAP

values for program files. That information is displayed by the

VERSION

utility. For more information, see the

VERSION

command.

326 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

You may have the information displayed on a device other than the standard listing device.

To do that, you will need to name the device with a

FILE

command and then backreference the file in the

LISTF

command. For example:

:FILE PRTR;DEV=LP

:LISTF @.@,2;*PRTR

Use

The

LISTF

command is available from a session, job, or a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command.

Examples

Level 0 File Display

:LISTF

FILENAME

CLKLIST CLOCK EDIRC LINKCLK LINKFROG LINKLIST

Level 1 File Display

: LISTF L@,1

ACCOUNT= HPXLII GROUP= DEVELOP

FILENAME CODE -LOGICAL RECORD

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT

L2 80B FA 2 12

LINKCLK 72B FA 1 11

LINKFROG

LINKLIST

72B FA 1 11

72B FA 8 18

Level 2 File Display

:LISTF L@,2

ACCOUNT= HPXLII GROUP= DEVELOP

FILENAME CODE -LOGICAL RECORD- SPACE

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT R/B SECTORS #X MX

LINKCLK 72B FA 1

LINKFROG 72B FA 1

LINKLIST 72B FA 8

11 3

18 3

1 1

Level 3 File Display

:LISTF DOCMNTS,3

********************

FILE DOCMNTS.DEVELOP.HPXLII

FCODE O FOPTIONS STD,ASCII,FIXED,NOCCTL

BLK FACTOR 16 CREATOR **

REC SIZE 80(BYTES) LOCKWORD **

BLK SIZE 640(BYTES) SECURITYREAD : ANY

EXT SIZE 25(SECT) WRITE : ANY

NUM REC 501 APPEND : ANY

NUM SEC 165 LOCK : ANY

NUM EXT 7 EXECUTE: ANY

MAX REC 501 **SECURITY IS ON

MAX EXT 7 FLAGS n/a

NUM LABELS 0 CREATED FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 11:55 AM

MAX LABELS 0 MODIFIED FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 12:34 PM

Chapter 4 327

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

DISC DEV # 3 ACCESSED FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 12:46 PM

CLASS DISC LABEL ADDR **

SEC OFFSET 0

VOLSET MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET

VOLNAME MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET: MEMBER1

VOLCLASS MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET: DISC

CLASS : DISC LABEL ADDR: $00000010 $0010E014

Level 6 File Display

:LISTF L@,6

LINKCLK.DEVELOP.HPXLII

LINKFROG.DEVELOP.HLPXLII

LINKLIST.DEVELOP.HPXLII

Level 7 File Display

********************

FILE: LINKCLK.DEVELOP.HPXLII

********************

FILE: LINKFROG.DEVELOP.HLPXLII

********************

FILE: LINKLIST.DEVELOP.HPXLII

Level 8 File Display

:listfile hppxudc.pub.sys,8

********************

FILE: HPPXUDC.PUB.SYS

15 Accessors(O:15,P:15,L:0,W:0,R:15),Share

#S265 MIKEP.HPE

#S263 JEFFV,MGR.JVNM

P:2,L:0,W:0,R:2

P:3,L:0,W:0,R:3

#S261 KROGERS.MPENT

#S231 SUSANC.MPENT

#S219 FAIRCHLD.MPENT

#S214 CATHY,MGR.BOSS

#J434 FTPMON,FTP.SYS

P:2,L:0,W:0,R:2

Level 9 File Display

:listfile hppxudc.pub.sys,9

********************

FILE: HPPXUDC.PUB.SYS

5 Accessors(O:5,P:5,L:5,W:0,R:5),Share

#S263 JEFFV,MGR.JVNM

P:3,L:3,W:0,R:3

#P147 (LFCI.PUB.SYS)

ACCESS: R-excl

LOCKSOwner

FLOCK

Waiter

OPEN

#P154 (CI.PUB.SYS)

ACCESS: R-excl

LOCKS: none

#P86 (JSMAIN.PUB.SYS)

ACCESS: R-excl

LOCKSOwner Waiter

FLOCK

REC#: 0

REC#: 336

#J434 FTPMON,FTP.SYS

#P79 (CI.PUB.SYS)

ACCESS: R-excl

LOCKS: none

#P47 (JSMAIN.PUB.SYS)

P:2,L:2,W:0,R:2

REC#: 0

LDEV: 49

LDEV: 47

LDEV: 50

LDEV: 46

LDEV: 39

REM : 15.14.16.198

SPID: #O21905

LDEV: 47

FNUM: 13

FNUM: 16

SPID: #O21905

FNUM: 14

328 Chapter 4

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

ACCESS: R-excl

LOCKSOwner Waiter

OPEN FLOCK

Level -2 File Display

FILENAME ACD ENTRIES

REC#: 336

DOCMNTS NO ACDS

Level -3 File Display

:LISTF DOCMNTS,-3

********************

FILE DOCMNTS.DEVELOP.HPXLII

FCODE O FOPTIOc

NS STD,ASCII,FIXED,NOCCTL 15496000

BLK FACTOR 16 CREATOR PETE

REC SIZE 80(BYTES) LOCKWORD RETEP

BLK SIZE 640(BYTES) SECURITYREAD : ANY

EXT SIZE 25(SECT) WRITE : ANY

NUM REC 501 APPEND : ANY

NUM SEC 165 LOCK : ANY

NUM EXT 7 EXECUTE: ANY

MAX REC 501 **SECURITY IS ON

MAX EXT 7 FLAGS n/a

NUM LABELS 0 CREATED FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 1155 AM

MAX LABELS 0 MODIFIED FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 1234 PM

DISC DEV # 3 ACCESSED FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 12:46 PM

CLASS DISC LABEL ADDR $00000010 $0010E014

SEC OFFSET 0

Level 4 File Display

:LISTF DOCMNTS,4

FNUM: 15

********************

FILE DOCMNTS.DEVELOP.HPXLII

SYSTEM READ : ANY

SECURITYWRITE : AC

(ACCT) APPEND : AC

LOCK : ANY

EXECUTE : ANY

SYSTEM READ : GU

SECURITYWRITE : GU

(GROUP) APPEND : GU

LOCK : GU

EXECUTE : GU

SAVE : GU

SECURITYREAD : ANY FCODE 0

(FILE) WRITE : ANY CREATOR PETE

APPEND : ANY LOCKWORD

LOCK : ANY **SECURITY IS ON

EXECUTE : ANY

FOR PETE.HPXLII READ,WRITE,APPEND,LOCK,EXECUTE

Level -1 File Display

:LISTF LINKCLK,-1

F = LINKCLK

00000001 44495343 20202020 20202020 20202020 20202020 [email protected]

20202020 20202020 20202020 20310000 4C495354 53202020 DEVELOP ...

20202020 20202020 44455645 4C4F5020 20202020 20202020 HPXLII .

00000000 4850584C 49492020 20202020 20202020 00000000 ...PETE

52455445 50202020 20202020 20202020 50455445 20202020 .|..,2....#.,7.6

20202020 20202020 00000000 FC000000 04580001 13915EF4 ,2.|..#.,2.....#

Chapter 4 329

Command Definition F-K

LISTF

00010405 00000000 00000300 00020CEE 0EA78B32 00020CEE .......H........

0EA78B32 00020CEE 12F61E2D 00020CEE 0EA78B32 00000000 ................

000000A0 000001F5 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ........... ..

00009C90 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000050 00000500 ................

00100000 00190007 000F0000 20200000 [email protected][email protected].......

Additional Information

Commands

Manuals

LISTFILE

VERSION

CHDIR

LISTDIR (UDC) FINDFILE (UDC)

Performing System Management Tasks

Performing System Operation Tasks

330 Chapter 4

Command Definitions L-O

Chapter 5 331

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

LISTFILE

This command lists file and directory attributes through the use of options. The

LISTFILE information is a superset of the

LISTF

command information.

Syntax

LISTFILE

[ [

fileset

=] {

fileset

(

fileset

[ ,

fileset

] ...) } ]

[ [ ;FORMAT=]

format_opt

]

[ [ ;SELEQ=]

select_eq

| ^

indir

]

[ [ ;NAME=]

pattern

]

[ ;PASS]

[ ;{ PERM} { ;TEMP} [ ;PERMTEMP] ]

[ ;USENAME] [ ;TREE] [ ;NOTREE]

Parameters

fileset

Specifies the set of files to be listed. The default for

fileset

, meaning all

MPE-named files in your current working directory (CWD). If

fileset

includes more than one file, be sure to separate the file names with commas and enclose the set in parentheses, for example:

[ ]

:listfile (test1,test2,test3)

The files named in the

fileset

parameter can be either in MPE or HFS syntax (explained below). The file names dot (.) and dot-dot (..) have special meaning, that is, current directory and the parent of the current directory, respectively.

Using Wildcards

You may use wildcard characters in any position in the file name. You may use the

character as a wildcard in any position

except as the first character of the file name

. These wildcards have the following meaning: matches zero or more of any character matches one character matches one digit matches one character specified between the brackets if used within brackets ([ ]), the hyphen (-) means a range of characters. For example, "[c - g]" means all the characters between c

and g

inclusive. The character on the left must alphabetically precede the character on the right.

If used immediately after the left bracket ([), or just before the right bracket (]), hyphen (-) means the character `-' itself.

332 Chapter 5

Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

For example, "[a-c]" means one of ‘a', ‘b', or ‘c', whereas "[-a-c]" or "[a-c-]" means one of ‘a', ‘b', ‘c', or ‘-'.

It is illegal to specify [c-a], or [a-A] because ‘c' does not alphabetically precede ‘a' and uppercase ‘A' comes before lowercase ‘a' (in ASCII character evaluation). Also note that it is legal to specify [A-z] and any legal special characters.

MPE Syntax

fileset

does not begin with the dot or slash (indicating HFS syntax), it is parsed according to MPE syntax and has the following form:

filename

groupname

accountname

] ]

LISTFILE

command using MPE syntax does not display files that do not follow the traditional MPE naming conventions of up to eight character names for files, groups and accounts.

If the

fileset

parameter does not specify

groupname

, all the files (with uppercase names that have up to 8 alphanumeric characters) in the current working directory (CWD) are listed irrespective of whether CWD is an MPE group or not. For example, the following command lists the files in all of the groups of the logon account:

LISTFILE @.@

In contrast, the next command lists all the files in the CWD (which may be different from the logon group). However, only those files whose names are valid MPE names are displayed.

LISTFILE @

If the CWD is not an MPE group, the information about the file is displayed in an HFS format discussed below.

You may have an MPE group that also contains files with HFS syntax, for example, they are lowercase, have long names, or contain special characters. To see both MPE and HFS files in a group, type,

LISTFILE ./@

HFS Syntax

If the

fileset

begins with a dot (.) or a slash (/), it is assumed to be in HFS syntax. The characters composing the name may be selected from the following set:

a-z

A-Z

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - _ . ‘ ~ $ % ^ * + \ { } :

If the

fileset

parameter begins with a slash (/), the pathname is assumed to be an absolute pathname; otherwise, it is considered to be CWD relative.

333

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

format_opt

fileset

ends in a slash, it is treated as a directory name, and pattern is used to determine the file names that match. All the directories and files that match

fileset

are found, and searched recursively to display the files and directories that match

pattern

. For example, if

fileset

/SYS/@/

, all files and subdirectories within

SYS

, and all files and directories within those subdirectories are displayed. The default for pattern is

fileset

does not end in a slash, all of the files that match

fileset

are displayed. For example, if

fileset

/SYS/@

, you will see a list of all files, subdirectories and groups in the

SYS

directory, but not any files or subdirectories within those directories.

If you have specified

TREE

, a trailing slash is assumed at the end of the

fileset. For example, the command

LISTFILE /SYS/@;TREE

behaves like

LISTFILE /SYS/@/

. On the other hand, if you specify

NOTREE

, the trailing slash, if present at the end of a fileset, is ignored. Hence, the command

LISTFILE /SYS/@/;NOTREE

behaves like

LISTFILE /SYS/@

A format selection. This parameter has no effect on the files selected for display, but affects the selection of information about the files that you see.

fileset

begins with a dot (.) or slash (/), or if the CWD is different from your current MPE group, or if you specify the

;TREE

option, then you will see the HFS output style. This, in part, means that:

• Account, group, and directory names will end in a slash (/).

• File names will appear at the end of the output lines.

• Output begins in column two so that you can more easily detect filename wraparound from the previous line (which, if wrapping occurs, will begin in column one).

The following Table 5-1 displays the format options available.

Table 5-1 Format Options

Opti on

−

Name

ACD

Displayed Information

−

LABEL

FILES

Displays the file's ACD (access control definition). System Managers can view the ACD for any file. Account Managers can view the ACD for files in that account. File creators can view the ACD for their files. Other users can view an ACD only if that ACD specifies that the user has RACD (read

ACD) access.

Shows only the file label in hexadecimal. The hexadecimal display generated by this format option only serves a diagnostic purpose in

MPE/iX and is subject to change.

For each directory, this option displays

PATH=

The name of the file is displayed in a multicolumn format. This is the default.

334 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

Opti on

−

Name Displayed Information

SUMMARY Displays the file name, file code, record size, record format, and other file characteristics such as ASCII or binary records, carriage-control option, file type, current end-of-file location, and the maximum number of records allowed in the file.

DISC Displays the file name, file code, record size, file type, current end-of-file location, and the maximum number of records allowed in the file. It also displays the blocking factor, number of sectors in use, number of extents currently allocated, and the maximum number of extents allowed.

DETAIL

DETAIL;PA

• Fully qualified MPE file name is replaced by an absolute pathname.

• Creator field displays the fully qualified user ID (user.acct) of the file owner.

• For MPE groups, the SECURITY field displays

SAVE

; for entries other than MPE groups it is blank. All file access matrix fields are blank for anything other than MPE accounts, MPE groups, and files in an MPE group.

• The LOCKWORD field is omitted.

The creator, group id, and label address are omitted in

FORMAT=3

. These can be obtained by specifying -3 if you have sufficient capability (AM or

SM)

SECURITY Displays the security matrix for the file. This includes account, group and file-level security, and the access rights for the user.

For MPE groups and MPE accounts, the security matrix for group, account, and account-only are displayed. The rest of the fields of the file access matrix are blank.

For HFS directories, and files within HFS directories, all the fields of the file access matrix are blank. In addition,

LISTFILE

displays the message

ACD EXISTS.

DATA

DATA;PASS

QUALIFY

Shows

LISTFILE,3

data and all file-specific data in only the option 3 data is shown.

Shows the absolute pathname of the file.

LISTFILE,3

type format (KSAM, SPOOL, and symbolic links). If a file has no unique data,

Chapter 5 335

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

Opti on

Name

UNIQUE

select_eq

ACCESS

LOCKS

Displayed Information

Shows all file specific data in

LISTFILE,5

type format, but does not show

LISTFILE,3

data. If a file has no unique data, only the file name is displayed. Default = 0 (

FILES

Shows all accessors of the files listed. Restrictions apply.

Shows level 8 information and details about processes accessing the files including file locking data. Restrictions apply.

A selection equation. Use the selection equation as a filter on

fileset

. From the set of files matching the fileset, only files that match the

select_eq

requirements are listed. You may select file types by using the

FTYPE option, or you may select object types by using the

OBJECT

option.

Selection equations have the following format:

[FTYPE = KSAMXL | SPOOL]

[CODE = number | |mnemonic | |PRIV

[ACCESS = INUSE | OPEN | LOCK| EXCL]

You must enclose selection equations in square brackets. For example:

LISTFILE ./@ ;SELEQ=[OBJECT=DIR]

You can also use your text editor to make a file that contains the

OBJECT or

FTYPE

statement, for example

[OBJECT=DIR]

, and save it with a filename. Thereafter, you can select this file by entering the following command:

LISTFILE ./@ ;SELEQ=^FILENAME

The

OBJECT

option applies to HFS files, and may have any one of the following values.

ACCT

GROUP

Lists only the

MPE ACCOUNT

directory. You may use

ACCTS

ACCOUNT

ACCOUNTS

as synonyms for

ACCOUNT

Lists only the MPE GROUP directory. You may use

GROUPS

as a synonym for

GROUP

FILE

DIR

HFSDIR

SYMLINK

NUMBER

Lists only the files and not directories/groups/accounts.

You may use

FILES

as a synonym for

FILE

Lists only directories (including groups/accounts and the system root directory /). You may use

DIRS

DIRECTORY

, or

DIRECTORIES

as synonyms for

DIRECTORY

Lists only directories other than root, accounts, and groups.

Lists onlyfiles that are symbolic links.

List only files matching the specified file code number.

336 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

pattern

MNEMONIC

PRIV

INUSE

OPEN

LOCK

EXCL

List only files matching the specified file code mnemonic

List only files with negative file code.

Lists only files that are currently in use by users or by

MPE.

Lists only files that are opened by progams. INUSE is a superset of OPEN.

List only files being locked by a program.

List only files being closed exclusively

When POSIX syntax is used in the fileset,

pattern

is exactly the same as the

filename

components of

fileset

as previously described. The name parameter applies only to HFS syntax.

The

LISTFILE

command displays only those file names which match the

pattern

. For example,

LISTFILE /SYS/;NAME=OFF@

displays all the files/groups/directories under the

SYS

account that start with

OFF

, off

Off

, and so on.

pattern

is specified within single or double quotes, it is case sensitive. For example,

LISTFILE /SYS/;NAME=`OFF@'

displays all the files/groups/directories under the

SYS

account that start with

OFF

. It will not display names that start with off

Off

, and so on.

The default for the

pattern

parameter is

; that is, it matches all names without regard to case.

NOTE

PASS

PERM

TEMP

PERMTEMP

USENAME

You cannot use the

NAME

parameter for an MPE

fileset

because

pattern

can be specified as the part of the

fileset

. So, for example, instead of entering the command

LISTFILE @.@.@;NAME=@DOC

, enter the command

LISTFILE

@DOC.@.@.

instead.

The

PASS

option displays sensitive data. Using it depends on your access rights to the data; that is if you are the owner or have AM or SM capability.

The

PERM

option displays permanent files only. “PERM'' is the default.

The

TEMP

option displays temporary files only.

The

PERMTEMP

option displays both permanent and temporary files. The permanent files are listed before the temporary files.

The

USENAME

option applies only to HFS-named filesets. This option indicates that the name is to be used to determine how many levels to display. If the fileset ends in a slash (/), then all files at all levels below the target file are displayed. If the name does not end in a slash (/), then only

Chapter 5 337

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

TREE

NOTREE the files at the specified level are displayed. For example,

/@/@/@ indicates that all objects at the third level are to be displayed.

USENAME

is the default.

If the

TREE

option is specified, objects at all lower directory levels are displayed.

Indicates that only objects at the specified level are to be displayed. The

NOTREE

option overrides an HFS fileset that ends in a slash.

Operation Notes

You can use

LISTFILE

to list descriptions of one or more disk files at the level of detail you select. You must have traverse directory entries (TD) and/or read directory entries (RD) access for the directories in the pathname of the files that will be displayed by

LISTFILE

(Refer to the

ALTSEC

command for further information on directory permissions.)

For example, if the

fileset

/dir1/dir@/@

, you must have TD access for the root directory

(/) and dir1. Also, you must have RD access for dir1

since the next name is wildcarded

( dir@

) and have RD access to each directory within the path specified by

/dir1/dir@ since the next (and final) name is a wildcard (

You may list any file, but there are restrictions on the kinds of information available to various users. A standard user may specify a

listlevel

of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. If you have account manager capability (AM), you may request

listlevel

-1, -3 or -5, 8, 9 information about files in your own account. If you have System Manager capability (SM), you can specify any

listlevel

to view all information for all files on the system. List levels 8 and 9 are also available if you are the owner of the files. A file description is not listed unless the file's home volume set (PV) is mounted.

Use

This command may be issued from a session, a job, a program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts execution.

If the

fileset

is in MPE syntax,

LISTFILE

only displays file names that follow MPE naming syntax. For example,

LISTFILE @,2

will not display the file am_pm

, whereas

LISTFILE

./@,2

will display the file.

fileset

ends in a slash (/) or the

;TREE

option, then the contents of every matching directory will be displayed recursively. To see just a directory name, but not all the files under it, use the

;NOTREE

option or omit the trailing slash.

MPE Examples

LISTFILE @

FILENAME

FILE1

LISTFILE @.PUB.OFFICE,2

ACCOUNT= OFFICE GROUP= PUB

338 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

FILENAME CODE LOGICAL RECORD- SPACE

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT R/B SECTORS #X MX

F4 80B AF 411 411 16 144 2 *

F5 80B AF 199 199 16 64 1 *

HFS Examples

The following figure illustrates a hierarchical directory structure. In this figure, directory names are shown as the character d

plus a number (for example, d0

), and file names are shown as the character f

plus a number (for example, f1

). The examples assume the directory structure shown. They also assume that the current working directory (CWD) is

/ACCT/GROUP/d0

Example File System

/ACCT/GROUP/d0 = CWD

-|-

| | | | | |

d1 d2 d3 f1 f2 f3

| |

|- |

| | | | | | | | | | |

d4 f4 f5 d5 d6 f6 d7 f7 f8 f9 f10

| | | |

-| -| -| |-

| | | | | | | | | | | |

f11 f12 d8 f13 f14 f15 d9 f16 f17 f18 f19 f20

The first example below sets the `HPPROMPT'' variable to show the current working directory, changes the CWD to d0

, and produces a listing of all files one level below the

CWD.

:hello manager.acct,group

:setvar hpprompt "hpcwd:"

/ACCT/GROUP:chdir ./d0

CWD is "/ACCT/GROUP/d0".

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile ./@

PATH= /ACCT/GROUP/d0/

d1/ d2/ d3/ f1 f2 f3

The next example produces a listing of all files one level below the CWD using

FORMAT=2

(DISC) option.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile ./@,2

PATH= /ACCT/GROUP/d0/./

CODE LOGICAL RECORD- SPACE FILENAME

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT R/B SECTORS #X MX

16W HBD 4 67107839 1 64 2 * d1/

16W HBD 4 67107839 1 64 2 * d2/

16W HBD 4 67107839 1 64 2 * d3/

80B AF 12 12 1 16 1 1 f1

80B AF 12 12 1 16 1 1 f2

80B AF 12 12 1 16 1 1 f3

Chapter 5 339

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

In the next example, specifying the absolute pathname produces a listing of all entries one level below the group.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /ACCT/GROUP/@,2

PATH= /ACCT/GROUP/

CODE LOGICAL RECORD- SPACE FILENAME

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT R/B SECTORS #X MX

16W HBD 4 67107839 1 64 2 * *d0/

In the next example, specifying the

NAME

parameter produces a listing of all entries with names beginning with a lower case "d". Using the

FORMAT=6

(QUALIFY) option shows the absolute pathname of all HFS entries.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /;name=`d@';format=6

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d1/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d4/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d5/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d5/d8/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d6/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/d7/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/d7/d9/

The next example illustrates the use of the

OBJECT=ACCT

parameter to show all accounts on the system.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /@,6; seleq=[object=acct]

/ACCT/

/SYS/

/TELESUP/

/TEST/

The next example illustrates the

OBJECT=GROUP

parameter to show all groups on the system.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /@/@;seleq=[object=group];format=qualify

/ACCT/GROUP/

/ACCT/PUB/

/SYS/ALINE925/

/TELESUP/PUB/

/TEST/PUB/

/TEST/SPOOL/

/TEST/SPOOLSTD/

/TEST/TEMPLATE/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

340 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

The next example illustrates the use of the

OBJECT=DIR

parameter to show all directories on the system. This is similar to the

FINDDIR

UDC.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /, qualify;seleq=[object=dir];format=qualify

/ACCT/

/ACCT/GROUP/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d1/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d4/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d5/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d5/d8/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/d6/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/d7/

/ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/d7/d9/

/ACCT/PUB/

/SYS/

/SYS/ALINE925/

/SYS/ALINK925/

/TELESUP/PUB/

/TEST/PUB/

/TEST/SPOOL/

/TEST/SPOOLSTD/

/TEST/TEMPLATE/

The next example illustrates a summary listing (format option 1) of all files in subdirectory d3

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile d3/@,1

PATH= /ACCT/GROUP/d0/./d3/

CODE LOGICAL RECORD- FILENAME

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT

16W DBH 4 67107839 d7/

80B AF 12 12 f10

80B AF 12 12 f7

80B AF 12 12 f8

80B AF 12 12 f9

The next example illustrates a detail listing (format option 3) of all files in subdirectory d3

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile ./d3/@,3

********************

FILE: /ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/d7/

FILE CODE : 0 FOPTIONS: DIRECTORY

BLK FACTOR: 1 OWNER : **

REC SIZE: 32(BYTES) GROUP ID: **

BLK SIZE: 32(BYTES) SECURITYREAD :

EXT SIZE: 0(SECT) WRITE :

NUM REC: 4 APPEND :

NUM SEC: 64 LOCK :

Chapter 5 341

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

NUM EXT: 2 EXECUTE :

MAX REC: 67107839 **SECURITY IS ON

FLAGS : NO ACCESSORS

NUM LABELS: 0 CREATED : TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 2:20 PM

MAX LABELS: 0 MODIFIED: TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 2:23 PM

DISC DEV #: 1 ACCESSED: WED, JUL 22, 1992, 12:05 PM

SEC OFFSET: 0 LABEL ADDR: **

VOLCLASS : MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET:DISC

********************

FILE: /ACCT/GROUP/d0/d3/f9

FILE CODE : 0 FOPTIONS: ASCII,FIXED,NOCCTL,STD

BLK FACTOR: 1 OWNER : **

REC SIZE: 80(BYTES) GROUP ID: **

BLK SIZE: 80(BYTES) SECURITYREAD :

EXT SIZE: 13(SECT) WRITE :

NUM REC: 12 APPEND :

NUM SEC: 16 LOCK :

NUM EXT: 1 EXECUTE :

MAX REC: 12 **SECURITY IS ON

MAX EXT: 1 FLAGS : NO ACCESSORS

NUM LABELS: 0 CREATED : TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 2:21 PM

MAX LABELS: 0 MODIFIED: TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 2:21 PM

DISC DEV #: 2 ACCESSED: TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 2:21 PM

SEC OFFSET: 0 LABEL ADDR: **

VOLCLASS : MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET:DISC

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

The next example illustrates the use of the

FORMAT=-3

option to show the owner. You must be the owner, or have AM or SM capability to use this option.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /ACCT/GROUP/@,-3

********************

FILE: /ACCT/GROUP/d0/

FILE CODE : 0 FOPTIONS: DIRECTORY

BLK FACTOR: 1 OWNER : MANAGER.ACCT

REC SIZE: 32(BYTES) GROUP ID: ACCT

BLK SIZE: 32(BYTES) SECURITYREAD :

EXT SIZE: 0(SECT) WRITE :

NUM REC: 4 APPEND :

NUM SEC: 64 LOCK :

NUM EXT: 2 EXECUTE :

MAX REC: 67107839 **SECURITY IS ON

FLAGS : 1 ACCESSOR,SHARED

NUM LABELS: 0 CREATED : TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 1:10 PM

MAX LABELS: 0 MODIFIED: TUE, JUL 21, 1992, 2:16 PM

DISC DEV #: 2 ACCESSED: WED, JUL 22, 1992, 11:40 AM

SEC OFFSET: 0 LABEL ADDR: $000000E1 $0009A220

VOLCLASS : MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET:DISC

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

The next example illustrates the use of the

FORMAT=4

(SECURITY) option to display the security matrix for all objects one level below the group (in this case, d0

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile /ACCT/GROUP/@,4

********************

FILE: /ACCT/GROUP/d0/

ACCOUNT READ :

WRITE :

APPEND :

342 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFILE

LOCK :

EXECUTE :

GROUP READ :

WRITE :

APPEND :

LOCK :

EXECUTE :

SAVE :

FILE - READ : FCODE: 0

WRITE : **SECURITY IS ON

APPEND : ACD EXISTS

LOCK :

EXECUTE :

FOR MANAGER.ACCT: RACD, TD, RD, CD, DD

The next example illustrates the use of the

FORMAT=-2

(ACD) option to display the access contol definition (ACD) for file f4

in subdirectory d2

. Note that all users (@.@) have read

ACD (RACD) access for this file.

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:listfile ./d2/f4,-2

PATH= /ACCT/GROUP/d0/d2/

-ACD ENTRIES- FILENAME

@.@ : RACD f4

/ACCT/GROUP/d0:

Related Information

Commands

Manuals

LISTF

PLISTF

(UDC),

LISTFTEMP

LISTSPF

(for spool files),

FINDFILE

(UDC),

FINDDIR

(UDC),

LISTDIR

(UDC)

None

Chapter 5 343

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFTEMP

LISTFTEMP

Displays information about one or more temporary files.

Syntax

LISTFTEMP

[

fileset

] [ ,

listlevel

] [ ;

listfile

]

Parameters

fileset

Specifies the set of temporary files to be listed. The default is

, producing a listing of all temporary files. You may select the temporary file(s) to be listed by using the fully qualified form for

fileset

listlevel filename

groupname

accountname

]]

Use the

symbol to specify a single numeric character. Use the

symbol to specify a single alphanumeric character. Use the

symbol to specify one or more alphanumeric characters. By itself,

represents all the members of a set.

Refer to appendix G for examples of using wildcard characters.

Specifies the level (amount and format) of information about the temporary file(s) you select. The default is zero.

The following Table 5-2 displays the

listlevel

options available.

Table 5-2 List Options

Option

−

Displayed Information

Displays the file's ACD (access control definition). System Managers can view the

ACD for any file. Account Managers can view the ACD for files in that account. File creators can view the ACD for their files. Other users can view an ACD only if that

ACD specifies that the user has RACD (read ACD) access.

Shows only the file label in hexadecimal. The hexadecimal display generated by this format option only serves a diagnostic purpose in MPE/iX and is subject to change.

For each directory, this option displays

PATH=

The name of the file is displayed in a multicolumn format. This is the default.

344 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFTEMP

Option

−

Displayed Information

Displays the file name, record size, extent size, number of records, user's access rights, and other file characteristics including the date created, modified, and last accessed.

The same information for MPE and HFS files is displayed except for the following differences:

• Fully qualified MPE file name is replaced by an absolute pathname.

• Creator field displays the fully qualified user ID (user.acct) of the file owner.

• For MPE groups, the SECURITY field displays

SAVE

; for entries other than

MPE groups it is blank. All file access matrix fields are blank for anything other than MPE accounts, MPE groups, and files in an MPE group.

• The LOCKWORD field is omitted.

The creator, group id, and label address are omitted in

FORMAT=3

. These can be obtained by specifying -3 if you have sufficient capability (AM or SM)

Displays the security matrix for the file. This includes account, group and file-level security, and the access rights for the user.

For MPE groups and MPE accounts, the security matrix for group, account, and account-only are displayed. The rest of the fields of the file access matrix are blank.

For HFS directories, and files within HFS directories, all the fields of the file access matrix are blank. In addition,

LISTFILE

displays the message

ACD EXISTS.

Shows

LISTFILE,3

data and all file-specific data in

LISTFILE,3

type format

(KSAM, SPOOL, and symbolic links). If a file has no unique data, only the option 3 data is shown.

Shows the absolute pathname of the file.

Shows all file specific data in

LISTFILE,5

type format, but does not show

LISTFILE,3

data. If a file has no unique data, only the file name is displayed.

Default = 0 (

FILES

Shows all accessors of the files listed. Restrictions apply

Shows level 8 information and details about processes accessing the files including file locking data. Restrictions apply.

SECTORS

The number of sectors allocated for the file on disk. This number is always a multiple of 16 (the page size in MPE/iX). This value is an indication of the size of the file.

Number of extents. This number is displayed only to maintain compatibility with MPE V/E. This value does not indicate the size of the file. The variable-extent structure of MPE/iX permits a file to have a variable number of extents, all of variable size.

Maximum number of extents. This number is displayed only to maintain compatibility with MPE V/E. If the value is greater than 32 (the limit on

MPE V/E), then

is displayed.

Chapter 5 345

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFTEMP

listfile

The name of the output file. The default is

$STDLIST

. If you specify

listfile

, it is automatically created as a new ASCII file with variable-length records, closed in the temporary domain, and with user-supplied carriage-control characters (

CCTL

), OUT access mode, and

EXC

(EXCLUSIVE access) option. All other characteristics are the same as they would be with the

FILE

command default specifications.

Operation Notes

This command lists descriptions of one or more temporary files at the level you specify. You may list any file, but, based on your capabilities, there are restrictions on the kind of information that is available to you.

Use

This command is available from a session, job, program, or in BREAK. Pressing

Break

aborts the execution of this command.

Examples

The following examples show the output displayed for the various levels of the

LISTFTEMP command:

The next example shows "Level 0" output.

LISTFTEMP

TEMPORARY FILES FOR PETE.HPXLII,DEVELOP

LINKCLK.DEVELOP.HPXLII

The next example shows "Level 1" output.

LISTFTEMP ,1

TEMPORARY FILES FOR PETE.HPXLII,DEVELOP

ACCOUNT= HPXLII GROUP= DEVELOP

FILENAME CODE LOGICAL RECORD

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT

LINKCLK 128W FB 0 1023 (TEMP)

The next example shows "Level 2" output.

LISTFTEMP ,2

TEMPORARY FILES FOR PETE.HPXLII,DEVELOP

ACCOUNT= HPXLII GROUP= DEVELOP

FILENAME CODE -LOGICAL RECORD- SPACE

SIZE TYP EOF LIMIT R/B SECTORS #X MX

LINKCLK 128W FB 0 1023 1 128 1 8 (TEMP)

The next example shows "Level 3" output. Fields containing "n/a" are not implemented.

LISTFTEMP ,3

********************

FILE: LINKCLK.DEVELOP.HPXLII

FCODE: O FOPTIONS: ASCII,FIXED,NOCCTL,STD

346 Chapter 5

Command Definitions L-O

LISTFTEMP

BLK FACTOR: 16 CREATOR:

REC SIZE: 80(BYTES) LOCKWORD:

BLK SIZE: 640(BYTES) SECURITYREAD :ANY

EXT SIZE: 25(SECT) WRITE :ANY

NUM REC: 501 APPEND :ANY

NUM SEC: 165 LOCK :ANY

NUM EXT: 7 EXECUTE:ANY

MAX RED: 501 **SECURITY IS ON

MAX EXT: 7 FLAGS: n/a

NUM LABELS: 0 CREATED: FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 11:55 AM

MAX LABELS: 0 MODIFIED: FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 12:34 PM

DISC DEV #: 3 ACCESSED: FRI, 21 SEP 1986, 12:46 PM

SEC OFFSET: 0

VOLSET : MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET

VOLNAME : MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET: MEMBER1

VOLCLASS : MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET: DISC

CLASS : DISC LABEL ADDR: $00000010 $0010E014

The next example shows "Level -1" output.

LISTFTEMP LINKCLK,-1

F = LINKCLK

00000000 44495343 20202020 20202020 20202020 20202020 .........@..

LINK

20202020 20202020 20202020 20310000 4C495354 53202020 DEVELOP ..